Home

User Manual - Ana

1. Operation Temperature 50 Operation Temperature 40 FRAME CODE HEAVY DUTY HEAVY DUTY Rated Power kW 150 Rated Power kW 120 at 400Vac Overload at 400Vac Overload 5070006 5x x 6 2 2 9 7 5 3 9 570007 5x x xx 7 5 3 11 94 4 11 1 5070009 5x 9 4 14 11 5 5 14 5070012 5x x xx 12 5 5 18 15 7 5 18 SD70018 5x x xx 18 7 5 27 23 11 27 SD70024 5 x xx 24 11 36 30 15 36 SD70032 5x x xx 32 15 48 40 18 5 48 2 SD70038 5x x xx 38 18 5 57 48 22 57 SD70048 5x x xx 48 22 72 60 30 72 SD70060 5x x xx 60 30 90 75 37 90 3 SD70075 5x x xx 75 37 113 94 45 113 SD70090 5x x xx 90 45 135 113 55 135 SD70115 5x x xx 115 55 173 144 75 173 4 SD70150 5x x xx 150 75 225 188 90 225 SD70170 5x x xx 170 90 255 213 110 255 SD70210 5x x xx 210 110 315 263 132 315 5 SD70250 5x x xx 250 132 375 313 160 375 SD70275 5 x xx 275 150 413 344 200 426 5070330 5x x xx 330 160 495 413 220 495 6 SD70370 5x x xx 370 200 555 463 250 555 SD70460 5x x xx 460 250 690 515 315 690 SD70580 5x x xx 580 315 870 725 400 870 T SD70650 5x x xx 650 355 975 813 450 975 SD70720 5x x xx 720 400 1080 900 500 1080 8 5070840 5 840 450 1260 1050 560 1260 5070925 5x x xx 925 500 1388 1156 630 1388 SD71030 5x x xx 1030 560 1545 1288 710 1545 9 SD71150 5x x xx 1150 630 1725 1438 800 1725 SD71260 5x x xx 1260 710 1890 1575 900 1890 5071440 5x x x
2. omom FAULT G25 6 13 13 HP LEV 100Bar lt gt 0 3276 Engineer Units laut FAULT 00 7 pm m fe vas ora uas s lt gt 0 0 3276 Engineer Units S NzNo YzYes Pressure Loss SD70ITGOO068BI Figure 10 16 Parameters structure from subgroup S25 6 G25 to subgroup S25 9 G25 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 79 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 9 6 6 FP ALTER MOD 0 LINEAR CYCLE DUTY SHARE G25 9 7 7 JPon 0 0 lt gt 0 0 3276 Engineer Units G25 9 8 8 JPon DLYz20s lt 0106005 G25 9 9 9 JPof P 0 0Bar lt 0 0 3276 Engineer Units G25 9 10 10 PRp 3005 lt 0 1 6000s G25 9 11 11 PRp DLY OFF lt OFF 0 0 1 6000m 25 10 Flow Limitation Algorithm 625 10 1 1 FLOW SEL PULSE PULSE 2 G25 10 2 2 MAX 1 0 10001 5 2100 3276 Engineer Units 0 7 p JJ NN 50701 60069 Figure 10 17 Parameters structure from subgroup S25 9 G25 to subgroup 525 11 G25 80 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 1 Group 1 G1 Options Me
3. 332 CONFIGURATION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS 1SEL REF MREF 2 PID LOC 0 0 PID LOCAL SETPOI 3 SEL FBK AI2 4 GAIN Kp 8 0 PID PROPORTIONAL 5 INTEGRAL 0 0s PID INTEGRAL 6 DIFFEREN 0 0s PID DIFFERENTIAL 7 INVERT 8 ERR PID 40 076 1STOP 1 RAMP 2 STOP 2 SPIN 3 BRK STP 2 OFF STP2 UNDER SPEED 4 START RAMP 5 START 2 RAMP 6 START DLY OFF DELAY TO START 7 STOP DLY OFF DELAY TO STOP 8 STP MIN SP 9 OFFRet OFF DELAY AFTER STOP 10 RUN AFTR VFL Y 11 SPNstr B OFF SPIN START TUNE 12 OFFdly2 OFF DELAY AFTER STP2 1 SEL RELAY 1 02 2T Ri ON 0 0s R1 ACTIVAT DELAY 3T R1 OFF 0 0s Ri DEACTIV DELAY 4 INVERT 1 5 SEL RELAY 2 03 6 T R2 0 06 R2 ACTIVAT DELAY 7 T R2 OFF 0 0s R2 DEACTIV DELAY 8 INVERT R2 N 9 SEL RELAY 3 05 10 T R3 ON 0 0s R3 ACTIVAT DELAY FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 G6 PID Control MREF SETTING 2 0 0 Al2 8 0 0 0s 0 0s N 0 0 G7 Start Stop Mode Configuration RAMP SPIN OFF RAMP RAMP OFF OFF N OFF Y OFF OFF G8 Outputs 8 1 Output Relays 02 0 05 0 05 03 0 05 0 05 05 0 08 CONFIGURATION REGIST
4. www power electronics com
5. 314 FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 12 2 Procedure for Fault Solutions DISPLAY POSSIBLE CAUSE ACTIONS F0 NO FAULT Motor output short circuit Wiring fault Check output cables and motor for possible wiring F11LIM FLT Circuit fault faults or short circuits Motor fault High voltage peak on the input F2 V LIM FLT High load regeneration Pi ee of input power supply Decrease Deceleration ramp too high parameters G5 2 Seems tamps DECEL1 and 55 4 DECEL2 F3 PDINT FLT See faults F1 and F2 See faults F1 and F2 F4 U DESAT Short circuit F5 U DESAT F6 V DESAT Extreme over current equipment overload Check if there are possible wiring faults or a motor fault If the fault persists after disconnecting output F7 V DESAT Wiring fault circuit fault F8 W DESAT ring TAUI circuit wires request technical assistance F9 W DESAT Desaturation of IGBT IGBT fault Short circuit F10 NEG DESAT Extreme over current equipment overload Check conditions of input power supply and wiring Wiring fault circuit fault conditions Desaturation of IGBT IGBT fault F41 VIN LOSS Input power is incorrect damaged fuses Check conditions of input power supply Input wiring is incorrect Check wiring Input power is incorrect damaged fuses Check conditions of input power s
6. free configuration is not allowed for it 280 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 9 6 ALTERNATION MODE OF FIXED PUMPS Screen 6 FP ALTER MOD 0 Description Alternation mode of fixed pumps Range 0 2 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42139 Modbus range 0 to 2 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the alternation mode used by the drive to start the fixed pumps Options 0 gt LINEAR The drive will always start the fixed pumps by following the same sequence 1 2 3 and will stop them in the same way 1 2 3 no alternation 1 gt CYCLE The first pump to start will be the next one to the last stopped pump 2 DUTY SHARE The drive will try to make the operation times of all available pumps equal G25 9 7 STARTING PRESSURE OF JOCKEY PUMP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 7 JPon P 0 0Bar JOCKEY ON PRESS Starting pressure of Jockey pump 0 0 3276 Engineering units 0 0Bar YES 42371 0 to 32760 YES It allows setting the pressure level below which the Jockey pump will start During periods of very low demand for example tank filling processor opening a couple of taps the Jockey pump will start to cover this demand This pump will only start if the drive is sleeping and additionally there is some outpu
7. X10 Connector for optional encoders board X2 Programmable digital outputs X3 Keypad connection X8 Communication buses connection X1 Digital inputs PTC connection programmable analog inputs and outputs control power supply and serial communication JP1101 JP1104 To select communication port via 5232 485 or USB 50701 0002 4 X9 For optional X4 USB port inputs outputs board Figure 11 1 Location and description of the user connectors The purpose of the Serial Communication Network of the SDRIVE 700 is integrate the drive itself into a network compatible with the protocol of Modbus communications This is possible by using RS232 or RS485 physical communications port or USB port For this it is necessary modify the position of the jumper of the control board JP1101 JP1104 Communications ports are clearly indicated in that connector Put the jumper in the desired position according to your needs Figure 11 2 Jumper for communications port selection MODBUS COMMUNICATION 289 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Modbus communication system allows SD700 drive to be controlled and or monitored as a slave by a Modbus master from a remote location RS485 network allows connecting up to 240 equipments in the same network Nevertheless RS232 network only allows connecting one unit slave into the network SD700 drive operates as a peripheral slave when is connected to Modbus s
8. INPUT 2 Signal connected to Analogue Input 2 19 gt INPUT 1 2 Sum of signals connected to analogue inputs 1 and 2 20 Reserved Reserved for future use 21 MAX SCALE We will get a maximum value forcing the comparator in order to obtain the needed status always activated or deactivated 22 ABSOLUT SPEED Comparison signal is motor speed without sign absolute value G9 1 2 TYPE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 1 Screen 2 COMP 1 0 Description Selection of Comparator 1 type Range 0 1 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40303 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the operation mode of the Comparator 1 Operation modes are 0 gt Normal Comparator 1 will be activated when the ON condition is given setting realized in G9 1 3 gt Activation value of Comparator 1 in normal mode and will be deactivated when the OFF condition is given setting realized in G9 1 7 gt Deactivation value of Comparator 1 in normal mode 1 gt Window Comparator 1 will be activated when signal is within the limit 1 setting realized in G9 1 5 gt Limit 1 for Comparator 1 in window mode and limit 2 setting realized in G9 1 4 Limit 2 for Comparator 1 in window mode and additionally limit 2 is higher than limit 1 If limit 2 is lower than limit 1 logical function of comparator output will be inverted In the followin
9. 5 G25 1 9 Local setpoint 5 for the PID e o m 4 79 4 eo 00 o m 4 79 4 N e 00 G25 1 10 Local setpoint 6 for the PID G25 1 11 Local setpoint 7 for the PID N o m 4 79 4 T e 00 o G25 1 12 Local setpoint 8 for the PID COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 327 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Parameter 7 Name Description 3 PID FBK AI2 1LP Pon 0 0Bar 1LP T SLP 20s 2 SLPsp1 40 0 3 SLPsp2 42 0 4 SLPsp3 44 0 5 SLPsp4 46 0 6 SLPsp 48 0 7 SLPsp 50 0 8 SLPsp 52 0 9 SLPsp8 54 0 G25 Pump Control 525 2 PID Setting G25 2 3 PID feedback source Al2 It allows selecting Analogue Input 2 as feedback signal for PID regulator G25 3 1 Wake up level of the drive G25 Pump Control G25 Pump Control 625 3 Start Conditions x xBar gt When demand decreases the drive can go in sleep mode It allows setting the wake up level for the drive This value is set as units of PID setpoint 25 4 Stop Conditions 20s gt This delay time will be applied to any conditions that G25 4 1 Delay time before activating sleep activate the sleep mode These conditions are sleep speed No Flow input Flow measurement and sleep current If anyone of them G25 4 2 S 025 4 3 5 G25 4 4 S G25 4 5 S G25 4 6 S G25 4 7 S G25 4 8 S G25 4 9 S
10. ses Drive status during pump control 42008 SV8 2 Feedback Third field of the visualization screen Feedback Operated time by Pump 1 minutes Operated time by Pump 2 minutes Operated time by Pump 3 minutes Operated time by Pump 1 days Operated time by Pump 2 days Operated time by Pump 3 days Reset counters Operated time by Pump 4 minutes Operated time by Pump 5 minutes Operated time by Pump 4 days Operated time by Pump 5 days 42022 5 84 Status of fixed pumps 4 and 5 Pump 4 42023 SV8 4 Status of fixed pumps 4 and 5 Pump 5 42035 G25 1 1 Control mode 42041 G25 1 2 42042 G25 1 Value of speed reference for local source in 5 5 13 manual mode 3 42043 02514 Source for the alternative speed reference in manual mode G25 1 13 42044 54522 Time for automatic stop 42045 G25 2 1 PID setpoint source Status of fixed pumps 1 2 and 3 Pump 1 Source selection for speed reference in manual mode 0 gt REGL 1 PMAN 2 OMAN 3 gt HIPP 4 3 HIPR 5 gt FLOD 6 gt NFLO 7 3 CAVS 8 gt CAVI 9 gt LOPR 10 gt LOWA 11 gt CYCL 12 gt 13 FLOW 14 gt OFF 15 gt SLEP 16 17 gt RAMP 18 3 FILL 19 gt COMP 20 JOCK 21 gt PRIM 22 FINP Read only Read only Read only 0 3 See 42003 Read only 0 3 See 42003 8192 100 Maximum range of the Analogue Input Real Value Modbus Val
11. 48 9 4 Parameters SV 4 Internal Visualization 51 9 5 Parameters SV 5 Programmable 53 9 6 Parameters SV 6 59 97 Parameters SV 8 Pump Control sss enm eene 60 10 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS cerent 64 10 1 Group 1 G1 Options 220020000 0000 6001 beenden 81 10 2 Group 2 G2 Motor Nameplate Data sse eee 86 10 3 Group 3 G3 iiec tete tree Pe en E rette ere ia Le tuenda pra 89 10 4 Group G4 Inputs rr Rr tee ee eher sys 91 10 5 Group 5 G5 Acceleration and Deceleration 114 10 6 Group 6 G6 PID Control niente retire Lee endet eee recens 122 10 7 Group 7 G7 Start Stop Mode Configuration e 126 10 8 8 G8 OutpUls oret npe ET cre 11 85212248 sica sin 137 10 9 Group 9 G9 154 10 10 Group 10 G10 Limits dn dne cte 173 INDEX 5 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 11 Group 11 G141 Protectlons 55 244 ehe
12. Figure 10 46 Activation and deactivation of Sleep Mode G25 3 2 START SPEED FOR THE FIXED PUMPS Screen 2 FP SpON 90 0 Extended info FIX PMP STAR SPD Description Start speed for the fixed pumps Range 250 to 250 Default value 90 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42055 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 241 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function SPEED G25 3 2 G25 5 1 DRIVE PUMP ON FIXED PUMP X ON It allows setting the drive speed above of which the fixed pumps will start This one is an optional condition that can be disabled For that you must set this parameter value to 0 in that way any speed for above of this one is able to start the pumps This is the speed of the drive is not considered to start the fixed pumps So we force this condition to be fulfilled therefore it is not already a condition The value is set as percentage of motor speed At the moment of starting of the fixed pumps additionally it will also considered the start delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 3 4 to G25 3 8 and the PID error parameter G25 3 3 gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps G25 3 4 G25 3 8 The grade depends on the set deceleration value G25 3 2 gt Start speed for the fixed pumps G25 34 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 1 Relay 1 G25 3 5 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 2 Relay 2 G25 3 6 gt
13. If multi references are speed references you must only select the option MREF in parameter G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed or in G3 2 Reference source 2 of speed depending on the reference source of speed is selected f multi references are PID setpoints first you must to enable the PID regulator by selecting option PID G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed or in 53 2 Reference source 2 of speed Next you must select option MREF in parameter G6 1 gt Source selection for introducing reference signal When you select option 2 MREF 2 WIRES in parameter G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration digital inputs 5 and 6 are configured automatically to select multiple references 015 represents high bit and DI6 represents low bit The combination of these inputs offers the possibility of selecting up to four different speed references or PID setpoints depending on the selected option explained above The following table relates the inputs DI5 and DI6 to the selected multi reference PARAMETER REFERENCE DI5 DI6 G14 4 MREF 4 0 0 G14 5 MREF 5 0 1 G14 6 MREF 6 1 0 G14 7 7 1 1 When you select option 3 gt MREF WIRES in parameter G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration digital inputs 4 5 and 6 are configured automatically to select multiple references 014 represents high bit and DI6 represents lo
14. Screen 18 MAC F 171 Description MAC address F Range 0 255 Default value 171 Set on run YES Modbus address 40391 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field F of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics See Function in parameter G20 4 13 gt MAC address for additional information 224 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 Group 25 G25 Pump Control This parameters group will be available if parameter G1 7 Program activation is set to option PUMP 10 20 1 Pumps Program General Description The objective of this functionality is to achieve a comprehensive control of the pumping systems using variable speed drives of SDRIVE 700 series using in that cases the minimum peripherical devices as possible The program comprises all that options which allows controlling the process correctly avoiding the use of those external auxiliary devices such as timers relays PLC etc This program has been thought to control the drive and additionally to control up to 5 auxiliary fixed pumps Apart of this there is the possibility of using one of this pumps as Jockey pump it will operate only under very low demand conditions in case of the drive is in sleep mode or one pump can be used as Priming pump it will operate to fulfil the aspir
15. See Function in parameter G20 4 9 Gateway address for additional information 222 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G20 4 13 MAC ADDRESS A Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 13 MAC A 12 MAC address 0 255 12 YES 40386 0 to 255 YES It allows setting the field A of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics The format of the MAC address is the following one A B C D E F Therefore the setting of this address is realized by introducing a value in each parameter that configure the complete address this is by assigning a value to each one of the 6 parameters from parameter G20 4 13 MAC address to parameter G20 4 18 MAC address 0 G20 4 14 MAC ADDRESS B Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 14 MAC B 34 MAC address B 0 255 34 YES 40387 0 to 255 YES It allows setting the field B of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics See Function in parameter G20 4 13 gt MAC address for additional information G20 4 15 MAC ADDRESS C Screen Description Range Default
16. 0 Description Gateway address B Range 0 255 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40383 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field B of the Gateway address of the local network of the user This address is needed to the drive access to an external network This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 9 Gateway address for additional information G20 4 11 GATEWAY ADDRESS C Screen 11 GATEWAY 0 Description Gateway address C Range 0 255 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40384 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field C of the Gateway address of the local network of the user This address is needed to the drive access to an external network This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 9 Gateway address for additional information G20 4 12 GATEWAY ADDRESS D Screen 12 GATEWAY 0 Description Gateway address D Range 0 255 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40385 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field D of the Gateway address of the local network of the user This address is needed to the drive access to an external network This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user
17. 0 05 00 334 CONFIGURATION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS 1 COMP 3 SEL 00 2 COM 3 0 3 SP C3 ON 100 C3 ACTIVAT LEVEL 4 LIM 2 C3 100 C3 WINDOW LIMIT2 5 LIM 1 C3 0 WINDOW LIMIT1 6 T C3 ON 0 0s C3 ACTIVAT DELAY 7 SP 0 C3 DEACTIV LEVEL 8T C3 OF 0 0s C3 DEACTIV DELAY 9 SEL FUNT C3 00 1 MIN1 SP 0 00 SPEED MIN LIMIT1 2 MAX1 SP 100 SPEED MAX LIMIT1 3 MIN2 5 100 SPEED MIN LIMIT2 4 MAX2 SP 100 SPEED MAX LIMIT2 CURRENT 6 I LIM TO OFF TIMOUT MAX CURRE 71 2 __ MAX CURRENT 2 8 MI2 brSP OFF MAX CURR BRK SPD 9 MAX TOR 150 MAX TORQUE 10 T LIM TO OFF TIMEOUT MAX TORQ 11 INVERSION N 1 SP TO OFF TMAX LIMITIN SPD 2 STOP TO 0FF TIMEOUT STOPPING 3 GND I LIMIT 10 GND CURR MAX LEV 4 LOW VOLT 360V LO INPUT VOLTAGE 5 LOW V TO 5s LO INP VOL 6 HIGH VOLT 440V HI INPUT VOLTAGE 7 HI V TO 5s HI INP VOL 8 Dlasy VO 1 0s VOUT asyTRIP DLY FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 G9 Comparators 59 3 Comparator 3 00 SETTING 2 0 100 100 0 0 05 0 0 05 00 010 Limits 0 00 100 100 100 150 G11
18. 0 0s Extended info C2 DEACTIV DELAY Description OFF delay time to deactivate Comparator 2 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40316 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a timer to deactivate the output of the Comparator 2 When the deactivation condition of the output signal of Comparator 2 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the deactivation of this signal for the time set in this parameter If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears before elapsing OFF delay time the output of the comparator will be not deactivated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 166 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G9 2 9 SELECTION OF OUTPUT FUNCTION FOR COMPARATOR 2 Screen 9 SEL FUNT C2 00 Description Selection of the output function for the Comparator 2 Range 00 11 Default value 00 Set on run YES Modbus address 40317 Modbus range 0 to 11 Read Write YES Function It allows user to select which function will be activated by Comparator 2 To get information about the configuration options see Function in parameter G9 1 9 Selection of output function for Comparator 1 Note If activation and deactivation levels are set to similar values and delay times are set to OFF any noise that appears in the signals of selected source can cause an oscillation in the comparator and therefore an inco
19. 55 7 Ramp 1 for reference increase of motorized potentiometer 55 8 gt Ramp 1 for reference decrease of motorized potentiometer 55 9 Ramp 2 for reference increase of motorized potentiometer 55 10 gt Ramp 2 for reference decrease of motorized potentiometer G5 11 gt Speed for changing the acceleration and deceleration ramp See group G5 ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION RAMPS for additional information about these parameters Note In this mode the speed reference set by the potentiometer will be memorized even if the motor is stopped and also if the power supply is lost Note For using this function it is necessary to set G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed 53 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with option according to the selected source We can observe the operation of the motorized potentiometer in the following figure 94 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SPEED 015 NO Contact 016 NC Contact RUN COMMAND TIME t t t t STOP COMMAND TIME t t 8 t t 016 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 Assigned function Down Reference 015 gt Multi function Digital Input 5 Assigned function Up Reference SD70ITCCO0024AI Figure 10 19 Motorized potentiometer operation 5 gt ERASAB POT It operates like option 4 299 MOTORIZED POT but when the motor is stopped or the power supply i
20. F68 CAVIT UNDERL o Pressure Switch Only with Priming pump The Pressure switch is open out of the allowed time indicating a sudden pressure loss The display will show F72 IN PRESS SW 226 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 4 Inputs Configuration For inputs configuration it is necessary to consider some rules which will help in order to get a correct system configuration Digital input for flow acquisition by pulse counter All digital input be configured in this option 51 gt FLOW PULSE The parameters for setting the flowmeter are located in the subgroup S4 4 Pulse Input The read flow can be used to limit the flow of the application see group G25 10 Flow Limitation Algorithm An analogue output can be configured to show this information by setting the option 20 CURRENT FLOW in this way this information can be used for the PLC or even can be connected to the drive as a feedback signal in PID mode without needing the use of external converter of pulses signal into 4 20 signal Inputs programming There are some configuration options available when the pump program is active which can be set in the same way that the options available in the standard program Nevertheless when the pump program is active the drive will assume that only the configurable options from 50 to 69 for G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration T to
21. Function in parameter G20 4 1 gt IP address for additional information G20 4 3 IP ADDRESS C Screen PARAM 1 Description IP address C of the equipment Range 0 255 Default value 1 Set on run YES Modbus address 40376 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field C of the IP address assigned to the equipment in the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 1 gt IP address for additional information DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 219 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G20 4 4 IP ADDRESS D Screen 4 IP PARAM D 143 Description IP address D of the equipment Range 0 255 Default value 143 Set on run YES Modbus address 40377 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field D of the IP address assigned to the equipment in the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 1 gt IP address for additional information G20 4 5 SUBNET MASK ADDRESS A Screen 5 SUBNET A 255 Description Subnet Mask address A Range 0 255 Default value 255 Set on run YES Modbus address 40378 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field A of the Subnet Mask address of the local network of t
22. PARAMETERS 14 AIN1LOSSzN 15 1_2 BAND OFF AIN1 ZERO BAND 16 FILTER1 OFF AIN1 STABIL FILT 1 SENSOR 2 2 2 SENSOR 2 Bar 3 AIN2 FORMAT mA 4 INmin2 4mA AIN2 LOW RANGE 5 Smi2 0 0Bar SENS2 LOW RANGE 6 INmax2 20mA AIN2 HIGH RANGE 7 Sma2 10 0Bar SENS2 HIGH RANGE 8 SPD LO2 0 SPD LO RNG AIN2 9 SPD HI2 100 SPD HIG RNG AIN2 14 AIN2 LOSS N 152 2 BAND OFF AIN2 ZERO BAND 16 FILTER2 OFF AIN2 STABIL FILT 1 Sensr U I m 2 Pls s 100 1 5 AMOUNT PULS 3 M Rng 1000 1 5 FLOW MAX RANGE 1 ACCE 1 3 0 s INITIAL ACCEL 2 DECEL 1 3 0 s INITIAL DECEL 3 ACCE 2 1 0 6 SECOND ACCELE 4 DECEL 2 1 0 s SECOND DECELE 5 BRK ACC OFF BREAKPOINT ACL 6 BRK DEC OFF BREAKPOINT DCL 7 PMT ACL1 1 0 s MOTO POT INC1 8 PMT DCL1 3 0 s MOTO POT DEC1 9 PMT ACL2 1 0 s MOTO POT INC2 10 PMT DCL2 3 0 s MOTO POT DEC2 11 PMOT BRK OFF MOTO POT BRKPOIN 12 SP FLT 0 2505 SMOOT SPD FILTER FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 N OFF OFF G4 Inputs 54 3 Analogue Input 2 N Bar SETTING 2 mA 4mA 0 0Bar 20mA 10 0Bar 0 100 N OFF OFF G4 Inputs 4 4 Pulse Input 10018 100018 G5 Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps 3 0 s 3 0 8 1 0 s 1 0 5 OFF OFF 1 0 8 3 0 5 1 0 5 3 0 s OFF 0 250s
23. Request technical assistance 316 FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 DISPLAY F47 COMMS T O F48 SPI COM F49 SPD LIMIT F50 PSU FAULT F51 SCR TEMP F52 SOFT C TEMP F53 INTRNAL TEMP F54 WATCHDOG TMR F56 EMERGEN STOP F57 PUMP OVERLOA F65 LOW PRESSURE F66 HI PRESSURE F67 LOW WATER POSSIBLE CAUSE Communications cable has been come loose or cut ACTIONS Verify the wiring of communications system Master device has not sent valid data in the required frame or it has sent incorrect data Input power fault Speed reference is higher than the speed limit Verify the data and settings of the master device Reset the equipment and if the fault persists request technical assistance Check the reference source and the motor load Motor speed is out of control or motor is accelerating because of the load Damaged power supply Temperature limits for SD700 rectifier have been exceeded Fans of the equipment are operating wrong Verify speed limits Reset the equipment and if the fault persists request technical assistance Verify that the ambient conditions are proper for the equipment Be sure that there is nothing obstructing the cooling fans dust papers dirt etc and that these rotate correctly Verify that fans are not obstructed Check that fans are not dirty and rotate correctly Power supply of the fa
24. SV3 9 ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 VALUE Screen ANL OUT2 4 0mA Units V or mA Modbus address 40193 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 1000 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the value of Analogue Output 2 SV3 10 VALUE OF THE MAGNITUDE ASSOCIATED TO AO2 Screen AOUT2 Refer 0 0 Units associated magnitude Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Description 40195 8192 100 maximum range of the Analogue Output 2 Read Only It shows the magnitude value associated to the Analogue Output 2 speed current VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 49 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS SV3 11 STATUS OF DIGITAL INPUTS Screen Input DG 000000 0 Units Modbus address 40196 Modbus range LSB gt BITO gt MFI1 BIT6 gt PTC 0 1 Read Write Read Only Description It shows whether the Digital Inputs are activated or not from 011 to DI6 The final is another input which shows the status of the motor PTC signal X Active 0 Not Active SV3 12 STATUS OF OUTPUT RELAYS Screen Relays X 0 X Units Modbus address 40197 Modbus range BIT 0 gt R1 Range from 0 to 1 BIT 1 gt R2 Range from 0 to 1 BIT 2 gt R3 Range from 0 to 1 Read Write Read Only Description It shows whether the output relays are activated or not X Active 0 Not Active SV3 13 MACHINE SPEED ASSOCIATED TO THE MOTOR Screen Speed M 0 000m s Units Depending on configuration Modbus address This parameter is
25. 204 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 FREQUENCY SPEED ACCELERATION DECELERATION During During 100 90 REF 2 gt 85 616 2 80 G16 3 20 70 60 REF 1 gt 55 3 22544 ye 2 50 1 Y Y Dn SA eee 616 1 40 G16 3 20 30 20 10 616 1 gt Skip frequency 1 616 2 gt Skip frequency 2 616 3 gt Skip bandwidth SD70ITCCO0022AI Figure 10 45 Example Frequency signal according to the speed reference and skip frequencies DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 205 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 17 Group 17 G17 Brake G17 1 TIME FOR DC BRAKE ACTIVATION Screen 1 T DC BRAKE OFF Extended info DC CURRENT LEVEL Description Time for DC brake activation Range 0 0 99s Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40025 Modbus range 0 to 990 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the time during which DC brake will be activated G17 2 CURRENT APPLIED TO THE BRAKE Screen 2 DC CURR 0 Extended info DC CURRENT LEVEL Description Current applied to the brake Range 0 100 Default value 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 40022 Modbus range 0 to 8192 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the current value applied to the brake A proper current value must be set
26. 311 12 FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTION AND ACTIONS eere 313 12 1 Description of Faults List emen eren 313 12 2 Procedure for Fault Solutions sseeeenene emen 315 12 35 E 318 13 COMMONLY USED 65 2 nennen nnne 320 13 1 Start Stop Commands and Speed Reference by Keypad 320 13 2 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by Analogue yee eo reU 320 13 3 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by Motorized Potentiometer ede tee 322 13 4 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Seven Speed References Selectable by Digital Inputs inen tirer tenen etg rene Leica inn 323 13 5 Pressure Group Control with Auxiliary Pumps Start and Stop on Demand 324 13 6 Pressure Group Control with Eight Pressure References 327 14 CONFIGURATION 2 1 11 330 6 INDEX POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT Read this manual carefully to maximise the performance of this product and to ensure its safe use n this manual safety messages are classified as
27. 6 PID Dt 0 0s DIFFERENTIAL PID 7 PID ERR xx x 8 ERR xx xxkPa 9 PID INVERT N 1 LP Pon 0 0Bar AWAKENING LEVEL 2 FP SpON 90 0 FIX PMP STAR SPD 3 FP ErON 10 0 FIX PMP STAR ERR 4 FP T1 ON 10s FIX PMP1 STR DLY 5 FP T2 ON 10s FIX PMP2 STR DLY 6 FP T3 ON 10s FIX PMP3 STR DLY 7 FP T4 ON 10s FIX PMP4 STR DLY 8 FP T5 ON 10s FIX PMP5 STR DLY FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 G25 Pump Control 25 1 Setpoints 1 LOC SETTING 2 0 0 LOCAL 0 0Bar 0 0Bar 0 0Bar 0 0Bar 0 0Bar 0 0Bar 0 0Bar 0 0Bar OFF G25 Pump Control 25 2 PID Setting LOCAL LOCAL Al2 1 0 5 05 0 05 625 Pump Control 525 3 Start Conditions 0 0 90 0 10 0 CONFIGURATION REGISTER 339 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS PARAMETERS 1LP T SLP 20s DRIVE SLEEP DELY 2 SLPsp1 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED1 3 SLPsp2 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED2 4 SLPsp3 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED3 5 SLPsp4 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED4 6 SLPsp5 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED5 7 SLPsp6 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED6 8 SLPsp7 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED7 9 SLPsp8 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED8 10 FLsw 11 511 0 01 5 FLOW SLEEP LEVEL 121 SLEEP xxxA CURR SLEEP LEVEL 13 FP erOFF 0 0 FPUMP STOP ERROR 14 FP T1 OF 10s FPUMP1 STP DELAY
28. 70 See G4 1 5 40038 64 14 Selection of Digital Inputs configuration 0 to 70 0 3 WIRES 005 1 ALL PROGRAMMABLE 2 MREF 2 WIRES 3 MREF 3 WIRES 4 MOTORIZED POT 5 ERASAB POT 40039 64 1 3 Reset from keypad N No Y Yes 40040 64 1 1 40041 64 1 2 Main control mode Alternative control mode 0 NONE 1 LOCAL 2 REMOTE 3 SERIAL COMMS 0 NONE 1 LOCAL ZREMOTE 0 MODBUS COMMUNICATION 297 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Address Screen Description Modbus Range G14 1 250 20480 to 250 5 Multi reference 2 250 to 250 250 20480 to 250 3 20480 E Multi reference 3 250 to 250 250 20480 to 250 20480 Multi reference 4 250 to 250 250 20480 to 250 20480 Multi reference 5 250 to 250 250 20480 to 250 20480 Multi reference 6 250 to 250 250 20480 to 250 20480 Multi reference 7 250 to 250 250 20480 to 250 20480 250 20480 to 250 0 0 Inch speed 1 250 to 250 20480 250 20480 to 250 0j 0 Inch speed 2 250 to 250 20480 5 y 250 20480 to 250 SV5 12 Inch speed 3 250 to 250 20480 40102 G10 1 Minimum speed limit 4 250 to Max speed 1 250 20480 to G10 2 40103 610 3 Minimum speed limit 2 250 to Max speed 2 250 20480 to G10 4 40104 G10 2 Maximum speed limit 1 Min speed 1 to 250 G10 1 to 250 20480 40105 G
29. C Modbus address 40176 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value Read Write Read Only Description It shows the temperature measured at the power stage of the drive output 46 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SV2 6 DRIVE TEMPERATURE Screen Temp Equip 26 Units C Modbus address 40240 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 100 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the temperature measured inside the electronics chamber of the drive VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 47 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 9 3 Parameters SV 3 External Visualization SV3 1 AVERAGE VALUE OF THE ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen ANLG IN1 0 0V Units V or mA Modbus address 40186 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 1000 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the value of Analogue Input 1 5 3 2 REFERENCE VALUE OF THE ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen AIN1 Refr 0 00 Units bottom scale 1 Modbus address 40190 Modbus range 8192 100 maximum range of the Analogue Input 1 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the value or the PID reference proportional to Analogue Input 1 in percentage SV3 3 VALUE OF THE SENSOR 1 ASSOCIATED TO THE Screen AIN1 S 0 00l s Units Engineering units Modbus address 40262 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the value of sensor 1 associated to the Analogu
30. Flow level to sleep the drive 0 0 to 3276 Flow units 0 to 20480 0 to 20480 0 to 32760 42325 G25 4 12 Output current level to sleep the drive OFF 0 to 1229A 0 to 12290 42326 G25 2 9 PID output inversion No Y Yes MODBUS COMMUNICATION 309 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Address Screen _ Description 7 Range Modbus Range 42337 G25 6 12 Response from over pressure PAUSE 102 FAULT 42339 G25 6 14 Trip time because of high pressure 0 9995 0 to 9990 42344 625 6 3 Response from cavitation PAUSE 1102 FAULT 42348 G25 6 15 Response from No Flow situation PAUSE 102 FAULT 423197 e 40 096 to 250 0 to 20480 42350 G25 6 18 Bypass time for No Flow switch 0 0 999s 0 to 9990 42351 G25 6 19 Trip delay time because of No Flow 0 0 999s 0 to 9990 42352 025846 No Flow switch during pipe filling N No Y Yes 42353 G25 6 20 Cycle time of the drive OFF 0 99m 0 to 99 42354 G25621 Cycle counter 42356 SV5 23 Remaining time for automatic stop Read only 0 to 6000 42358 42371 42372 42373 42374 625 2 2 Alternative setpoint source LOCAL 10002 Alt Al2 42375 025429 Sleep speed when setpoint is introduced through 40 094 to 250 0 to 20480 Analogue Input 310 MODBUS COMMUNICATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 11 5 Annexe A Physical Level The SD700 drive can be connected to a RS485 network by a tw
31. Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Modbus address 40505 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function If this function is active it helps to compensate the slip on the motor This function must be enabled in case of heavy load able to provoke a high slip during the starting N gt NO Function disabled Y gt YES Function enabled G19 2 5 DRIVE DAMPING Screen 5 DAMPING 0 0 Description Damping of the drive Range 0 0 20 0 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40506 Modbus range 0 to 1638 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a damping value for the drive when operates with no loaded motors If the motor is operating with no load and a high oscillation in the current is detected then it is recommended to increase this value Nevertheless avoid operating with very high values higher than 1 5 212 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G19 2 6 COMPENSATING BANDWIDTH OF TORQUE TRANSITORY Screen 6 BAND 0 0 Description Compensating bandwidth of torque transitory Range 0 0 10 0 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40507 Modbus range 0 to 819 Read Write YES Function It allows setting an initial value for a band of frequencies where the torque transitory will be compensated This function helps in the starting when the load is heavy and a high torque boost is required This value can be increased wh
32. When the load process is finished this sub screen disappears UPLOAD N is displayed again G1 10 2 SAVE PARAMETERS FROM DISPLAY TO DRIVE Screen DOWNLOAD N Description Save parameters from the display unit to the drive Range N Y Default value N Set on run NO Function When this parameter is set to Y the copy of the parameters stored into the display to the drive starts automatically modifying and programming the parameters of this new drive It exists one sub screen that shows he unload process DOWNLOADING 100 When the unload process is finished this sub screen disappears and DOWNLOADE N is displayed again G1 11 DRIVE FAN CONTROL MODE Screen 11 FAN CTRL FIXE Description Control mode of the drive fan Range FIXE TEMP See Function for additional information Default value FIXE Set on run YES Modbus address 40549 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the operation mode for drive fans Description of the options FIXE The fans of the drive are connected with the start command and they are disconnected after 3 minutes once the drive is stopped TEMP 2 The fans are connected at 51 C and they are disconnected when temperature is below 47 84 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 1 2 Remote Control Functions HOST START CONTROL Screen Range 0 1 Modbus address 40562 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Wr
33. ow which 6 is selected Set ow which 7 is selected Set ow which 815 selected Set 328 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 13 6 2 Connections Drawing Terminals 1 and 2 start stop command NO status Terminals 1 and 3 setpoint pin 1 PID mode NO status Terminals 1 and 4 setpoint pin 2 PID mode NO status Terminals 1 and 5 setpoint pin 3 PID mode NO status SPEED SETPT Digital Input 4 Digital Input 3 Digital Input 2 SETPONT PIN3 SETPONT PIN2 SETPONT PIN 1 G25 1 5 1 0 SETPT1 0 0 0 G25 1 6 2 0 SETPT2 0 0 X G25 1 7 3 0Bar SETPT3 0 X 0 G25 1 8 4 0Bar SETPT4 0 X X G25 1 9 5 0Bar SETPT5 X 0 0 G25 1 10 6 0 SETPT6 X 0 X G25 1 11 7 0 SETPT7 X X 0 G25 1 12 8 0Bar SETPT8 X X X Note 0 Not active and X Active X1 CONNECTOR X2 CONNECTOR 24V Usr DI 24Vde gt 2 Common Terminal 24Vdc NO Contact 0 gt 50 PMP START STP Common 012 gt 63 SETPONT PIN1 NC Contact d S gt 64 SETPONT 2 8 NO Contact 5 DI4 gt 65 SETPONT PINS 6 Common 2 015 gt 00 Not used Free programming 5 NC Contact 06 gt 00 Not used Free programming 8 NO Conad Common Motor PTC Input o NC Contact Feedback Signal 4 20mA Programmable as V or mA Analogue Signal Common Common Terminal OVdc Common Terminal 24Vdc SD70DTC0007CI Figure 13 5 Pressure
34. 10V max G4 2 6 Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range 0 to 20 max G4 2 6 0V YES 40248 10000 to 10000 max G4 2 6 0 to 20000 max G4 2 6 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the minimum voltage or current value for the Analogue Input 1 according to the characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected G4 2 5 MINIMUM RANGE OF SENSOR 1 Screen 5 5111 0 0l s Extended info SENS1 LOW RANGE Description Minimum range of sensor 1 Range 3200 to 3200 Engineering units max G4 2 7 Default value 0 0l s Set on run YES Modbus address 40254 Modbus range 3200 to 3200 max G4 2 7 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the minimum units value of the sensor connected to the Analogue Input 1 This value should also correspond to the minimum voltage or current level of the sensor set in G4 2 4 gt Minimum range of Analogue Input 1 Note The setting of this parameter should be checked if the sensor units are changed in parameter G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units It is necessary to set this value to operate in open loop and closed loop Note This parameter will be only available if G4 2 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input T is set to Y DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 103 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 94 2 6 MAXIMUM RANGE ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen 6 INmax1 10V Extended info AIN1 HIGH RANGE Description Maximum
35. 3 0 6 Extended info INITIAL ACCEL Description Acceleration ramp 1 Range 0 01 650 s Default value 3 0 6 Set on run YES Modbus address 40392 Modbus range 10 to 65000 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the acceleration ramp 1 according to the requirements of each process The setting is in acceleration units increase in of speed per second For example an acceleration ramp of 10 s means that the drive increases its speed by 10 of motor rated speed per each second elapsed If parameter 55 5 gt Speed for acceleration ramp change is set to OFF drive will search the reference speed by following the acceleration pattern set in this parameter See figures 10 22 and 10 23 For instance we have a motor of 50Hz and 4 poles with a synchronism rated speed of 1500rpm If we set the acceleration ramp to 5 s motor will take 20 seconds to reach the 100 of its speed 1500rpm from 0 motor is completely stopped at the beginning Note Usually it should be used slower settings supported by the application An acceleration ramp too much fast can cause equipment overload ILT status making that this ramp is ignored and replaced with a slower ramp automatically To get a better programming you must be realistic with these settings If you need fast accelerations and or decelerations we advise you to use slower settings firstly until the remaining operations are checked G5 2 DECELERATION RAMP 1 Scree
36. Delay time to start fixed pump 3 Relay 3 G25 3 7 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 4 1 G25 3 8 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 5 A02 G25 5 1 gt Speed bypass at the starting of fixed pumps G25 5 2 gt Time of speed bypass after starting fixed pumps Figure 10 47 Starting of the fixed pumps according to the starting speed and the delay time for each pump TIME TIME TIME SD70ITCCO026CI 242 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 3 3 MINIMUM PID ERROR TO START THE FIXED PUMPS Screen 3 FP ErON 10 0 Extended info FIX PMP STAR ERR Description Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps Range OFF 0 to 200 Default value 10 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42056 Modbus range 0 to 16384 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the PID error above of which the fixed pumps will start This one is an optional condition that can be considered or not depending on the setting If this parameter is set to 0 0 any value could start the fixed pumps This parameter allows user to consider the PID error when the fixed pumps must be started At the moment of starting of the fixed pumps additionally it will also considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 gt Start speed for the fixed pumps and the start delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 3 4 to 625 3 8 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 243 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECT
37. Extended info PID INVE SLEEP Description Level for activating the sleep mode in PID inverse Range 0 0 250 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42327 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the level below which the drive will go in sleep mode when the PID of the application is inverted PID inversion is realized in parameter G25 2 9 gt PID output inversion The value is set in of drive setpoint G25 4 28 TO ENABLE SLEEP MODE Screen 28 SLEEP Y Description To enable sleep mode Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value Y Set on run YES Modbus address 42358 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 261 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows enabling or disabling the sleep mode of the drive This parameter operates together with the option 31 SLEEP CONDIT of the parameter G8 1 1 gt Selection of Relay 1 control source G8 1 5 gt Selection of Relay 2 control source and G8 1 9 gt Selection of Relay 3 control source User can disable the sleep option of the drive but a PLC receives the warning of fulfilled sleep conditions through the output relay configured with the option 31 and stops the System See option 31 in parameter G8 1 1 Options N 3 NO Sleep mode disabled Y gt YES Sleep mode enabled G25 4 29 SLEEP SPEED WHEN SETPOINT IS INTR
38. G16 3 gt Skip bandwidth will be based on it forming a frequency range that the drive will avoid See example and figure 10 45 in parameter G16 3 gt Skip bandwidth G16 2 SKIP FREQUENCY 2 Screen 2 SKIP 2 0 096 Extended info SKIP FREQUENCY 2 Description Skip frequency 2 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40133 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the second skip frequency With this user achieves an operation area not selectable this is where reference speeds cannot be adjusted to avoid resonance frequencies The drive will only take these reference values when is changing speed during acceleration and deceleration but it will not operation at these speed values One this value is set the bandwidth adjusted in G16 3 gt Skip bandwidth will be based on it forming a frequency range that the drive will avoid See example and figure 10 45 in parameter G16 3 gt Skip bandwidth DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 203 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G16 3 SKIP BANDWIDTH Screen 3 SKIP BAND OFF Extended info OFFSET BAND Description Skip band Range OFF 0 20 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40134 Modbus range 0 to 1638 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the band of frequencies inside of which drive does not operate in spite of the drive goes through that band of frequencies
39. G19 2 11 11 STA F AC OFF C 80 0 99 9 OFF 100 G19 2 12 12 STA F DC OFF lt 80 0 99 9 100 G19 2 13 13 CTR Vbus OFF lt For VIN 400V 500V gt 625 to 799V OFF 800V For VIN 690V gt 950 to 1250V OFF 1251V 19 3 Motor Model G19 3 1 1 R STATOR 0 9 lt j 0 0 9 9 50701 60064 Figure 10 12 Parameters structure from group G15 to subgroup 519 3 G19 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 75 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G20 Serial Communication Controls G20 1 1 PROTOCOL M 3 M MODBUS 620 2 2 COMMS TIO OFF 70 to 2505 20 3 Modbus G20 3 1 1 COMMS ADDR 10 G20 4 16 16 D 78 G20 4 17 17 MAC 90 G20 4 18 18 MAC F 171 625 Pump Control 25 1 Setpoints G25 1 1 1 CONTROL MODE 1 0 MANUAL 1 PUMP G25 1 2 2 MAN SPD REF LOCAL lt LOCAL An 2 625 1 3 3 SPEED 0 0 lt 250 to 250 625 1 4 4 ALT MAN S R LOCAL lt gt LOCAL Alt Al2 SD70ITGOO65CI Figure 10 13 Parameters structure from group G20 to subgroup S25 1 G25 76 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 525 2 PID Setting c 0 3276 Engineer Units Q G25 2 6 6 PID Dt 0 0s G25 2 7 7 PID ERR x xx 625 2 8 8 ERR xx xxkPa lt 0 0 to 3276 Engineer Units Q G25 2 9 9 PID INVERT N S 8 51 525 3 Start Condit
40. In case of any of these conditions occur the motor controlled by the drive will stop followed by the fixed pumps and the display will show the corresponding fault message These fault will be treated in the same way than the general faults some of them are o High Pressure Fault It can be provoked through a digital input which has been configured in this mode or by comparison of the received data of an analogue input This information will be compared with the setting realized in parameters G25 6 11 gt Minimum speed for minimum pressure fault to G25 6 13 gt Maximum pressure level The display will show 66 HI PRESSURE o Low Pressure Fault Pipe broken possibility The display will show 65 LOW PRESSURE o No Water Fault This is especially useful in the use of level proves at wells The display will show F67 LOW WATER o Short Starting Cycle Fault Produced when the drive tries to start before the established time between a start and a stop has expired For additional information see G25 6 20 Cycle time of the drive In this case the display will show F71 CYCLING o Irrigation Equipment Fault Produced by a digital input configured for this objective The display will show F70 IRRIGATOR o No Flow Fault Produced by a digital input configured in this option The display will show F69 FLOW SWITCH o Cavitation Produced by operation on underload conditions The display will show
41. Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 2 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by means of the output function of one of the comparators option 03 gt STOP 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 1 to G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 3 138 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 23 SP LIMIT 2 Relay is activated if the alternative speed limits G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 and G10 4 gt Maximum speed limit 2 have been selected through one of the digital inputs option 20 gt SPEED LIMIT 2 in parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by means of the output function of one of the comparators option 03 gt STOP 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 1 to G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 3 24 DC BRAKE Relay is activated if DC brake is active 25 RESERVE Reserved for future use 26 RESERVE Reserved for future use 27 RESERVE Reserved for future use 28 PUMP CNTRL The equipment activates the relay to connect the fixed pump See G25 9 1 To enable fixed pump associated to Output Relay 1 to G25 9 3 gt To enable fixed pump associated to Output Relay 3 29 JOCKEY PUMP For those periods of
42. Options Menu 11 FAN CTRL FIXE FIXE 330 CONFIGURATION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS 1 MTR CUR 00 00A MOTOR CURRENT 2 MTR VOLT 400V MOTOR VOLTAGE 3 MTR PWR 00 0kW MOTOR POWER 4 MTR 1485 MOTOR SPEED rpm 5 MTR PFA 0 85 MTR POWER FACTOR 6 MTR FRQ 50Hz MOTOR FREQUENCY 7 MTR COOL 40 MOTOR COOLING 1 REF1 SPD LOCAL 2 2 SPD LOCAL 3 LOCAL SPD 100 LOCAL SPEED 1 CNTROL MODE1 1 2 CNTROL MODE2 2 3 RESET MODE Y 4 DIGIT MODE 1 5 DIGITL IN 1 06 6 DIGITL IN 2 00 7 DIGITL IN 3 00 8 DIGITL IN 4 00 9 DIGITL IN 5 00 10 DIGITL IN 6 17 1 SENSOR 1 N 2 SENSOR 1 1 5 3 AIN1 FORMAT V 4 INmin1 0V AIN1 LOW RANGE 5 Smi1 0 0l s SENS1 LOW RANGE 6 INmax1 10V AIN1 HIGH RANGE 7 Smaiz410 0l s SENS1 HIGH RANGE 8 SPD LO1 0 SPD LO RNG AIN1 9 SPD 1 100 SPD HIG RNG AIN1 FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 G2 Motor Nameplate Data 00 00A SETTING 2 400V 00 0kW 1485 0 85 50Hz 40 G3 References LOCAL LOCAL 100 G4 Inputs 54 1 Digital Inputs 1 2 Y 1 06 00 00 00 00 17 G4 Inputs 54 2 Analogue Input 1 N 18 V 0 0 0l s 10V 10 0l s 0 100 CONFIGURATION REGISTER 331 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS
43. Screen 8 FP T5 ON 10s Extended info FIX PMP5 STR DLY Description Delay time to start the fixed pump 5 Analogue Output 2 Range OFF 0 6000s Default value 10s Set on run YES Modbus address 42068 Modbus range 0 to 60000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 2 At the moment of starting the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 Start speed for the fixed pumps the PID error G25 3 3 gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps Note If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figures 10 47 and 10 48 246 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 10 Subgroup 25 4 25 4 Stop Conditions G25 4 1 DELAY TIME BEFORE ACTIVATING SLEEP MODE Screen 1 LP T SLP 20s Extended info DRIVE SLEEP DELY Description Delay time before activating sleep mode Range OFF 0 1 999s Default value 20s Set on run YES Modbus address 42306 Modbus range 0 to 9990 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time to activate sleep mode This delay time is applicable to the following conditions sleep speed No Flow input flow measurement and sleep current If either of them is fulfilled the time to activate sleep mode will start elapsing
44. Selection of sensor 2 units Bar gt units must be set according to type of sensor that user will use in the installation 94 3 3 Analogue Input 2 Format mA gt These units must be set according to the type of sensor that user will use in the installation G4 3 4 Minimum range of Analogue Input 4mA gt These units must be set according to the type of sensor that user will use in the installation 7 MTR COOL 40 otor cooling at zero speed g 2 z c e o gu 3 J3 r zz 73 eo A E z RB 1 e ec 1 SENSOR 2 2 SENSOR 2 Bar gt N m z gt 4 3 gt c PEE 3 85 PIR 4 1 8 gt 2 0 0 gt This range must be set according to the type of sensor GS Minimu Fan ga o sensora that user will use in the installation G4 3 6 Maximum range of Analogue Input 20 gt These units must be set according to the type of sensor 20 2 that user will use in the installation 64 3 7 Maximum range of sensor 2 10 0 gt This range must be set according to the type of sensor that user will use in the installation G25 Pump Control 25 1 Setpoints CONTROL MODE 1 G25 1 1 Control mode 1 gt Pumps The drive will start in pump control mode 625 1 5 Local setpoint 4 for the 1 0 gt ows user to se the value of he speed reference 1 for
45. This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 2 is set to window mode parameter G9 2 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 2 set to 1 gt Window 164 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G9 2 5 LIMIT 1 FOR COMPARATOR 2 IN WINDOW MODE Screen 5 LIM 1 C2 0 Extended info C2 WINDOW LIMIT1 Description Limit 1 of the Comparator 2 in window mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40313 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows defining one of the limits to activate Comparator 2 in window mode Output of Comparator 2 will be activated when source signal of Comparator 2 selected in G9 2 1 is within the limit 1 and the limit 2 set in G9 2 4 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 2 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 Note This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 1 is set to window mode parameter G9 2 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 2 set to 1 Window G9 2 6 ON DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 2 Screen 6 T C2 0 0s Extended info C2 ACTIVAT DELAY Description ON delay time to activate Comparator 2 Range 0 0 9995 Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40315 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a timer to
46. To reset fault F33 fault on phase L3 of rectifier 23 gt 68 CAVIT UNDERL To reset fault F68 cavitation underload trip 24 69 FLOW SWITCH To reset fault F69 Flow trip 25 70 IRRIGATOR To reset fault F70 irrigator trip A CAUTION At the moment of selecting faults that can be reset you should pay special attention to option 1 ALL THE FLTS In this case the protections of the drive and the motor will be disabled It is not recommended select this option since the drive could try to reset internal trips causing serious damage to the drive itself DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 189 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G12 6 SELECTION OF FAULT 2 TO BE RESET Screen 6 F2 AUTO RST 0 Description Selection of fault 2 to be reset Range 0 25 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40576 Modbus range 0 to 25 Read Write YES Function If auto reset function is enabled in G12 1 AUTO RESET option Y the drive will consider the fault programmed here as resettable automatically Fault 2 to be reset is selected according to the options explained in section Function of parameter G12 5 Selection of fault 1 to be reset CAUTION At the moment of selecting faults that can be reset you should pay special attention to option 1 ALL THE FLTS In this case the protections of the drive and the motor will be disabled It is not recommended select this option since
47. Verify the settings of the parameters referred to the cavitation protection depending on the installation Check if the pump has water Check if the flow detector has water and is connected correctly Check the settings in group G25 6 Verify your irrigating equipment and check if the connections between the drive and the irrigating equipment are correct Verify possible leakages in the installation Verify the settings of this protection in group G25 6 Verify the water level in the aspiration circuit well tank etc Verify the status of the pressure switch 50700 drives consist of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices Temperature humidity vibration and deteriorated components can reduce its efficiency To avoid any possible irregularity we recommend making periodic inspections 12 3 1 Warnings Be sure to remove the input power while performing maintenance Be sure to perform maintenance after checking the DC Link capacitor has discharged Check that the voltage between terminals VDC VDC is below DC 30V The bus capacitors in the drive main circuit can still be charged even after the power is turned off The correct output voltage of the drive can only be measured by using an RMS voltage meter Others voltage meters including digital voltage meters are likely to display incorrect values caused by the high frequency PWM output voltage of the drive 12 3 2 Routine ins
48. eep speed for loca eep speed for loca eep speed for loca eep speed eep speed eep speed eep speed eep speed or local or local or local or local local se se se se se se se se is met the time to activa 40 0 gt It allows setti drive will sleep whenever local setpoin according to the installation ing the sleep speed 2 be ive will sleep whenever local setpoin according to the installation allows setti ive will sleep whenever local setpoin according to the installation 46 0 gt It allows setti drive will sleep whenever local setpoin according to the installation ing the sleep speed 5 be drive will sleep whenever local setpoin according to the installation allows setti drive will sleep whenever local setpoin according to the installation 52 0 gt It allows setti drive will sleep whenever local setpoin according to the installation 54 0 gt It allows setti drive will sleep whenever local setpoin allows sett allows sett e sleep mode will start e ng the sleep speed 1 be ng the sleep speed 3 be ng the sleep speed 4 be ng the sleep speed 6 be ng the sleep speed 7 be ng the sleep speed 8 be according to the installation apsing ow which 1 is selected Set ow which 2 is selected Set ow which 3is selected Set ow which 4 is selected Set ow which selected Set
49. lt gt OFF 0 0 to 9995 lt OFF 0 30 In G11 4 4 LOW VOLT 360V lt gt 323 425V 400V 586 621V 690V 611 5 5 LOW V TO 5 0s gt 0 0 60s OFF G11 6 6 HIGH VOLT 440V lt 418 550V 400V 726 759V 690 611 717 HIV TO 5 0s gt 00 605 OFF 611 8 8 Dlasy VO 1 0s lt 0 0 10s OFF G11 9 9 LOW V 0 0 FAULT 1 FAULTS 2 STOP G11 10 10 PTC EXT N S NzNo YzYes G11 11 11 PUMP 20 0 lt 0 0 3200A 611 12 112 PMovl FIL OFF OFF 0 1 to 5s 611 13 13 Povi DLY OFF S OFF 0 1 to 999 95 G11 14 14 UNDERLOAD N NzNo Yz Yes Q 611 15 15 ULDCUR A G11 16 16 ULD SPD 100 lt 0 0 to 250 611 17 17 ULD DELY 10s lt 0 9995 50701 60062 Figure 10 10 Parameters structure from subgroup G10 to group G11 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 73 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G12 Auto Reset 612 1 1 AUTO RESET N lt gt NzNo Y Yes 612 212 ATTEMP NUMBR 1 lt gt G12 3 3 R STR DEL 5s c Q 612 5 5 F1 AUTO RST 0 lt 0 0 NO AUTO RESET 1 ALL THE FLTS 2211 VIN LOSS 3213 HI V IN 4214 LWV IN 5218 IMB V OUT 6719 IMB OUT 7220 GROUND FLT 8 21 I LIM T O 9 22 TQ LIM T O 10 27 DL SMTH 11 40 EXT PTC 12 41 COMMS TRIP 13 42 AIN1 LOSS 14 43 AIN2 LOSS 15 47 COMMS T O 16 49 SPD LIMIT 17 65 LOW PRESSURE 18 66 HI PRESSURE 19 67 LOW WATER 20 31 SCR L1 21 32 SCR L2 22 33 SCR L3 23 68 CAVIT UNDERL 24 69 FLOW SWITCH 25 70
50. 0 35 0 7 630 0 25 0 5 Note If this value is set too high then increased motor current can reach the current limit 610 5 avoiding motor speed increase We recommend consulting the standard value table since Rs value is variable according to the drive capacity 216 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 19 Group 20 G20 Serial Communication Controls G20 1 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL Screen 1 PROTOCOL M Description Communication protocol Range M Default value M Set on run YES Function It allows selecting the communication protocol to be used If you want to access to the drive internal variables through serial port this parameter must be set to the desired protocol Option M gt MODBUS 20 2 LIMIT TIME FOR COMMUNICATION Screen 2 COMMS T O OFF Extended info COMMS TIMEOUT Description Limit time for serial communication Range OFF 0 2505 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40413 Modbus range 0 to 250 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the limit time for serial communication This parameter provides with the option of generating a drive trip FA7 COMMS T O if the time elapsed from the last valid data transmission has exceeded the limit time set in this parameter Serial communication with the drive is possible through RS232 terminals RS485 terminals or USB port Note Do not modify this parameter if is not necessary DESCRIPTION OF PROG
51. 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 2 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by configuring the output function of one of the comparators options 02 gt STOP 1 and 03 STOP 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 1 G9 2 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 2 or G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator or automatically by setting a changing speed 57 3 gt Changing speed for stop mode See figures 10 25 and 10 27 CHANGING SPEED FOR STOP MODE Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function Note 3 BRK STP 2 OFF STP2 UNDER SPEED Changing speed for stop mode from stop by RAMP to Stop by SPIN OFF 0 to 250 OFF YES 40005 0 to 20480 YES Drive changes the stop mode from RAMP to SPIN by setting this parameter to a value different to zero when drive is stopping and reaches the speed value set in this parameter We suppose that drive has the stop mode 1 or 2 set by RAMP depending on the stop mode selected is the main or alternative one as stop mode selected When drive receives the stop command the drive will stop by applying a deceleration ramp from the operating speed steady status until reaching the speed set here and from that moment on drive will apply the stop mode by SPIN drive turns off the output to
52. 15 FP T2 OF 10s FPUMP2 STP DELAY 16 FP OF 10s FPUMP3 STP DELAY 17 FP T4 OF 10s FPUMP4 STP DELAY 18 FP T5 OF 10s 5 STP DELAY 19 SPD10f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED1 20 SPD2of 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED2 21 SPD30f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED3 22 SPD4of 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED4 23 SPD50f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED5 24 SPD60f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED6 25 SPD7of 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED7 26 SPD80f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED8 27 PIDISL 0 0 PID INVE SLEEP 28 SLEEP Y 29 SLPspA 40 0 SLEP SPD STP ANA FACTORY SETTINGS G25 Pump Control 25 4 Stop Conditions 20s 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 N 0 0 5 70 0 70 0 70 0 70 0 70 0 70 0 70 0 70 0 0 0 Y 40 0 SETTING 1 SETTING 2 340 CONFIGURATION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS 1 BY SPon 70 0 BYPASS ON SPEED 2 BY T ON 10s BYPASS ON DELAY 3 BY SPof 90 0 BYPASS OFF SPEED 4 BY T OFF 5s BYPASS OFF DELAY 1 PAUSE DEL 20s DELAY AFTER PAUS 2 CAVITATIONZN 3 CAV MODE FAULT 4CAVCURR CAVITATION CURRE 5 SPED 100 CAVITATION SPEED 6 CAV DELAY 10s CAVIT FLT DELAY 7 ENABLE LO 9 LO PRE 5 0Bar LO PRESSURE LEVL 10 Lop DLY 10 0s LO PRESS FLT DLY 11 Lop Msp 0 0
53. 2 STOP 2 SPIN G7 3 3 BRK STP 2 G7 4 4 START RAMP G7 5 5 START 2 RAMP G7 6 6 STAR DLYzOFF 67 7 17 STOP DLY OFF 67 8 8 STP MIN 5 G7 9 9 OFFdlyzOFF G7 10 10 RUN AFTR VFLzY G7 11 11 SPNstr G7 121 12 OFFdly2 OFF 58 1 Output Relays 68 1 1 1 SEL RELAY 1 02 G8 1 8 8 INVERT REL2 N lt RAMP SPIN lt RAMP SPIN lt OFF 0 to 250 S RAMP SPIN lt RAMP SPIN OFF 0 to 6500s S OFF 0 to 6500s lt N No Y Yes lt OF F 0 000 to 10 05 lt N No S OFF 0 1 to 100 S OFF 0 0 1 to 6500 05 lt gt 00 ALWAYS OFF O1 ALWAYS 02 NO FAULTS 03 GENERAL FAULT 04 5 05 RUN 06 READY 07 ZERO SPEED 08 5 SPEED 09 SP DIRECTION 10 RESERVE 11 5 REF DIRECT 12 RESERVE 13 5 LIMIT 14 CURR LIMIT 15 VOLT LIMIT 16 TORQ LIMIT 17 COMPARATOR1 18 COMPARATOR2 19 COMPARATOR3 20 ACC DEC 2 21 REFERENCE 2 22 STOP 2 23 SP LIMIT 2 24 DC BRAKE 25 RESERVE 26 RESERVE 27 RESERVE 28 PUMP CNTRL 29 JOCKEY PUMP 30 PRIMING PUMP 31 51 CONDIT 32 CRANE BRAKE cum E lt gt NzNo Y Yes SD70ITGO0058BI Figure 10 6 Parameters structure from group G7 to subgroup S8 1 G8 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 69 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 68 1 9 9 SEL RELAY 3 05 lt gt 00 ALWAYS OFF 01 ALWAYS ON 02 NO FAULTS 03 GENERAL FAULT 04 5 05 RUN 06 R
54. 247 5 81 5 SD71800 5x x xx SD71270 6x x xx 1712 1667 3402 1097 38 528 460 1619 1209 247 5 81 5 SD71420 6x x xx 1712 1667 3402 1097 38 528 460 1619 1209 247 5 81 5 SD72200 5x x xx SD71500 6x x xx 1712 1667 4452 1447 38 528 460 1619 1209 247 5 81 5 5071800 6x x xx 1712 1667 4452 1447 38 528 460 1619 1209 247 5 81 5 Figure 5 8 Dimensions of Frame 10 SD70DTD0014BE Figure 5 9 Dimensions of Frame 11 SD70DTD0015BE DIMENSIONS 23 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 5 5 Dimensions of Frames 4 and 5 00 REFERENCE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT H1 H2 wi w2 D1 D2 1 Y2 5070150 50 1124 11005 320 285 245 4385 7785 5275 2505 SD7017050xxx 1124 11005 320 285 245 4385 7785 5275 2505 SD7021050xxx 1124 11005 436 396 394 507 500 1136 6505 2505 815 118 5070250 50 1124 11005 436 396 394 507 500 1136 6505 2505 815 118 8070275 50 1124 11005 436 396 394 507 500 1136 6505 2505 815 118 Figure 5 11 Dimensions of Frame 5 00 50700 00009 24 DIMENSIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 5 6 Dimensions of Frames 6 and 7 00 REFERENCE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT H1 wi w2 ws v2 vs v 5070330 50 1124 11005 788
55. 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 G25 4 23 STOP SPEED 5 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 23 SPD5of 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED5 Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 5 0 0 to 250 70 0 YES 42319 0 to 20480 YES It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 5 set in parameter G25 1 9 Local setpoint 5 for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 259 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 24 STOP SPEED 6 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen 24 SP
56. 40 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42313 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the sleep speed 7 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 7 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 250 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 4 9 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 8 Screen 9 SLPsp8 40 0 Extended info DRV SLEEP SPEED8 Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 8 Range 0 096 to 250 Default value 40 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42314 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the sleep speed 8 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 8 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 G25 4 10 TO ENABLE NO FLOW INPUT TO SLEEP THE DRIVE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 10 FLsw N To enable the Flow input to sleep the drive N Y See Function for additional information N YES 42323 0 to 1 YES It allows enabling or disabling the No Flow input with the purpose that the drive goes in sleep mode It operates when the drive speed is below the speed set in G25 6 17 gt Minimum stop speed by No Flow detection above which No Flow input only can operate as protection PAU
57. 5 G25 1 8 SETPT4 G25 1 9 SETPTS G25 1 10 SETPT6 G25 1 11 SETPT7 G25 1 12 SETPT8 They are NO contacts DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 99 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 64 gt SETPONT PIN2 Medium bit See option 63 above 65 gt SETPONT PIN3 High bit See option 63 above 66 9 MAN REF 2 To select the second source or the alternative source for the speed reference adjusted in G3 2 gt Selection for speed reference 2 NO 67 OVR STAR Manual starting without protections for testing starting NO 69 PRESSUR SWITC Detection of the pressure existing in the system to be used with the Priming pump NO 70 gt ALTER PID STP When the input configured with this option is activated the pump program will consider the alternative PID setpoint according to the setting of the parameter G25 2 2 gt Alternative PID setpoint source G4 1 6 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 2 CONFIGURATION Screen 6 DIGITL IN 2 00 Description Multi function Digital Input 2 configuration Range 00 70 Default value 00 Set on run NO Modbus address 40033 Modbus range 0 to 70 Read Write YES Function It allows user to configure the Digital Input 2 for its individual use See Function in parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configura
58. 69 1 8 OFF delay time for Comparator 1 0 0 9999s 0 to 9999 00 NONE 01 START STOP 0011 04 RESET 05 START INCH1 06 START INCH2 07 START INCH3 09 ACC DEC 2 10 REFERENCE 2 11 SPEED LIMIT2 69 2 1 Source selection for Comparator 2 00 22 See G9 1 1 0 to 22 69 2 2 Type selection for Comparator 2 0 Normal 0101 1 Window 250 20480 to 250 250 to 250 20480 250 20480 to 250 250 to 250 20480 69 3 2 Type selection for Comparator 3 0 Normal 0 to 1 1 Window 250 20480 to 250 250 to 250 20480 250 20480 to 250 250 to 250 20480 69 3 6 ON delay time for Comparator 3 0 0 999s 0 to 9999 C9 3 8 OFF delay time for Comparator 3 0 0 9999s 0 to 9999 69 3 9 Selection of output function for Comparator 3 00 11 See G9 1 9 0 to 11 302 MODBUS COMMUNICATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Address Screen Description amp ModbusRange 40342 08 21 Mode selection for Analogue Output 1 00 NONE 01 SPEED MOTOR 02 CURRENT MOTOR 03 VOLTAGE MOTOR TORQUE MOTOR PF MOTOR TEMP MOTOR FREQUENCY MTR INPUT VOLTAGE E SPEED REF Reserved PID REFERENCE PID FEEDBACK 17 ANLG INPUT 1 18 ANLG INPUT 2 19 ANLG INPUT 1 2 20 CURRENT FLOW MAX SCALE ABSOLUT SPEED MACRO PUMP 40343 G8 2 2 Format selection for Analogue Output 1 of 40344
59. 746 744 507 500 1136 6505 2505 815 2 SD7037050xxx 1124 11005 786 746 744 507 500 1136 6505 2505 815 236 SD7046050xxx 1124 11005 786 746 744 507 500 1136 6505 2505 815 236 SD7058050xxx 1124 11005 1136 1096 1094 507 500 1136 6505 2505 815 350 5070650 50 1124 11005 1136 1096 1094 507 500 1136 6505 2505 815 350 507072050 1124 1005 1136 1096 1094 507 500 1 6505 2505 815 350 507100 0010 SD70DTD0011AE Figure 5 13 Dimensions of Frame 7 00 DIMENSIONS 25 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 6 CONNECTION TERMINALS 6 1 Power Connections 6 1 1 Frame 3 Connections e Figure 6 1 Power connections location for 5070060 5x 5070115 5x 5070052 6x 5070080 6x 6 1 2 Frame 4 Connections BASE SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS BACK SIDE VIEW POWER CONNECTIONS 111213 SD70DTD0005AI Figure 6 2 Power connections location for SD70150 5x SD70170 5x and SD70105 6x 26 CONNECTION TERMINALS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 6 1 3 Frame 5 Connections SIDE VIEW BASE SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS POWER CONNECTIONS o gt r 389 5070 0006 Figure 6 3 Power connections location for 5070210 5x 5070275 5x 5070130
60. 9 1 G25 9 2 G25 9 3 G25 9 4 and G25 9 5 respectively to Y To remove this pump configuration and release the relay for another use the user should Disable the control of the pump in the corresponding parameter G25 9 1 G25 9 2 G25 9 3 G25 9 4 or G25 9 5 respectively by setting these parameters to N 96 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G4 1 5 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 1 CONFIGURATION Screen 5 DIGITL IN 1 06 Description Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration Range 00 70 See Function for additional information Default value 06 Set on run NO Modbus address 40032 Modbus range 0 to 70 Read Write YES Function It allows user to configure the Digital Input 1 for its individual use The configuration options for each multi function digital input are the following ones 00 gt NO USE The input is not programmed 01 gt START Start command from a push button with a normally open contact NO Note For configuring this option it is also necessary to configure another input as a Stop command from a push button with a normally closed contact NC previously 02 3 STOP1 Stop command in mode 1 from a push button with a normally closed contact NC according to the setting of the parameter G7 1 gt Stop mode 1 03 gt STOP2 RESET Stop command in mode 2 from a push button with a normally closed contact NC according to the sett
61. Analogue Reference Signal 0 20mA 4 20mA Programmable V or mA Power supply common for Analogue Signal Power supply for Analogue Signal 10Vdc 26mA Programmable V or mA Terminal 24 4 RS232 Tx Serial communication Common Terminal 0Vdc RS485 A Serial communication RS485 B Serial communication OVdc Terminal Serial communication RS232 Rx Serial communication SD70DTCO0001CI Figure 6 12 Example of standard wiring of control terminals Digital inputs can be configured individually or collectively Details on varying standard configurations are available to assist the user The following figure shows typical wiring configuration for a 3 wire start stop push button system CONNECTOR X1 24V Usr DI 24Vdc D Multifunction Digital Inputs 3 Wires wiring Common terminal 24 DI1 gt Start 012 gt Stop 1 Reset gt Stop 2 Reset 014 gt Reference 2 015 3 Speed inversion 016 gt 17 Control 2 Motor PTC Input SD70DTCO0002AI Figure 6 13 3 wire control terminals wiring CONNECTION TERMINALS 33 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 6 3 Control Terminals Description PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 24V_USR d for digital inputs Short circuit and overload protected Maximum 24Vdc o Programmable Digital Input 1 Digital inputs
62. F57 121 gt 140 gt F20 159 gt F39 178 gt F58 122 F02 141 gt F21 160 gt F40 179 gt F59 123 gt F03 142 gt F22 161 gt 180 gt F60 124 gt F04 143 gt F23 162 F42 181 gt Fe1 125 gt F05 144 gt F24 163 gt F43 182 gt F62 126 gt F06 145 gt F25 164 gt F44 183 gt 127 gt F07 146 gt F26 165 gt F45 184 3 F64 128 3 F08 147 gt F27 166 gt F46 185 gt F65 129 gt F09 148 gt F28 167 gt F47 186 gt F66 130 gt F10 149 gt F29 168 3 F48 187 F67 134 gt F11 150 gt F30 169 gt F49 188 gt F68 132 gt F12 151 gt F31 170 39 F50 189 gt F69 133 gt F13 152 gt F32 171 gt F51 190 gt F70 134 gt F14 153 gt F33 1722 F52 191 gt F71 135 gt F15 154 9 F34 173 gt F53 192 39 F72 136 gt F16 155 gt F35 174 9 F54 137 gt F17 156 gt F36 175 gt F55 138 gt F18 157 gt F37 176 gt F56 Note See description of the fault messages in chapter 11 Read Write Read Only MOTOR OUTPUT CURRENT Screen OFF 0 0 0 0 Description Motor output current Second field of the display status line Units A Modbus address 40163 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only MOTOR SPEED Screen OFF 0 0 0 0 Description Motor output speed Third field of the display status line Units Modbus address 40170 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 8192 100 of the motor rated speed Read Write Read Only Notes Equ
63. IRRIGATOR F G12 6 6 F2 AUTO RST 0 G12 7 17 F3 AUTO RST 0 G12 8 8 F4 AUTO RST 0 G13 1 1 F0 NO FAULT G13 2 2 F0 NO FAULT 613 3 3 NO FAULT 613 4 4 NO FAULT 613 5 5 F0 NO FAULT 613 6 6 NO FAULT GIS7IT CLEAR FAULTSEN qor G14 Multi references 250 to 250 SD70ITG0063AI Figure 10 11 Parameters structure from group G12 to group G14 74 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G15 1 1 INCH1 0 00 615 2 2 INCH2 0 00 615 3 3 INCH3 0 00 G16 Skip Frequencies 616 1 1 SKIP 1 0 0 616 2 2 SKIP 2 0 0 616 3 3 SKIP BAND OFF S OFF 0 to 20 617 1 1 DC BRAKE OFF S OFF 0 0 to 995 G17 2 2 DC CURR 0 0 100 617 3 3 DC VOLTS 0 0 Sj 00 25 G17 4 41 HEATING OFF lt OFF 0 0 to 30 G17 5 5 DYN BRAK N lt gt N No Y Yes 617 6 6 VDC BRAKE OFF S For VIN 400V 500V gt 800 to 810V OFFz811V For VIN 690V gt 1150 to 1160V OFF 1161V ea 19 2 Motor Load G19 2 1 1 MIN FLUX 100 lt 40 100 G19 22 2 V BOOST 0 0 lt 0 0 100 G19 2 3 3 BW BOOST 0 0 lt 0 0 100 G19 2 4 4 SLIP COMPENS N lt N No Y Yes G19 2 5 5 DAMPING 0 0 lt 0 0 to 20 0 G19 2 6 6 TTP BAND 0 0 lt 0 0 10 0 G19 2 7 71 SLIP 2 0 lt j 0 0 20 0 G19 2 9 9 STR FRQ 0 0 gt 0 0 100 G19 2 10 10 V H BREK OFF lt OFF 0 0 0 1 100
64. LEDs To show the operation status of the drive LCD DISPLAY With lines of Status Visualization and Control of the drive CONTROL KEYPAD Keys for parameter setting and commisioning of the drive SDT7OITCDOO3CI Figure 7 1 Display Unit and Keypad 7 1 1 LEDs for Status Indication Leds offer an easy method of identifying if the SD700 is powered up if the drive is supplying output voltage or if the drive has tripped Led ON Yellow colour When it is lit indicates equipment is powered up Led RUN Green colour When it is lit indicates the motor is powered by the SD700 Led FAULT Red colour When it is blinking indicates the equipment is in fault status 22855 Uin 389 390 305 304 3058 ju MENU OPTIONS 29731 Figure 7 2 Status Visualization DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD 35 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 7 1 2 Alphanumeric LCD Display SD700 display has a LCD screen of four lines with sixteen characters each 16x4 Each line has different functions Status Line It is the top line It is always present and shows the SD700 status STR Start STP Stop etc It also shows the output current and the motor speed It is not configurable by the user Visualization Line 1 It is the second line of the screen It is always present and allows the selection of variables from the visualization menu It is configurable by the user Visuali
65. LOCAL SETPOINT 4 FOR PID Screen PMP 4 0 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 42154 Modbus range 0 32760 Read Write YES Description To set the local setpoint 4 for PID Multi reference 4 For additional details check parameter G25 1 8 gt Local setpoint 4 for PID SV5 18 LOCAL SETPOINT 5 FOR PID Screen PMP MRe5 0 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 42155 Modbus range 0 32760 Read Write YES Description To set the local setpoint 5 for PID Multi reference 5 For additional details check parameter G25 1 9 gt Local setpoint 5 for PID SV5 19 LOCAL SETPOINT 6 FOR PID Screen MRe6 0 0 Units motor speed Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Description 42156 0 32760 YES To set the local setpoint 6 for PID Multi reference 6 For additional details check parameter G25 1 10 gt Local setpoint 6 for PID 56 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SV5 20 LOCAL SETPOINT 7 FOR PID Screen PMP MRe7 z 0 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 42157 Modbus range 0 32760 Read Write YES Description To set the local setpoint 7 for PID Multi reference 7 For additional details check parameter G25 1 11 gt Local setpoint 7 for PID SV5 21 LOCAL SETPOINT 8 FOR PID Screen PMP 0 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 42158 Modbus range 0 32760 Read Write YES Description To set th
66. Maximum Range 100 For a read flow of 500 litres the analogue output is 0 4 4 1 209 uie 4 12mA MaximumRange 1000 Additionally exists the option 27 MACRO PUMP that it is not directly settable by the user for any of the analogue outputs On the contrary this option is automatically set for the program to the Analogue Output 1 in case of the user enables the Fixed Pump 4 and it will be automatically set for the Analogue Output 2 when the user enables the Fixed Pump 5 For both outputs the format configuration will always be 0 to 10V where 0 means the pump is OFF and 10V means the pump is ON DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 229 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 20 7 G25 1 1 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function G25 1 2 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function Subgroup 25 1 25 1 Setpoints CONTROL MODE 1 CONTROL MODE 1 Control mode 0 1 See Function for additional information 1 NO 42035 0 to 1 YES It allows selecting the control mode according to the following configuration options 0 gt MANUAL This control mode is thought for commissionings and tests It is not thought for a continuous operation since protections are disabled In this control mode display shows OVERRIDE MANUAL With this option
67. No Fault Ho Motor PTC Input In case of trip relay will change over 50700 0004 Figure 13 2 Start Stop commands by terminals speed reference by motorized potentiometer Note Use screened cables for the controls and connect the screen to the ground 322 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 13 4 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Seven Speed References Selectable by Digital Inputs 13 4 1 Parameters Configuration 1 4 Language selection 1 7 Program activation G2 Motor Nameplate Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt 20 Self cool motor gt 40 Force cooled motor gt 100 G3 References 1 REF1 SPD MREF G3 1 Speed reference source 1 MREF gt Multiple speed references activated by digital inputs G4 Inputs 54 1 Digital Inputs 1 CNTROL MODE1 2 G4 1 1 Main Control Mode 2 REMOTE Drive control is done through control terminals 64 1 4 Digital Inputs configuration 3 gt MREF 3 WIRES Automatically programs digital inputs 4 5 4 DIGIT MODE 3 9 and 6 as multiple speed references for up to 7 different values The selection 222442 others digital inputs remain user configurable 5 DIGITL IN 1 05 04 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 052 Start Stop Allows the start stop command to be given by a configuration Switch G14 Multi references 1 MREF 1 10 0 G14 1 Mult reference 1 SCORTA be set accor
68. Normal Comparator 3 will be activated when the ON condition is given setting realized in G9 3 3 gt Activation value of Comparator in normal mode and will be deactivated when the OFF condition is given setting realized in G9 3 7 Deactivation value of Comparator 3 in normal mode 1 gt Window Comparator 3 will be activated when signal is within the limit 1 setting realized in G9 3 5 gt Limit 1 for Comparator in window mode and limit 2 setting realized in G9 3 4 Limit 2 for Comparator 3 in window mode and additionally limit 2 is higher than limit 1 If limit 2 is lower than limit 1 logical function of comparator output will be inverted See figure 10 37 to observe the behaviour of the comparator output for each operation mode 168 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G9 3 3 Screen ACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 3 IN NORMAL MODE Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function G9 3 4 Screen Note 3 SP ON 100 C3 ACTIVAT LEVEL Activation value of Comparator 3 in normal mode 250 to 250 100 5 40323 20480 to 20480 YES It allows setting the activation value of the Comparator 3 output Output of Comparator 3 will be activated when source signal of Comparator 3 selected in G9 3 1 is higher than the value set in this parameter and additionally
69. Note Drive is configured to go to sleep according to the conditions of the installation as factory setting Nevertheless all of the parameters values described below must be checked properly according to each installation to guarantee a correct functionality If you do not want the equipment goes in sleep mode these parameters must be adjusted for that purpose DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 247 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS FEEDBACK N Engineer Units MOTOR SPEED STEADY SPEED G2542 DRIVE PUMP ON TIME ts te lt G254 1 TIME G25 4 1 gt Delay time before activating sleep mode 5 0 625 4 2 gt Sleep speed for local setpoint 1 NOTE For this example we have taken as stop condition of the drive pump sleep mode activation a speed value concretely the sleep speed assigned to the local setpoint 1 But the stop condition can be any one of the remain speeds associated to each one of the PID local setpoints in case of the stop condition is the speed signal or can also be the flow detection the flow level or the output current level SD70ITCCO0034BI Figure 10 49 Sleep Mode deactivation G25 4 2 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 1 Screen 2 SLPsp1 40 0 Extended info DRV SLEEP SPEED1 Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 1 Range 0 096 to 250 Default value 40 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42307 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It
70. OF 0 G9 3 8 8 T C3 OF OFF 69 3 9 9 SEL FUNT C3 00 Q 01 SPEED MOTOR 02 CURRENT MOTOR 03 VOLTAGE MOTOR 04 POWER MOTOR 05 TORQUE MOTOR 06 PF MOTOR 07 MOTOR 08 FREQUENCY MOTOR 09 VOLTAGE 10 DC BUS 11 DRIVE TEMP 12 SPEED REF 13 Reserved 14 PID REFERENCE 15 PID FEEDBACK 16 PID ERROR 17 ANLG INPUT 1 18 ANLG INPUT 2 19 ANLG INPUT 1 2 20 Reserved 21 MAX SCALE 22 ABSOLUT SPEED 0 1 Window 250 to 250 250 to 250 250 to 250 0 0 9995 250 to 250 0 0 99995 00 O1 START STOP 02 STOP 1 03 STOP 2 04 RESET 05 5 INCH1 06 5 INCH2 O7 START INCH3 08 INV SPEED O9 ACC DEC 2 10 REFERENCE 2 11 SPEED LIMIT 2 OzNormal 1 Window 250 to 250 250 to 250 lt G9 3 6 6 T C3 ON 0 0s lt 0 0 9995 250 to 250 O1 START STOP 02 STOP 1 03 5 2 04 O5 START INCH1 06 5 INCH2 07 5 INCH3 08zINV SPEED 09 DEC 2 10 REFERENCE 2 11 SPEED LIMIT 2 SD70ITG0061AI Figure 10 9 Parameters structure from subgroup S9 2 G9 to subgroup S9 3 G9 72 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G10 Limits oer hn oar pede 610 7 7 1 2 lt 0 25 to 1 50In orreox re 0 G11 1 1 SP TO OFF lt 0 0 60s OFF G11 2 2 STOP
71. ON delay time set in G9 3 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figure 10 38 This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 3 is set to normal mode parameter G9 3 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 3 set to 0 gt Normal LIMIT 2 FOR COMPARATOR 3 IN WINDOW MODE Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function Note 4 LIM 2 C3 100 C3 WINDOW LIMIT2 Limit 2 of the Comparator 3 in window mode 250 to 250 100 YES 40323 20480 to 20480 YES It allows defining one of the limits to activate Comparator 3 in window mode Output of Comparator 3 will be activated when source signal of Comparator 3 selected in G9 3 1 is within the limit 1 set in G9 3 5 and the limit 2 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 3 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 3 is set to window mode parameter G9 3 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 3 set to 1 gt Window DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 169 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G9 3 5 LIMIT 1 FOR COMPARATOR 3 IN WINDOW MODE Screen 5 LIM 1 C3 0 Extended
72. POWER ELECTRONICS G5 10 RAMP 2 OF REFERENCE DECREASE FOR MOTORIZED POTENTIOMETER Screen 10 DEC2 3 0 s Extended info MOTO POT DEC2 Description Ramp 2 of reference decrease for motorized potentiometer function Range 0 01 650 5 Default value 3 0 s Set on run YES Modbus address 40401 Modbus range 10 to 65000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the ramp 2 of reference decrease for motorized potentiometer function This function is configured in G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration with the option 4 gt MOTORIZED POT or 5 9 ERASAB POT Additionally it is necessary to set G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed or 53 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with the option PMOT depending on the selected source is 1 or 2 With this function user can introduce the speed reference by means of two push buttons connected to the digital inputs DI5 up or increase the speed reference and DI6 down or decrease the speed reference While we press Up push button we can decrease the speed by applying up to two different ramps previously set ramps 1 and 2 of reference decrease The ramp change is set in parameter G5 11 gt Speed for ramp change with motorized potentiometer The drive will apply the ramp 1 until the speed is below the value set in G5 11 From that moment on drive will start to apply the ramp 2 If G5 11 is set to OFF any ramp change will not be done
73. PUMP 2 RELAY 2 Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function Note 15 FP T2 OF 10s FPUMP2 STP DELAY Delay time to stop the fixed pump 2 Relay 2 0 6000s 10s YES 42077 0 to 60000 YES It allows setting the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to the Relay 2 At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local setpoint depending on the selected local setpoint and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 255 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 16 DELAY TIME TO STOP FIXED PUMP 3 RELAY 3 Screen 16 FP OF 10s Extended info FPUMP3 STP DELAY Description Delay time to stop the fixed pump 3 Relay 3 Range 0 6000s Default value 10s Set on run YES Modbus address 42078 Modbus range 0 to 60000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to the Relay 3 At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local
74. STATUS MESSAGES 8 1 Status Line The upper line of the display corresponds to the status line In this line we can display the equipment status motor current A and the motor speed 96 It is always displayed and it is not programmable by the user Status Line To show the drive status normal operation warnings and trips To show the average motor current Current motor speed displayed as percentage of rated motor current The sign means the motor rotates in a direction The plus sign does not only mean that the motor rotates in hourly direction 50701 0016 Figure 8 1 Status Line Description GENERAL STATUS Screen OFF 0 0 0 096 Description Present status of the drive First field of the display status line Range See chapters 8 2 8 3 and 11 Modbus address 40219 Modbus range 0 to 201 STATUS MESSAGES 0 gt OFF 4 DEC 12 DCB 43 1 1 gt 5 SPG 15 gt TBR 49 HEA 2 ACL 6 EST 41 gt M 3 RUN 10 gt SPN 42 1 Note See description of the status messages chapter 8 2 WARNING MESSAGES 61 MOL 66 gt TLT 70 gt AVI 91 gt S2L 63 MOC 67 gt VLT 71 gt ow 64 gt DOC 68 gt ACO 72 UNV 65 ILT 69 90 3 S1L Note See description of the warning messages in chapter 8 3 38 STATUS MESSAGES POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 FAULT MESSAGES 120 NFL 139 gt F19 158 gt F38 177 gt
75. Screen Comparators 000 Units Modbus address 40232 Comparator 1 40233 Comparator 2 40234 gt Comparator 3 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write Read Only Description It shows if comparators are activated or not X Active 0 Not Active 52 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 9 5 Parameters SV 5 Programmable Parameters This group is not only a display group Some parameters such as speed pressure and inch speeds can be adjusted in this group These parameters are also available in their corresponding parameter groups This is a simple way to allow user adjustment of basic parameters without entering the main programming groups SV5 1 SPEED REFERENCE IN LOCAL MODE Screen Local Sp 100 Units motor speed Modbus address 40124 Modbus range 250 20480 to 250 20480 Read Write YES Description It shows the speed reference value in local mode introduced by keypad See parameter 53 3 gt Local speed reference for additional data SV5 2 PID REFERENCE IN LOCAL MODE Screen PID Local 100 Units feedback Modbus address 40149 Modbus range 0 0 0 to 400 32760 Read Write YES Description It allows user to select the PID reference in local mode See parameter G6 2 gt PID local reference for additional data SV5 3 MULTI REFERENCE 1 Screen Mref1 10 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 40052 Modbus range 250 20480 to 250 2
76. See Function for additional information Default value LOCAL Set on run YES Modbus address 42374 Modbus range 002 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the alternative source to introduce the PID setpoint Selection options LOCAL setpoint is introduced from keypad setpoint is introduced by means of Analogue Input 1 12 setpoint is introduced by means of Analogue Input 2 236 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 2 3 PID FEEDBACK SOURCE Screen 3 PID FBK AI2 Description Selection of the source for PID feedback signal Range Al2 PULSE See Function for additional information Default value Al2 Set on run YES Modbus address 42046 Modbus range 002 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the source to introduce PID feedback signal Selection options Feedback signal is introduced through Analogue Input 1 Al2 Feedback signal is introduced through Analogue Input 2 PULSE Feedback signal is introduced through configurable Multi function Digital Input programmed for this purpose parameter G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 See Subgroup 54 4 Pulse Input for additional information G25 2 4 PROPORTIONAL GAIN OF PID REGULATOR Screen 4 PID Kc 1 0 Extended info PROPORTIONAL PID Description Proportional gain of PID regulator Range 0 1 20 Default value 1 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42047 Modbus range 1 to 200 Read Write YE
77. YES Function It allows setting the motor rated voltage according to the motor nameplate G2 3 MOTOR RATED POWER Screen 3 MTR PWR 00 0kW Extended info MOTOR POWER Description Motor rated power Range 0 0 6500kW Default value Value depending on the drive rated current Set on run YES Modbus address 40285 Modbus range 0 to 65000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the motor rated power according to the motor nameplate 86 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G2 4 MOTOR RPM Screen 4 MTR RPM 1485 Extended info MOTOR SPEED rpm Description Motor rpm Range 0 24000rpm Default value 1485 Set on run YES Modbus address 40286 Modbus range 0 to 24000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the motor rated speed according to the motor nameplate G2 5 COSINE PHI Screen 5 MTR PFA 0 85 Extended info MTR POWER FACTOR Description Cosine Phi Range 0 to 0 99 Default value 0 85 Set on run YES Modbus address 40288 Modbus range 0 to 99 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the motor cosine Phi according to the motor nameplate G2 6 MOTOR RATED FREQUENCY Screen 6 MTR FRQ 50Hz Extended info MOTOR FREQUENCY Description Motor rated frequency Range 1 100Hz Default value 50Hz Set on run YES Modbus address 40284 Modbus range 0 to 100 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the motor rated frequency according to the motor nameplate
78. YES Function It allows inverting the output of PID regulator Options N gt NO Inversion disabled PID regulator responds in normal mode When the feedback signal value is above the reference signal value speed will be decreased If the feedback signal is below the reference signal speed will be increased In short PID regulator responds with a speed increase from a feedback signal drop This one is the normal setting when PID regulator is used for example in a constant pressure control application A pressure drop feedback due to a higher demand requires a speed increase of the pump to maintain the pressure Y gt YES Inversion enabled PID regulator responds in inverse mode When the feedback signal value is above the reference signal value speed will be increased If the feedback signal is below the reference signal speed will be decreased This means that PID regulator response from a feedback signal drop is a decrease of the output speed This is the typical response required when for example PID regulator is used for temperature control A temperature decrease feedback due to a lower demand requires that fan speed decreases to maintain the temperature G6 8 PID CONTROL ERROR Screen 8 ERR PID 0 096 Description PID control error Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 40148 Read Only It shows the difference between the reference or setpoint value of PID regulato
79. activate the output of the Comparator 2 When the activation condition of the output signal of Comparator 2 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the activation of this signal for the time set in this parameter If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 165 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G9 2 7 DEACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 2 IN NORMAL MODE Screen 7 SP C2 OF 0 Extended info C2 DEACTIV LEVEL Description Deactivation value of Comparator 2 in normal mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40313 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the deactivation value of the Comparator 2 output Output of Comparator 2 will be deactivated when source signal of Comparator 2 selected in G9 2 1 is lower than the value set in this parameter and additionally OFF delay time set in G9 2 8 has elapsed If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears before elapsing OFF delay time the output of the comparator will be not deactivated See figure 10 38 Note This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 2 is set to normal mode parameter G9 2 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 2 set to 0 gt Normal G9 2 8 OFF DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 2 Screen 8 T C2
80. allows setting the ramp that will be applied to increase the setpoint After finishing the pipe filling process or if this process has not been realized from the beginning the drive will adjust the setpoint value to the present value of the feedback signal provisionally Then the setpoint will be increased according to the ramp set in this parameter up to 5 below the real setpoint selected by user In that moment the drive will start the real regulation During the setpoint ramp the drive cannot go to sleep by no demand By setting a slow setpoint ramp we achieve a smooth increase of the motor speed Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 275 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 20 14 Subgroup 25 8 S25 8 Setpoint Compensation due to Pressure Loss G25 8 1 COMPENSATION PRESSURE AT THE STARTING OF 1 FIXED PUMP Screen 1 COMP 1 0 0Bar Extended info SETPOINT COMPEN1 Description Compensation pressure at the starting of one fixed pump Range 0 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42131 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows compensating the pressure loss in the pipe by increasing the setpoint automatically when one fixed pump is connected Note Default units
81. allows setting the value of the sleep speed 1 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 1 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 248 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 4 3 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 2 Screen 3 SLPsp2 40 0 Extended info DRV SLEEP SPEED2 Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 2 Range 0 096 to 250 Default value 40 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42308 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the sleep speed 2 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 2 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 G25 4 4 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 3 Screen 4 SLPsp2 40 0 Extended info DRV SLEEP SPEED3 Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 3 Range 0 096 to 250 Default value 40 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42309 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the sleep speed 3 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 3 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 G25 4 5 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 4 Screen 5 SLPsp2 40 096 Extended info DRV SLEEP SPEED4 Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 4 Range 0 096 to 250 Default value 40 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42310 Modbu
82. allows the decrease of parameters value 36 DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Q STOP RESET When pushed for 2 seconds approx it allows navigation between the programming line and visualisation lines available to the user It also offers the possibility of escaping back to the previous sub group or group To start the drive from the keypad when the control has been set as local control check drive configuration To stop the drive from the keypad when the control has been set as local control In the case of tripping this key can be used to reset the drive if local control is enabled In the following figure you can see a programming example where you can observe the operation explained previously Programming Line O gt O G1 MENU OPTIONS G2 MOTOR DATA G3 REFERENCES G25 PROG vov 0 OB 1 PARTIAL Lock 2 Lock 3 1 e CPSC o oo 1327 9999 rPRoG STANDAR 4 6 gt 5 PUMPS YW Option 98 8 nas the same functionality but in downward direction Push to read the code description If ESC key is pressed while navigation inside a group then you can access to the 3 main screen of this specific group SD70ITC0015DI Figure 7 4 Example of parameters navigation DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD 37 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 8
83. and the drive will search the reference speed by only applying the ramp 1 for reference decrease of motorized potentiometer set in this parameter Setting is realized in deceleration units decrease in of speed per second See figure 10 24 G5 11 SPEED FOR RAMP CHANGE WITH MOTORIZED POTENTIOMETER Screen 11 MPOT BRK OFF Extended info MOTO POT BRKPOIN Description Speed for increase decrease ramps change with motorized potentiometer Range OFF 0 to 250 of speed reference Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40402 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function This parameter allows using the alternative ramps of reference increase and decrease with motorized potentiometer function selected G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration with the option 4 gt MOTORIZED POT or 5 9 ERASAB POT and also set G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed or 53 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with the option PMOT depending on the selected source is 1 or 2 Change speed is set in this parameter When the speed is above or below the change speed drive will start to apply the alternative ramps If this parameter is set to OFF any ramp change will not be done this is drive only applies the ramps set in G5 7 Ramp 1 of reference increase for motorized potentiometer G5 8 Ramp 1 of reference decrease for motorized potentiometer See figure 10 24 120 DESC
84. are configured in the Input group Their status can be displayed in the visualisation group They can be supplied from terminal 1 or an external gt 2 Dn power 24Vdc supply If an external power supply is used the common should be connected to z the terminal 19 user GND a 3 DI2 Programmable Digital Input 2 See DI1 description 4 DIS Programmable Digital Input 3 See 011 description g 5 DI4 Programmable Digital Input 4 See DI1 description 6 015 Programmable Digital Input 5 See 011 description T 016 Programmable Digital Input 6 See 011 description 8 Control signal of motor temperature through the connection of a PTC Voltage or current programmable Analogue Input 1 V or mA Configurable for 0 10Vdc 10 10Vdc 0 20mA or 4 20 Input resistance value in voltage mode is 20 Input resistance value in current mode is Ri 250Q E z 11 AM Common for Analogue Input 1 c lt 12 Al2 Voltage or current programmable Analogue Input 2 V or mA See description o 13 Al2 Common for Analogue Input 2 Q 14 1 Voltage or current programmable Analogue Output 1 V or mA Configurable for 0 10Vdc 2 10Vdc 0 20mA or 4 20mA 2 2 15 AO1 Common for Analogue Output 1 z gt lt a 16 AO2 Voltage or current programmable Analogue Output 2 V or mA Configurable for 0 10Vdc 10Vdc 0 20mA or 4 20mA 17 2 Common for Analogue Output 2 18 10V POT 10Vd
85. during the acceleration and deceleration Example We suppose that skip frequency 1 G16 1 is set to 40 skip frequency 2 G16 2 is set to 80 and the skip bandwidth is set to 20 The avoided frequencies will be from 40 10 to 40 10 and from 80 10 to 80 10 this is from 30 to 50 and from 70 to 90 Now we suppose that reference frequency 1 speed reference 1 is 55 out of the two skip bandwidths Reference frequency 2 speed reference 2 is 85 therefore is inside of one skip bandwidth In the first case reference frequency 1 55 the drive will only take the frequency values that are inside of skip bandwidth while is accelerating or decelerating until reaching the value of 55 in this case during the acceleration speed at which the drive will remain operating In the second case when reference frequency 2 is inside of one of the skip bandwidths 85 two situations are possible Drive is accelerating then frequency will be increased up to 85 it will not stop here but it will be increased up to 90 maximum limit value of the skip bandwidth b Drive is decelerating then frequency will be decreased down to 85 it will not stop here but it will be decreased down to 7096 minimum limit value of the skip bandwidth In the following figure we can observe the behaviour of the frequency signal according to the skip frequencies and speed references
86. equipments connected in a Modbus network you must use the address 0 When this address is used all of the slaves in the Modbus network make the required task but they do not prepare any answer MODBUS COMMUNICATION 295 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 11 4 Summary of Modbus Addresses in Numerical Order Address Screen Description Range Modbus Range SPIN SPIN 4004 072 Stop mode 2 a Start mode 2 80 0 99 9 OFF 100 For VIN 400V 500V gt For VIN 400V 500V gt 625 to 799V OFF 800V 625 to 799 800 40021 G19 2 13 Regeneration bus voltage For VIN 690V gt For VIN 690V gt 950 to 1250V 1251 950 to 1250 1251 296 MODBUS COMMUNICATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Address Screen Description Range Modbus Range Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration 00 NO USE START STOP1 STOP2 RESET START STOP START RST STOP RESET START INCH1 START INCH2 RESERVE RESERVE INV INCHS ACC DEC 2 REFERENCE 2 CONTROL 2 START STP RST STOP 2 SPEED LIMIT 2 DC BRAKE STARTMODE 0 EXTERN EMERGE PMP START STP FLOW PULSE FIX PUMP1 FLT FIX PUMP3 FLT FIX PUMP4 FLT FIX PUMP5 FLT MAN PROTstart HI PRESS FLT LO PRESS FLT FLOW SWITCH IRRIGAT TRIP SETPONT PIN1 SETPON PIN2 MAN REF 2 MAN OVR START PRESSUR SWITC 70 ALTER PID STP 40037 64 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration 00
87. gt enable speed inversion 11 gt RESERVE Reserved for future use 12 9 RESERVE Reserved for future use 13 gt INV INCHS It inverts the inch speed reference set 615 1 gt Inch speed 1 G15 2 gt Inch speed 2 or G15 3 gt Inch speed 3 NO Note Rotation inversion must be enabled in parameter G10 9 gt To enable speed inversion 14 ACC DEC 2 It activates the use of the alternative acceleration and deceleration ramps programmed in 55 3 gt Acceleration ramp 2 and G5 4 gt Deceleration ramp 2 NO 15 gt REFERENCE 2 It allows selecting the alternative speed reference programmed in G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed NO 16 9 RESERVE Reserved for future use 17 9 CONTROL 2 It activates the alternative control mode programmed G4 1 2 gt Alternative control mode NO 18 gt START STP RST Like option 06 START RST STOP but Reset signal will be activated after the drive is stopped NO 19 gt STOP 2 Stop command in mode 2 from a push button with a normally closed contact NC according to the setting of the parameter G7 2 gt Stop mode 2 20 gt SPEED LIMIT 2 Change to the alternative speed limits programmed G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 and G10 4 gt Maximum speed limit 2 NO 21 DC BRAKE It allows activating or deactivating dynamic brake unit NO 22 gt START MODE 2 To select the alterna
88. gt PARAMETERS LOCK this screen appears automatically to request the introduction of the access password 2 PASSWORD OFF Parameters lock is executed when we introduce the password and this one is memorized after elapsing a few seconds To unlock parameters setting you should access to the parameter G1 1 and select option 0 NO Next this screen appears automatically to request the introduction of the access password 2 PASSWORD 2 Parameters unlock is executed once the password is introduced and after elapsing few seconds This password is the same one used for locking parameters DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 81 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G1 2b UNLOCK PASSWORD RECOVERY Screen 3 PSW ERR XXXX Description Recovery of the unlock password access Range 0000 to 9999 Default value 0000 Set on run YES Function It supplies information to recover the introduced lock password according to the expression Unlock passwordz XXXX 2 3 Note This parameter appears when an incorrect password is introduced to unlock parameters G1 4 LANGUAGE SELECTION Screen 4 LANG ESPANOL Description Selection of the user language Range ENGLISH ESPANOL DEUTSCH Default value ESPANOL Set on run NO Function It allows user to select the language All of the screens parameters and configurable options for each parameter will appear in the language selected by user G1 5 PARAMETERS INITIALIZE Scre
89. gt Due to its reliability FPA Fault Preventing Algorithms is able to detect critical situations and correct them avoiding unnecessary downtime in production Power Electronics has employed a new control strategy MCA Motion Combined Algorithms combining all the advantages of different traditional motor control and ensuring robustness and stability POEUN ERR ES EEC Ese cc sec see 1 Removable Display 2 Control Terminals 3 Power Terminals 12 INTRODUCTION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 2 1 Basic Configuration The following devices are required to operate the drive Proper peripheral devices must be selected and correct connections must be done to ensure proper operation An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in system malfunction or reduction in product life as well as component damage You must read and understand this manual thoroughly before proceeding AC Power Supply Use a power source with a voltage within the permissible range of drive input power rating Equipment is provided to operate with the neutral connected to the ground Earth leakage circuit breaker ELB Select circuit breakers or fuses in accordance with applicable national and local codes We recommend using specified circuit breakers or fuses to operate with drive Inline Magnetic Contactor Install if necessary When installed do not use it for the purpose of starting or s
90. info C3 WINDOW LIMIT1 Description Limit 1 of the Comparator 3 in window mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40322 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows defining one of the limits to activate Comparator 3 in window mode Output of Comparator 3 will be activated when source signal of Comparator 3 selected in G9 3 1 is within the limit 1 and the limit 2 set in G9 3 4 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 3 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 Note This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 3 is set to window mode parameter G9 3 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 3 set to 1 Window G9 3 6 ON DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 3 Screen 6 T C3 ON 0 0s Extended info C3 ACTIVAT DELAY Description ON delay time to activate Comparator 3 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40324 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a timer to activate the output of the Comparator 3 When the activation condition of the output signal of Comparator 3 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the activation of this signal for the time set in this parameter If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time t
91. input voltage will activate the relay 04 gt START Relay is active when the drive has received the start command 05 gt RUN The relay will be energized after the drive is started 06 READY Drive is ready for start no fault and no warning 07 gt ZERO SPEED Drive is running at zero speed 08 gt SET SPEED Speed has reached the value set as reference 09 gt SP DIRECTION The relay is activated when the speed direction is negative 10 9 RESERVE Reserved for future use 11 gt SP REF DIRECT The relay is activated when the speed reference direction is negative 12 9 RESERVE Reserved for future use DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 137 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 13 gt SP LIMIT Maximum or minimum speed limit 1 main limits has been reached or maximum or minimum speed limit 2 alternative limits has been reached depending on the selected limits All of these limits are set in group G10 LIMITS 14 gt CURR LIMIT Limit of motor current adjusted G10 5 gt Current limit has been reached 15 gt VOLT LIMIT DC Bus voltage limit has been reached 740V 16 TORQ LIMIT Torque limit adjusted in G10 7 has been reached 17 9 COMPARATOR1 When the Comparator 1 output is active relay is activated See group G9 COMPARATORS 18 9 COMPARATOR2 When the Comparator 2 output is active relay is activated See group G9 COMPARATORS 19 COMPARATOR3 When the Comparator 3 output is a
92. it is necessary to operate from the keypad but the speed reference can be introduced by using an analogue input or by keypad 1 gt PUMP The drive will start in pump control mode Selection of automatic operation in regulation mode it allows to control flow pressure SOURCE SELECTION FOR SPEED REFERENCE IN MANUAL MODE 2 MAN SPD REF LOCAL Selection of the source for the main speed reference in manual mode LOCAL Al2 See Function for additional information LOCAL NO 42041 0 to 2 YES It allows selecting the source for the speed reference when manual mode is activated by means of the activation of one digital input configured as MANUAL PROTECTED or as OVERRIDE MANUAL parameters G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration option 57 gt MAN PROTstart and 67 OVR STAR respectively Configuration options are the following ones LOCAL Speed reference is introduced from keypad Alt Speed reference is introduced by means of Analogue Output 1 12 Speed reference is introduced by means of Analogue Output 2 230 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 1 3 VALUE OF SPEED REFERENCE FOR LOCAL SOURCE IN MANUAL MODE Screen 3 MAN SPEED 0 0 Extended info MANUAL SPEED Description Value of speed reference in manual mode when local source is selected Range 25
93. mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40304 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the deactivation value of the Comparator 1 output Output of Comparator 1 will be deactivated when source signal of Comparator 1 selected in G9 1 1 is lower than the value set in this parameter and additionally OFF delay time set in G9 1 8 has elapsed If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears before elapsing OFF delay time the output of the comparator will be not deactivated See figure 10 38 Note This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 1 is set to normal mode parameter G9 1 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 1 set to 0 gt Normal 158 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G9 1 8 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run OFF DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 1 8 T C1 0 0s C1 DEACTIV DELAY OFF delay time to deactivate Comparator 1 0 0 9995 0 05 5 Modbus address 40307 Modbus range Read Write Function MOTOR SPEED 100 70 G9 1 3 gt 30 G9 1 7 gt OFF COMPARATOR OUTPUT ON OFF 0 to 9999 YES It allows setting a timer to deactivate the output of the Comparator 1 When the deactivation condition of the output signal of Comparator 1 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the deactivation of th
94. nennen 20 5 2 Dimensions of Frames 7 sss eee 21 5 3 Dimensions of Frames 8 and emm 22 5 4 Dimensions of Frames 10 11 eene 23 5 5 Dimensions of Frames 4 and 5 00 24 5 6 Dimensions of Frames 7 IPOO ss emm 25 6 CONNECTION 85 1 26 6 1 Power Cornrnectlons netu ee ere ee e E eben Re ED be 26 6 2 Control 2 2 rece a eere denen ee edle de 32 6 3 Control Terminals 34 DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL 35 7 1 Keypad Unit 2 2 1 10 00 eniti trm nennen innt 35 8 STATUS MESSAGES iiec saris caeco Lum rca ip ream eu tae kenn 38 9 1 Status Line eese ee Shed ee ste mda Eee 38 8 2 Listof Status Messages nece tese eire a idee nu abes 40 8 3 List of Warning 41 9 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP Go 42 9 1 Parameters SV 1 Motor 43 9 2 Parameters SV 2 Drive 46 9 3 Parameters SV 3 External
95. not accessible through Modbus communication Description It shows the speed of the motor in engineering units Pressing to the following sub parameters of configuration Screen Range Description To set the ratio factor between motor 2001 99 speed and machine speed It allows selection of the units to be displayed m s 2 0 mim Description 2 cm s m s eters secon Units Ma m s m m Meters minute cm m cm s Centimeters second y cm m Centimeters minute vim v s Turns second v m Turns minute Note They both are settable during run 50 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 9 4 Parameters SV 4 Internal Visualization SV4 1 ACTUAL FAULT Screen Actual Fault 00 Units Modbus address 40235 Modbus range Fault Number Read Write Read Only Description It shows the present code fault See fault history G13 FAULT HISTORY SV4 2 DRIVE RATED CURRENT Screen Drive Curr 170A Units A Modbus address 40209 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the drive rated current maximum current of the equipment at 50 5 4 3 DRIVE RATED VOLTAGE Screen Drive Volt 400V Units V Modbus address 40210 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only Descrip
96. of reference increase for motorized 0 01 650 sec potentiometer 40399 C58 Ramp 1 of reference decrease for motorized 0 01 650 sec potentiometer 40400 C57 Ramp 1 of reference increase for motorized 0 01 650 sec potentiometer 40401 65 10 2 of reference decrease for motorized 0 01 650 sec potentiometer 40402 C51 Speed for ramp change with motorized OFF 0 to 250 potentiometer 40403 65 12 Time constant to filter the speed 0 000 60 05 40413 G202 Limit time for communication OFF 0 250s 40414 020 3 1 Communication address 1 255 40415 G20 3 2 Communication speed 40416 G20 3 3 Communication parity G13 5 6136 6137 6111 610 6 G11 610 10 OFF 0 30 In 5 323 425V 400V 40457 Low input voltage level 586 621V 690V 40458 Trip time because of low input voltage 0 0 60s OFF 2 418 550 400V 40459 High input voltage level 126 759V 690V 40460 Trip time because of high input voltage 0 0 60s OFF 40461 611 9 Performance in case of input power loss 1 FAULTS 2 STOP 40462 611 10 motor option N No Y Yes 40462 p 40463 611 8 Trip delay time due to output voltage imbalance 0 0 10s OFF 40454 p delay put voltag 40482 G19 3 1 Stator resistance Rs 0 0 9 9 40502 G19 2 1 40 100 40505 G19 24 Slip compensation N No Y Yes 40505 p comp 40506 G19 2 5 Drive damping 0 0 20 0 40507 619 2 6 Compensating bandwidth of torque transit
97. of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 277 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 20 15 Subgroup 25 9 525 9 Fixed Pumps Control G25 9 1 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function G25 9 2 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function TO ENABLE FIXED PUMP ASSOCIATED TO OUTPUT RELAY 1 1 ENABLE PUMP1 N To enable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 1 pump 1 N Y See Function for additional information N YES 42136 0 to 1 YES It allows setting enabling or disabling the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 1 If this parameter is set to Y when activating pump control in parameter G1 7 gt Program activation option PUMP and configuring one digital input parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with option 52 gt FIX PUMP1 FLT the Output Relay 1 is configured with option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL to control fixed pumps If the pump associated to this relay is not required we recommend you disable it from this parameter In this way the relay can be configured for other uses N 3 NO To disable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 1 The relay is configured with the option 00
98. of the communication bus on which the drive is integrated 218 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 19 2 Subgroup 20 4 S20 4 Modbus TCP This parameter group is used to configure the drive when it must operate in an Ethernet network communication G20 4 1 IP ADDRESS A Screen 11 PARAM A 192 Description IP address A of the equipment Range 0 255 Default value 192 Set on run YES Modbus address 40374 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field A of the IP address assigned to the equipment in the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user The format of the IP address is the following one A B C D Therefore the setting of this address is realized by introducing a value in each parameter that configure the complete address this is by assigning a value to each one of the 4 parameters from parameter G20 4 1 gt IP address to parameter G20 4 4 gt IP address DY G20 4 2 IP ADDRESS B Screen 2 IP PARAM B 168 Description IP address B of the equipment Range 0 255 Default value 168 Set on run YES Modbus address 40375 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field B of the IP address assigned to the equipment in the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See
99. of the motor spinning speed whenever the reference source of speed is set to LOCAL in parameter G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed 53 2 Reference source 2 of speed depending on the reference source selected 90 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 4 Group 4 G4 Inputs 10 4 1 Subgroup 4 1 4 1 Digital Inputs G4 1 1 MODO DE CONTROL PRINCIPAL Screen 1 CNTROL 1 Description Main control mode Range 0 3 See Function for additional information Default value 1 Set on run YES Modbus address 40040 Modbus range 0 NONE 1 LOCAL 2 gt REMOTE 3 SERIAL COMMS Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the main control mode of the drive to give the orders that drive it Start Stop Reset The configuration options of the main control mode are 0 NONE Control mode 1 is not operative 1 LOCAL Drive control is realized from keypad this is the signals that control it is given through the keypad of the drive itself 2 REMOTE Drive control is realized through control terminals this is by activating or deactivating signals connected to the control terminals of the drive 3 SERIAL COMMS Drive control is realized through communication bus this is signals that drive the drive will be sent through it G4 1 2 ALTERNATIVE CONTROL MODE Screen 2 CNTROL MODE2 2 Description Alternative control mode Range 0 3 Defau
100. pti eoe e Piero ip tende eng 178 10 12 Group 12 G12 Auto 186 10 13 Group 13 G13 Fault History 192 10 14 Group 14 614 196 10 15 Gro p 15 G15 Inch Speeds eiiim eiivet keepo ERR ena ELE s 201 10 16 Group 16 G16 Skip 203 10 17 Group 17 G17 erinnern iecit ee 206 10 18 Group 19 G19 Fine 209 10 19 Group 20 G20 Serial Communication Controls 217 10 20 Group 25 G25 Pump 225 11 MODBUS COMMUNICATION cernere enne 289 11 4 Technical Specifications orti t ne x dee e xtti 289 11 2 Supported Modbus Function 293 11 3 Addressing 2 de ded Deed ecd 295 11 4 Summary of Modbus Addresses in Numerical 296 11 5 Annexe A Physical Level 3 ii pci tec deer eee 311 11 6 Annexe B Modbus Communication
101. range of the Analogue Input 1 Range 10 to 10V min G4 2 4 Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range 40 to 20 min G4 2 4 10V YES 40244 10000 to 10000 min G4 2 4 0to 20000 min G4 2 4 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the maximum voltage or current value for the Analogue Input 1 according to the characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected G4 2 7 MAXIMUM RANGE OF SENSOR 1 Screen 5 1 10 0l s Extended info RNG ALTO SENSOR1 Description Maximum range of sensor 1 Range 3200 to 3200 Engineering units min G4 2 5 Default value 10 0l s Set on run YES Modbus address 40250 Modbus range 3200 to 3200 min G4 2 5 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the maximum units value of the sensor connected to the Analogue Input 1 This value should also correspond to the maximum voltage or current level of the sensor set in G4 2 6 gt Maximum range of Analogue Input 1 Note The setting of this parameter should be checked if the sensor units are changed in parameter G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units It is necessary to set this value to operate in open loop and closed loop Note This parameter will be only available if G4 2 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input T is set to Y G4 2 8 SPEED FOR THE MINIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen 8 SPD LO1 0 Extended info SPD LO RNG AIN1 Description Speed corresponding to the minim
102. reference B G14 1 10 0 MREF1 0 0 X 014 2 20 0 MREF2 0 X 0 G14 3 30 0 MREF3 0 X X 614 4 40 0 MREF4 X 0 0 G14 5 50 0 MREF5 X 0 X G14 6 60 0 MREF6 X X 0 014 7 70 0 MREF7 X X X Note 0 Not active and X Active X1 CONNECTOR Multifuntion Digital Inputs Common Terminal 24Vdc DI1 gt 05 Start Stop 014 gt Multi reference L 015 gt Multi reference M 016 gt Multi reference Motor PTC Input X2 CONNECTOR NO Contact Common NC Contact NO Contact Common NC Contact 02 No Fault Multifunction Digital Outputs In case of trip relay will change over 50700 0005 Figure 13 3 Start Stop commands by terminals 7 speeds by digital inputs Note Use screened cables for the controls and connect the screen to ground 13 5 Pressure Group Control with 3 Auxiliary Pumps Start and Stop on Demand 13 5 1 Parameters Configuration Parameter 7 Name Description G1 Options Menu 4 LANG ENGLISH G1 4 Language selection ENGLISH PUMP It activates the extended functionality of the pump control in 7 PROG PUMP G1 7 Program Activation group 625 G2 Motor Nameplate 1 MTR CURR 00 00A G2 1 Motor rated current Set according to motor nameplate 2 MTR VOLT 400V G2 2 Motor rated voltage Set according to motor nameplate I 5 MTR 0 85 02 5 Cosine Phi Set according to motor nameplate B E i H i 6 MTR FRQ 50Hz 02 6 Motor
103. selected according to the options explained in section Function of parameter G12 5 Selection of fault 1 to be reset CAUTION At the moment of selecting faults that can be reset you should pay special attention to option 1 ALL THE FLTS In this case the protections of the drive and the motor will be disabled It is not recommended select this option since the drive could try to reset internal trips causing serious damage to the drive itself DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 191 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 13 Group 13 G13 Fault History G13 1 REGISTER 1 OF FAULT HISTORY Screen 1 FO NO FAULT Extended info LAST FAULT FXX Description Register 1 of fault history Range Default value Set on run Modbus address 40432 Modbus range Read Write Read Only Function The first parameter of this group allows visualizing the information about the last fault and additionally it will be used as the first register of fault history Drive shows this screen in case of a trip has been produced in the equipment By pressing key two seconds approximately you can access to the extended information that shows the fault order LAST FAULT Fxx when fault is solved The equipment is reset by pressing the STOP RESET key from display or by using an external reset if it is connected Some faults can be reset automatically by using auto reset function see group G12 AUTO RESET Fault storage It sh
104. setpoint depending on the selected local setpoint and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 Note If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated G25 4 17 DELAY TIME TO STOP FIXED PUMP 4 1 Screen 17 FP T4 OF 10s Extended info FPUMP4 STP DELAY Description Delay time to stop the fixed pump 4 Analogue Output 1 Range 0 6000s Default value 10s Set on run YES Modbus address 42079 Modbus range 0 to 60000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local setpoint depending on the selected local setpoint and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 Note If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated 256 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 4 18 DELAY TIME TO STOP FIXED PUMP 5 AO2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function Note 18 FP T5 OF 10s 5
105. shieldcould be realized on the gateway terminals or on the opposite extreme of the cable depending on the installation conditions SD70DTROOO6AI Figure 11 4 RS485 connection 292 MODBUS COMMUNICATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 11 2 Supported Modbus Function Codes Serial communications protocol provided by SD700 drive adheres to Modbus Industrial standard communications protocol of Modicon The drive uses reading and writing functions between all of the functions that exist in Modbus protocol The used functions by the drive are the following ones Function Description Registers Number 3 Registers Reading 120 16 Registers Writing 120 The implementation of this function code in the drive allows reading up to 120 registers into a Parameters Group in a frame If you want to access to a consecutive memory registers but belonging to different groups you should access in so many frames as groups are involved 11 2 1 Modbus Function Code N 3 Registers Reading This function code allows the Modbus controller master to read the content of the data registers indicated in the drive slave This function code only admits unicast addressing Broadcast or groupcast addressing are not possible with this function code The implementation of this function code in the drive allows reading up to 120 registers with consecutive addresses of the drive in a single frame Next a frame is shown where the master tri
106. start command is activated User must deactivated the start command and activate again See figure 10 29 Y YES Drive will start automatically when input power is restored after power loss occurring whenever the start command follows activated See figure 10 30 Note If Start Stop control is realized from the keypad the drive will not start automatically when input power is restored after power loss occurring since the signal is not kept activated 134 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 INPUT 4 POWER INPUT POWER RESTORED INPUT POWER LOSS TIME SPEED SPEED REFERENCE RUN COMMAND SD70ITCCOO30AI Figure 10 29 Parameter G7 10 set to N Running does not continue after recovering input power INPUT 4 POWER INPUT POWER LOSS RESTORED TIME D t 5 SPEED SPEED REFERENCE TIME gt RUN ti t t COMMAND 3 TIME gt t b b SD70ITCCO031Al Figure 10 30 Parameter G7 10 set to Y Running continues after recovering input power DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 135 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G7 11 ACCURACY SETTING FOR STARTING BY SPIN Screen 11 SPNstr B OFF Extended info SPIN START TUNE Description Accuracy setting for starting by spin Range OFF 0 1 100 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40017 Modbus range 0 to 1000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the accuracy of the s
107. the drive could try to reset internal trips causing serious damage to the drive itself G12 7 SELECTION OF FAULT 3 TO BE RESET Screen AUTO RST 0 Description Selection of fault 3 to be reset Range 0 25 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40577 Modbus range 0 to 25 Read Write YES Function If auto reset function is enabled in G12 1 AUTO RESET option the drive will consider the fault programmed here as resettable automatically Fault 3 to be reset is selected according to the options explained in section Function of parameter G12 5 Selection of fault 1 to be reset CAUTION At the moment of selecting faults that can be reset you should special attention to option 1 ALL THE FLTS In this case the protections of the drive and the motor will be disabled It is not recommended select this option since the drive could try to reset internal trips causing serious damage to the drive itself 190 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G12 8 SELECTION OF FAULT 4 TO BE RESET Screen 8 F4 AUTO RST 0 Description Selection of fault 4 to be reset Range 0 25 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40578 Modbus range 0 to 25 Read Write YES Function If auto reset function is enabled G12 1 AUTO RESET option Y the drive will consider the fault programmed here as resettable automatically Fault 4 to be reset is
108. the motor and wiring of the SD700 and F20 GROUND FLT 9 check motor insulation Ground is incorrectly connected or wrong Check and improve the ground connection system Motor stalled Heavy load Check the motor load F21 I LIM T O 1 Motor mechanical brake is coupled Increase maximum current limit F22 TQ LIM T O Motor stalled Heavy load Check the motor load Motor mechanical brake is coupled Increase maximum torque limit FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 315 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS DISPLAY F25 F27 DL SMTH F28 MICRO FLT F29 DSP FLT F30 WATCHDOG F31 SCR L1 F32 SCR L2 F33 SCR L3 F34 IGBT TEMP F35 PHSE L1 LOSS F36 PHSE L2 LOSS F37 PHSE L3 LOSS F40 EXT PTC F41 COMMS TRIP F42 AIN1 LOSS F43 AIN2 LOSS F44 CAL FLT F45 STOP T O F46 EEPROM FLT POSSIBLE CAUSE High current used by the motor due to heavy load The load exceeds the capacity of motor cooling under normal operating conditions Incorrect setting of the thermal model parameters Phase loss of the motor or a fault in motor windings Potential damage to the soft charge resistors of the 50700 Input power fault Parameters setting is not recognised Input power fault Parameters setting is incoherent Input power fault A conduction fault has been produced in the corresponding thyristor The thyristor is OFF when it should be o
109. the section of the ground connection cable should be equal or higher than the active conductor Installation ground must be connected to the drive ground terminal 10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Designation Code SD 0115 7 5 21 1 1 12 CODE PULSE NUMBER 6 Pulses 12 12 Pulses 18 18 Pulses CODE FILTER 1 First environment filter 2 Second environment filter CODE PROTECTION DEGREE 0 IPOO Degree protection 2 IP20 Degree protection 5 IP54 Degree protection CODE POWER SUPPLY 5 380 500Vac 6 690Vac CODE CURRENT 115 115A 330 330A NY CODE MODEL 7 700 CODE SERIES SD SDRIVE In case of 230Vac power supply consult availability with Power Electronics INTRODUCTION 11 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 1 2 Drive description The SDRIVE700 is a UNIQUE drive gt Due to its mechanical design FFA Full Frontal Access has reached an important objective to make easy in a significant way its installation and maintenance thanks to its modular independence It is available in IPOO IP20 and IP54 gt Due to features First speed drive incorporating a Graphical Display with 3 5 TFT touch screen for fast and easy programming o Real time clock and perpetual calendar o USB 2 1 Communication Port o Fibre Optic Port
110. this deactivated input the drive will start when Start Inch speed 1 command is received This is also valid for Inch speed 2 and 3 IN2 Inch speed 2 SD700 is working according to inch speed 2 command Start Inch speed 2 mode is active IN3 Inch speed 3 SD700 is working according to inch speed 3 command Start Inch speed 3 mode is active 40 STATUS MESSAGES POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 8 3 List of Warning Messages Screen Name Description MOL Motor overload This message will appear when motor thermal model is increasing the estimated motor temperature MOC Motor over current Motor current is higher than the rated current value 0 This message will appear if the output current is higher than 125 of the nominal current ILT Current limitation Current limit algorithm has been activated TLT Torque limitation Torque limit algorithm has been activated high DC Link voltage level has been detected and the voltage limit control VLT Voltage limitation algorithm has been activated to protect the drive ACO Asymmetric current Asymmetry in output currents of the drive has been detected AVO Output voltage imbalance Asymmetry in output voltage of the drive has been detected AVI Input voltage imbalance Asymmetry in input voltage of the drive has been detected OVV High input voltage Input voltage of the equipme
111. when source signal of Comparator 1 selected in G9 1 1 is within the limit 1 and the limit 2 set in G9 1 4 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 1 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 1 is set to window mode parameter G9 1 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 1 set to 1 gt Window DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 157 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G9 1 6 ON DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 1 Screen 6 T C1 0 0s Extended info C1 ACTIVAT DELAY Description ON delay time to activate Comparator 1 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40306 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a timer to activate the output of the Comparator 1 When the activation condition of the output signal of Comparator 1 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the activation of this signal for the time set in this parameter If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 G9 1 7 DEACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 1 IN NORMAL MODE Screen 7 SP C1 OF 0 Extended info C1 DEACTIV LEVEL Description Deactivation value of Comparator 1 in normal
112. 0 Function It allows setting a torque limit value This value is the maximum motor torque that the drive will allow the motor to supply to the load Note In applications with low and medium loads clean water pumps fans etc where high torque is not required default value is enough Nevertheless in applications with high load mills heavy tool etc you must increase the torque limit to allow that drive reaches the torque values required by the load at specific moments G10 10 TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF TORQUE LIMIT Screen 10 T LIM TO OFF Extended info TIMEOUT MAX TORQ Description Trip time because of torque limit Range 0 to 60s OFF Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40455 Modbus range 0 to 600 610 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the trip time because of torque limit has been reached This parameter provides with the possibility of tripping the drive automatically if torque limit set in G10 9 has been reached during a time set in this parameter G10 11 TO ENABLE SPEED INVERSION Screen 11 INVERSION N Description To enable speed inversion Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Modbus address 40108 Modbus range 0101 Read Write YES Function It enables or disables the possibility of inverting the motor speed This function prevents the motor running in negative rotation direction N 3 NO Disabled inversion Motor running in neg
113. 0 358 827 15 8070090 5 80700806 8535 8385 3005 200 140 358 827 15 5070115 5x x xx 1 8535 8385 3005 200 140 358 827 15 SD701505xxxx 8070105 6 1245 1206 320 251 4385 881 5275 3535 100 SD70170 5x x xx 3 1245 1206 320 251 114885 881 5275 3535 100 SD702105xxxx SD701306xxxx 1712 1667 431 396 528 460 14035 12405 815 180 SD702505xxxx 5070150 1712 1667 431 396 528 460 14085 12405 815 180 5070275 5 SD701706xxxx 1712 1667 431 396 528 460 14035 12405 815 180 Figure 5 1 Dimensions of Frame 3 D1 SD70DTD0023BE wi D1 Figure 5 3 Dimensions of Frame 5 50700 00002 50700700001 Figure 5 2 Dimensions of Frame 4 20 DIMENSIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 5 2 Dimensions of Frames 6 and 7 REFERENCE REFERENCE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT 380 500V 550 690V H1 H2 W1 W2 w3 D1 D2 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 SD70330 5x x xx SD70210 6x x xx 1712 1667 786 747 529 460 1602 1208 5 230 5 81 5 340 5070370 5x x xx SD70260 6x x xx 1712 1667 786 747 529 460 1602 1208 5 230 5 81 5 340 5070460 5 5070320 6x x xx 1712 1667 786 747 529 460 1602 1208 5 230 5 81 5 340 5070580 5x x xx SD70385 6x x xx 1712 1667 1132 1097 529 460 1602 1208 5 230 5 81 5 470 SD70650 5x x xx SD70460
114. 0 of motor rated speed per each second elapsed If parameter 55 6 gt Speed for deceleration ramp change is set to a specific value drive will search the reference speed by following the deceleration pattern set in parameter G5 2 gt Deceleration ramp 1 and once reached the change speed drive will continue the search of the reference speed by applying the alternative deceleration set in this parameter See parameter G5 2 Deceleration ramp 2 for additional information See figures 10 22 and 10 23 G5 5 SPEED FOR ACCELERATION RAMP CHANGE Screen 5 BRK ACC OFF Extended info BREAKPOINT ACL Description Speed for acceleration ramp change Range OFF 0 to 25096 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40396 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows using the alternative acceleration ramp parameter G5 3 When drive is accelerating and the speed set in this parameter is reached drive will start to apply the alternative acceleration ramp from that moment on If this parameter is set to OFF default value drive will only apply the acceleration ramp 1 parameter G5 1 Note The alternative acceleration ramp can be selected independently of drive speed This selection can be realized through digital inputs by configuring one of them with the option 14 gt ACC DEC 27 or by using the output functions of comparators for example if the magnitude of the comparator is the drive rated current whe
115. 0 to 250 Default value 0 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42042 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the speed reference of the drive to operate in manual mode protected or not when LOCAL source has been selected in parameter G25 1 2 Source selection for speed reference in manual mode and or G25 1 4 gt Source selection for alternative speed reference in manual mode and whether the speed reference is the main reference or the alternative reference Therefore it is possible to select one analogue input as source for main speed reference in G25 1 2 gt Source selection for speed reference in manual mode option or Al2 and on the other hand to select the keypad as source for alternative speed reference G25 1 4 gt Source selection for alternative speed reference in manual mode option LOCAL In this way when digital input configured as alternative reference parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration option 15 gt REFERENCE 2 is activated the speed of drive pump is the set one in this parameter from keypad In case of the digital input configured as alternative is not activated and keypad is selected as source for main speed reference parameter G25 1 2 set to LOCAL the value set here will be applied directly as speed reference
116. 0 4 Default value 100 Set run YES Modbus address 40103 Modbus range 20480 to G10 4 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the minimum speed limit 2 that the drive can apply to the motor It is set in of motor rated speed Note Selection of minimum speed limit 2 and maximum speed limit 2 alternative speed limits is realized through one of the digital inputs parameters from G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration set to option 20 SPEED LIMIT 2 or by means of the output function of one of the comparators parameters G9 1 9 3 Selection of output function for Comparator 1 G9 2 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 2 and G9 3 9 Selection of output function for Comparator 3 set to option 11 gt SPEED LIMIT 2 Note Commands to operate out of these limits are restricted to those limits See figure 10 41 G10 4 MAXIMUM SPEED LIMIT 2 Screen 4 2 SP 100 Extended info SPEED MAX LIMIT2 Description Maximum speed limit 2 Range G10 3 to 425096 Default value 100 Set on run YES Modbus address 40105 Modbus range G10 3 to 20480 Read Write YES 174 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting the maximum speed limit 2 that the drive can apply to the motor It is set in of motor rated speed Note Selection of minimu
117. 0 43 198 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G14 4 MULTI REFERENCE 4 Screen 4 MREF 4 40 0 Extended info MULTI REFERENCE4 Description Multi reference 4 Range 250 to 250 Default value 40 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40055 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the value of multi reference 4 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 G14 5 MULTI REFERENCE 5 Screen 5 MREF 5 50 0 Extended info MULTI REFERENCE5 Description Multi reference 5 Range 250 to 250 Default value 50 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40056 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the value of multi reference 5 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 G14 6 MULTI REFERENCE 6 Screen 6 MREF 6 60 0 Extended info MULTI REFERENCE6 Description Multi reference 6 Range 250 to 250 Default value 60 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40057 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the value of multi reference 6 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETE
118. 0096 Extended info SPEED MIN LIMIT1 Description Minimum speed limit 1 Range 250 to G10 2 Default value 0 0096 Set on run YES Modbus address 40102 Modbus range 20480 to G10 2 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the minimum speed limit 1 that the drive can apply to the motor It is set in of motor rated speed Note Commands to operate out of these limits are restricted to those limits A SPEED SPEED REFERENCE 26s mmm G10 1 gt Minimum speed limit 1 G10 2 gt Maximum speed limit 1 G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 G10 4 gt Maximum speed limit 2 G10 1 G10 3 50701 0023 Figure 10 41 Speed applied when maximum and minimum speed limits are performing DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 173 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G10 2 MAXIMUM SPEED LIMIT 1 Screen 2 MAX1 SP 100 Extended info SPEED MAX LIMIT1 Description Maximum speed limit 1 Range 510 17 96 to 425096 Default value 10096 Set on run YES Modbus address 40104 Modbus range G10 1 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the maximum speed limit 1 that the drive can apply to the motor It is set in of motor rated speed Note Commands to operate out of these limits are restricted to those limits See figure 10 41 G10 3 MINIMUM SPEED LIMIT 2 Screen 3 MIN2 SP 100 Extended info SPEED MIN LIMIT2 Description Minimum speed limit 2 Range 250 to G1
119. 0480 Read Write YES Description It allows user to set the speed value assigned to Multi reference 1 See parameter G14 1 gt Multi reference 1 for additional data SV5 4 MULTI REFERENCE 2 Screen Mref2 20 0 Units motor speed Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Description 40053 250 20480 to 250 20480 YES It allows user to set the speed value assigned to Multi reference 2 See parameter G14 2 gt Multi reference 2 for additional data VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 53 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS SV5 5 MULTI REFERENCE 3 Screen Mref3 30 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 40054 Modbus range 250 20480 to 250 20480 Read Write YES Description It allows user to set the speed value assigned to Multi reference 3 See parameter G14 3 gt Multi reference 3 for additional data SV5 6 MULTI REFERENCE 4 Screen Mref4 40 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 40055 Modbus range 250 20480 to 250 20480 Read Write YES Description It allows user to set the speed value assigned to Multi reference 4 See parameter G14 4 gt Multi reference 4 for additional data SV5 7 MULTI REFERENCE 5 Screen Mref5 50 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 40056 Modbus range 250 20480 to 250 20480 Read Write YES Description It allows user to set the speed value assigned to Multi reference 5 See parameter G14 5 gt Multi refere
120. 0823 Low range selection of Analogue Output 1 250 to 250 R 40345 G8 2 4 250 to 250 35 20480 to 250 40346 68 2 5 OFF 0 0 20 05 0 to 200 40347 G8 2 6 Mode selection for Analogue Output 2 00 27 See G8 2 1 0 to 27 40348 6827 Format selection for Analogue Output 2 010V ad 0103 101 0 20 4 20 40349 6828 Low range selection of Analogue Output 2 250 to 250 2 2 40350 6829 High range selection of Analogue Output 2 250 to 250 ESQ 000490 812305 20480 40351 G8 2 10 Filter selection for Analogue Output 2 OFF 0 0 20 0s 0 to 200 MODBUS COMMUNICATION 303 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Address Screen Description Range Modbus Range 40362 G8 1 1 Selection of Relay 1 control source 00 ALWAYS OFF 01 ALWAYS ON 02 NO FAULTS 03 GENERAL FAULT 06 READY 07 ZERO SPEED 08 SET SPEED 09 SP DIRECTION 10 RESERVE 11 SP REF DIRECT 12 RESERVE 13 SP LIMIT 14 CURR LIMIT 15 VOLT LIMIT 16 TORQ LIMIT 17 COMPARATOR 1 18 COMPARATOR2 19 COMPARATOR3 20 ACC DEC 2 21 REFERENCE 2 23 SP LIMIT 2 24 DC BRAKE 25 RESERVE 26 RESERVE 27 RESERVE 29 JOCKEY PUMP 30 PRIMING PUMP 31 SLEEP CONDIT 32 CRANE BRAKE 0 04 650 sec 0 01 650 sec 0 04 650 sec 0 01 650 sec 304 MODBUS COMMUNICATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Address Screen Description Rane 40398 C59 Ramp 2
121. 1 0019 Figure 9 1 Visualization Lines Description 42 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 9 1 Parameters SV 1 Motor Visualization SV1 1 SPEED REFERENCE Screen Sp Ref 000 Units motor speed Modbus address 40162 Modbus range 8192 100 of motor rated speed Read Write Read Only Description It shows the present reference value of speed which is applied to the motor SV1 2 MOTOR SPEED Screen Mtr Speed 0 Units rpm Modbus address 40169 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value Read Write Read Only Description It shows the motor speed in revs per minute SV1 3 MOTOR FREQUENCY Screen Mtr Freq 0 0Hz Units Hz Modbus address 40167 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value Read Write Read Only Description It shows the operating frequency of the motor SV1 4 MOTOR VOLTAGE Screen Mtr Vout 0 Units V Modbus address 40166 Modbus address Real Value Modbus Value Read Write Read Only Description It shows the present voltage applied to the motor SV1 5 MOTOR CURRENT Screen Mtr lout 0 0A Units A Modbus address 40163 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the present current flowing to the motor VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 43 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS SV1 6 MOTOR TORQUE Screen Mtr Torqe 0 0 Units motor torque Modbus address 40164 Modbus r
122. 1 bid qr T ende 65 3 gt Acceleration ramp 2 1 65 4 gt Deceleration ramp 2 65 5 gt Speed for acceleration ramp change 65 6 gt Speed for deceleration ramp change Acceleration 1 area Acceleration 2 area Reference speed Deceleration 1 area Deceleration 2 area SD70ITCCO0004AI Figure 10 22 Main and alternative acceleration deceleration ramps N 65 2 e reps 65 1 gt Acceleration ramp 1 59 8 65 3 NS 65 2 gt Deceleration ramp 1 10958 65 3 D Acceleration ramp 2 2598 m 65 4 gt Deceleration ramp 2 30 5 654 65 5 gt Speed accel ramp change 25 5 j ee 65 6 gt Speed for decel ramp change 60 s TIME s 50701 0005 Figure 10 23 Application example of and alternative acceleration deceleration ramps DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 117 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G5 7 RAMP 1 OF REFERENCE INCREASE FOR MOTORIZED POTENTIOMETER Screen 7 MPT INC1 1 0 s Extended info MOTO POT INC1 Description Ramp 1 of reference increase for motorized potentiometer function Range 0 01 650 5 Default value 1 0 5 Set on run YES Modbus address 40400 Modbus range 10 to 65000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the ramp 1 of reference increase for motorized potentiometer function This function is configured in G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration with the option 4 g
123. 1 2 2 Modbus Function Code N 16 Registers Writing This function code allows the Modbus controller master to write the content of the data registers indicated in the drive slave whenever those registers are not of Read only Registers writing by the master does not impede the later modification of those registers by the slave The implementation of this function code in the drive allows writing up to 5 registers of the drive in a single frame Next a frame is shown where the master tries to write the content of 1 register that stores the acceleration time The information that should be attached in the ask frame is the following one Data address of the slave Modbus function code 16 Registers writing Starting Data Address Registers number for writing Bytes number for writing Content of registers for writing CRC 16 code The answer of the slaves includes Data address of the slave Modbus function code 16 Registers writing Starting Data Address Written registers number CRC 16 code 294 MODBUS COMMUNICATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 11 3 Addressing Modes 11 3 1 Broadcast Addressing Mode Broadcast addressing mode allows the master to access at the same time to all of the slaves connected to the Modbus network The Modbus function code that admits this global addressing mode is Function Description 16 Registers Writing In order to access to all of the
124. 10 4 Maximum speed limit 2 Min speed 2 to 250 G10 3 to 250 20480 40106 G10 5 Current limit 0 25 to 1 50 In 2048 to 12288 40107 Torque limit 250 to 250 40108 610 11 To enable speed inversion N No Y Yes 40109 G10 7 Alternative current limit N No Y Yes 40110 G10 8 Change speed for l max2 OFF 0 1 to 250 0 to 20480 40122 634 Reference source 1 of speed NON 40123 632 Reference source 2 of speed 633 250 20480 to 250 40124 SV5 1 Local speed reference 250 to 250 20480 z 40132 G161 Skip frequency 1 250 to 250 20490 101290 5 40133 0162 Skip frequency 2 250 to 250 a RSE 40134 G16 3 Skip bandwidth OFF 0 20 0 to 1638 40142 66 1 Source selection for introducing reference signal 006 AM RESERV MREF LOCAL locPID 40143 66 3 Selection of feedback signal source NONE 0 to 3 ctc S 2 RESERV 6101 610 3 6102 0104 610 11 G107 G108 298 MODBUS COMMUNICATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Address Screen Description Range Modbus Range 40144 Proportional gain of PID control 0 1 20 1to 200 40145 Integration time of PID control 0 0 1000s 0 to 10000 10001 Derivation time of PID control 0 0 250s 0 to 2500 40147 PID output inversion N No Y Yes pe 40148 PID control error Read only 40149 40159 40160 40161
125. 17 LW Vdc DC Bus voltage is lower than critical operating level 350Vdc FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 313 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS DISPLAY DESCRIPTION F18 IMB V OUT Voltage imbalance of more than 5 of the average drive output average voltage for a time higher than 100ms F19 IMB I OUT Current imbalance of more than 25 of the average output motor current for a time higher than 1s F20 GROUND FLT Current level to the ground has exceeded the level set in G11 3 GND I LIMT F21 ILIM T O Motor current has exceeded the current limit set in G10 5 LIMIT for the time set in G10 6 LIM TO F22 TQ LIM T O has exceeded the torque limit set parameter G10 7 MAX TOR for the time set in G10 8 T LIMT F25 MTR Motor overload calculated by SD700 thermal model has exceeded 110 F27 DL SMTH DC Bus has not charged in the expected time F28 MICRO FLT Microprocessor has detected wrong data F29 DSP FLT DSP has detected wrong data F30 WATCHDOG An unknown fault has reset the microprocessor of the control board F31 SCR L1 Trip on conduction status of thyristor 1 The thyristor has not turned on correctly F32 SCR L2 Trip on conduction status of thyristor 2 The thyristor has not turned on correctly F33 SCR L3 Trip on conduction status of thyristor 3 The thyristor has not turned on correctly F34 IGBT TEMP IGBT internal temperature h
126. 2 10 Frequency V Hz change G19 2 11 gt Stabilize factor in acceleration and G19 2 12 gt Stabilize factor in deceleration has not been enough to reduce the instability of the system then in case of fault F2 V LIM FLT is produced decrease the value of this parameter until the fault disappears The optimum result will be obtained when this parameter is used together with the previous parameters G19 2 10 G19 2 11 y G19 2 12 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 215 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 18 3 Subgroup 19 3 19 3 Motor Model G19 3 1 STATOR RESISTANCE Screen 1 STATOR 0 9 Extended info STATOR RESISTOR Description Stator resistance Rs Range 0 0 9 996 Default value 0 9 Set on run YES Modbus address 40482 Modbus range 0 to 811 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the stator resistance This parameter is used to compensate for motor voltage drop It is very important for applications with large torque transients especially at low speed If the resistance value is very low then the motor torque produced at the starting will be reduced When this value is increased then the torque boost will be increased The value of the stator resistance is set as of motor rated impedance Consider the following table for approximate Rs values according to the motor power ratings Power kW Rs value 6 75 1 5 2 150 1 1 5 300 0 6 12 450
127. 2 N No Y Yes 40270 64 2 15 Zero band filter for Analogue Input 1 OFF 0 0 2 0 0 to 163 40271 64 3 15 Zero band filter for Analogue Input 2 0 0 2 096 010 163 300 MODBUS COMMUNICATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Address Screen Description 7 Range ModbusRange 40272 6422 Selection of sensor 1 units Selection of sensor 2 units 18 m s lim m m m h m s m m m h kPa Psi M C K 18 lim m m l h 3 m s m h Bar kPa Psi m oC K 40274 04 2 16 Low Pass filter for Analogue Input 1 OFF 0 0 20 0 0 to 200 40274 gue Inp 40275 64 3 16 Low Pass filter for Analogue Input 2 OFF 0 0 20 0 40282 Motor rated current 0 to 200 1 9999A limited from 0 2 1 5 In 1638 to 12288 40283 Motor rated voltage 220 999V 220 to 999 40284 Motor rated frequency 0 100Hz 40285 Motor rated power 0 100Hz 00100 0 0 6500kW 0 to 65000 40287 Motor cooling at zero speed OFF 20 100 8274 1638 to 8192 40288 0 to 0 99 0 to 99 40286 0 24000 rpm 0 to 24000 40290 G11 12 Filter for pump overload OFF 0 1 to 5s 0 to 50 40291 611 13 Trip delay time because of pump overload OFF 0 0 999 95 0 to 9999 00 NONE 40289 611 11 Pump overload level 0 0 3200A 0 to 32000 40302 69 1 1 Source selection for Comparator 1 01 SPEED MOTOR 02 CURRENT MOTOR 03 VOLTAGE MOTOR OTOR 06 PF MOTOR 07 TEMP MO
128. 205 510120 40574 C424 Reset time for the counter of Auto Reset 1 60min 11060 attempts 40575 612 5 Selection of fault 1 to be reset 0 0 NO AUTO RESET 0 to 25 1 ALL OF THE FLTS 2 11 VINLOSS 3 13 HI V IN 4 14 LW V IN 5 18 IMB V OUT 6 19 IMB OUT 7 20 GROUND FLT 8 21 ILIM T O 9 22 TQ LIM T O 10 27 DL SMTH 11 40 EXT PTC 12 41COMMS TRIP 13 42 AIN1 LOSS 14 43 AIN2 LOSS 15 47 COMMS T O 16 49 SPD LIMIT 17 65 LOW PRESSURE 18 66 HI PRESSURE 19 67 LOW WATER 20 31 SCR L1 21 32 SCR L2 22 33 SCR L3 23 68 CAVIT UNDERL 24 69 FLOW SWITCH 25 70 IRRIGATOR F 40576 612 6 Selection of fault 2 to be reset 00 25 See G12 5 0 to 25 40577 612 7 Selection of fault 3 to be reset 00 25 See G12 5 01025 40578 612 8 Selection of fault 4 to be reset 00 25 See G12 5 0 to 25 40581 044 1 Sensor units of Pulse Input Speed for disconnecting relay option Crane 306 MODBUS COMMUNICATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Address Screen Description Range ModbusRange Drive status during pump control First field of the visualization screen SV8 21 42002 SV86 42003 5 8 3 42004 5 8 3 Status of fixed pumps 1 2 and 3 Pump 2 42005 5 8 3 Status of fixed pumps 1 2 and 3 Pump 3 Drive status during pump control 42006 SV8 2 PID Reference Second field of the visualization screen Values of PID reference and feedback
129. 25 4 14 Delay time to stop fixed pump 1 the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to G25 4 15 Delay time to stop fixed pump 2 Male os the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to G25 4 16 Delay time to stop fixed pump 3 Mi S 2 the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to 70 0 gt It sets the speed below which the drive must remain to G25 4 19 Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump stop one fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is local setpoint 1 adjusted in G25 1 5 625 Pump Control 525 9 Fixed Pumps Control Y YES lf setting is set to NO Relay 1 will be free for user configuration If set to YES Relay 1 will be pre defined as fixed speed pump 1 Y YES lf setting is set to NO Relay 2 will be free for user configuration If set to YES Relay 2 will be pre defined as fixed Speed pump 2 Y YES lf setting is set to NO Relay 3 will be free for user 99 To enable Res pump associa configuration If set to YES Relay 3 will be pre defined as fixed to Relay 3 Speed pump 3 G25 9 4 To enable fixed pump alternation 1 gt Cycle The pump that starts will be the next pump in mode sequence to the last pump stopped 0 79 2 Eg e e Delay time to start fixed pump 1 Delay time to start fixed pump 2 G25 4 1 Delay time before activating sleep mode G25 4 2 Sleep speed for local setpoint 1 G25 4 13 Maximum PID err
130. 29 ee for the maximum range of Analogue Input G4 to 250 G4 2 8 to 250 20480 40243 Speed for the maximum range of Analogue Input to 250 G4 3 8 to 250 20480 2 40244 64 2 6 Maximum range of Analogue Input 1 64 2 4 to 10V 64 2 4 to 10000 G4 2 4 to 20mA G4 2 4 to 20000 40245 64 3 6 Maximum range of Analogue Input 2 64 3 4 to 10V 64 3 4 to 10000 G4 3 4 to 20mA G4 3 4 to 20000 40246 0428 Speed forthe minimum range of Analogue Input 259 ip 6428 250 20480 to G4 2 9 40247 4 3 g Speed for the minimum range of Analogue Input 250 to 64 3 9 250 20480 to G4 3 9 40248 G4 2 4 Minimum range of Analogue Input 1 10V to G4 2 6 10 1000 to G4 2 6 to G4 2 6 0 0 to 64 2 6 40249 G4 3 4 Minimum range of Analogue Input 2 10V to 64 56 10 1000 0 G4 2 6 to 64 3 0 0to 64 2 6 Maximum range of sensor 1 Maximum range of sensor 2 Minimum range of sensor 1 Minimum range of sensor 2 40262 SV3 3 Value of the sensor 1 associated to AI1 Read only Real Value M db s Value 10 40263 SV3 6 Value of the sensor 2 associated to AI2 Read only M db s 40264 06423 Analogue Input 1 format 40265 0433 Analogue Input 2 format 40268 642 1 To enable sensor of Analogue Input 1 N No Y Yes 40266 G4 2 14 Protection for Analogue Input 1 loss N No Y Yes 40267 G4 3 14 Protection for Analogue Input 2 loss N No Y Yes 40269 6431 To enable sensor of Analogue Input
131. 3 G8 2 4 200 4440rpm 2009 8 68 2 2 gt Format selection for analogue output 1 wo 3000rpm 0 1500 3000 68 2 3 gt Low range selection of analogue output 1 E G8 2 4 gt High range selection of analogue output 1 ov 2 6V 2 10V G8 2 2 SD70ITCCO0012AI Figure 10 33 Example 1 Analogue Output 1 with format 0 10V 150 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Example 2 Like previous example now the same motor is rotating at 1440rpm inverse direction rotation with a range from 3000rpm to 3000rpm and 1500rpm as rated speed Analogue Output 1 will be configured as 10V output Set mode of Analogue Output 1 in G8 2 1 to 01 SPEED MOTOR motor speed Select format for Analogue Output 1 in G8 2 2 to 10V Set minimum and maximum values high range and low range of the Analogue Output 1 scale in parameters G8 2 3 for low range and G8 2 4 for high range G8 2 3 gt 2009 since 3000rpm is 200 of the motor rated speed 1500rpm G8 2 4 gt 200 since 3000rpm is 200 of the motor rated speed 1500rpm Then 10 10 S 1440 0 4 8V 3000 3000 With this setting the value of Analogue Output 1 will be 4 8V when motor rotates in inverse direction at 1440rpm G8 2 3 G8 2 4 200 4440rpm 200 8 68 2 2 gt Format selection for analogue output 1 3000rpm T 0 1500 3000rpm 68 2 3 gt Low ran
132. 398 Modbus range 10 to 65000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the ramp 2 of reference increase for motorized potentiometer function This function is configured G4 1 4 Selection of digital inputs configuration with the option 4 gt MOTORIZED POT or 5 9 ERASAB POT Additionally it is necessary to set G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed or 53 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with the option PMOT depending on the selected source is 1 or 2 With this function user can introduce the speed reference by means of two push buttons connected to the digital inputs DI5 up or increase the speed reference and DI6 down or decrease the speed reference While we press Up push button we can increase the speed by applying up to two different ramps previously set ramps 1 and 2 of reference increase The ramp change is set in parameter 55 11 Speed for ramp change with motorized potentiometer The drive will apply the ramp 1 until the speed exceeds the value set in G5 11 From that moment on drive will start to apply the ramp 2 If G5 11 is set to OFF any ramp change will not be done and the drive will search the reference speed by only applying the ramp 1 for reference increase of motorized potentiometer set in this parameter Setting is realized in acceleration units increase in of speed per second See figure 10 24 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 119 SDRIVE 700
133. 4 Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range 0 to 20 min G4 3 4 20mA YES 40245 10000 to 10000 G4 3 4 20000 min G4 3 4 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the maximum voltage or current value for the Analogue Input 2 according to the characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected 04 3 7 MAXIMUM RANGE SENSOR 2 Screen 7 Sma2 10 0Bar Extended info SENS2 HIGH RANGE Description Maximum range of sensor 2 Range 3200 to 3200 Engineering units min G4 3 5 Default value 10 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 40251 Modbus range 3200 to 3200 min G4 3 5 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the maximum units value of the sensor connected to the Analogue Input 2 This value should also correspond to the maximum voltage or current level of the sensor set in G4 3 6 gt Maximum range of Analogue Input 2 Note The setting of this parameter should be checked if the sensor units are changed in parameter G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units It is necessary to set this value to operate in open loop and closed loop Note This parameter will be only available if G4 3 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 2 is set to Y G4 3 8 SPEED FOR THE MINIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen 8 SPD LO2 0 Extended info SPD LO RNG AIN2 Description Speed corresponding to the minimum range of the Analogue Input 2 Range 250 to 2
134. 4 MULTI REFERENCES The three remaining inputs DI1 to DI3 can be programmed individually in the parameters G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 7 Multi function Digital Input 3 configuration Note To configure this mode as well as selecting this option it is necessary to realize one of the settings described below 1 Choice of the multi references as speed references We should set the parameter G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed and or G3 2 Reference source 2 of speed with option MREP 2 Choice of the multi references as PID references First we should enable the PID regulator 53 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed and or 53 2 Reference source 2 of speed option PID and next select option MREF in parameter G6 1 gt Source selection for introducing reference signal 4 MOTORIZED It allows setting the speed reference by two push buttons connected to digital inputs DI5 Up it increases the speed reference Contact NO DI6 Down it decreases the speed reference Contact NC The reference limits will be the speed limits of the equipment that are set in group G10 LIMITS While Up push button is pressed the speed increase can be set according to a double ramp in group 65 ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION RAMPS In case of decreasing the speed occurs the same thing this is that decrease can be set in the same way
135. 4 3 14 PROTECTION FOR ANALOGUE INPUT 2 LOSS Screen 14 AIN2 LOSS Description Protection for the Analogue Input 2 loss Range N See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Modbus address 40267 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows user to decide about the behaviour of the equipment when the signal connected to the Analogue Input 2 is lost Options N gt NO Disabled function Drive does not realize any action in case of the analogue input signal is lost Y gt YES Drive will stop generating the fault F43 AIN2 LOSS since the sensor will be considered damaged when a sharp drop down to zero value in the level of the analogue input signal is detected DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 111 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G4 3 15 ZERO BAND FILTER FOR ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen 152 7 BAND OFF Extended info AIN2 ZERO BAND Description Zero band filter for the Analogue Input 2 Range OFF 0 0 2 0 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40271 Modbus range 0 to 163 Read Write YES Function Setting a value in this parameter we obtain a filtering of the Analogue Input 2 signal eliminating a possible electrical noise associated to the signal that impedes reading a zero value when it must be read The aim of this parameter is supplying a pre defined zero area for controls by analogue inputs especially for speed control It eliminates smal
136. 40162 40163 40164 40165 40168 40170 40171 40173 40176 40177 40178 40179 40180 40181 40182 401 83 4018 4018 4 5 6 1 401 401 8 87 40190 401 9 40192 40193 40194 40195 G6 2 SV52 PID local reference SV 23 Frequency of the input voltage to the drive Frequency of the input voltage to the drive Frequency of the input voltage to the drive Speed reference Motor current Motor torque Motor power consumption Motor voltage Motor frequency Motor power factor Motor speed STATUS Motor speed LINE Third field of the first display line SV 23 SV 23 5 1 5 1 1 5 6 5 1 5 1 ceo lt x 5 1 5 24 Voltage applied to the drive Motor temperature 7 2 5 2 5 IGBT temperature 9 9 1 Current consumption per phase of the motor Phase U Current consumption per phase of the motor 9 Current consumption per phase of the motor Phase W SV1 10 UV 4 Voltage app V1 10 VW Voltage 511 10 UW SV2 1 Voltage app SV2 1 Voltage app SV2 1 Voltage applied to the drive Phases RT SV3 1 Average value of the Analogue Input 1 SV3 4 Average value of the Analogue Input 2 5 3 2 Reference value of the Analogue Input 1 SV3 5 Reference value of the Analogue Input 2 SV3 7 Analogue Output 1 value SV3 9 Analogue Output 2 value SV3 8 Value of the magnitude associated to AO1 SV3 10 Value of the magnitude asso
137. 425V for 400V 586 621V for 690V Default value 360V for 400V 600V for 690V Set on run YES Modbus address 40457 Modbus range 3230 4250 for 400V 5860 6210 for 690V Read Write YES Function It allows setting a minimum level of input voltage Drive will trip it turns off the output to the motor because of fault F14 LW V IN when average voltage measured at the input of the equipment is lower than the value set in this parameter during the time adjusted G11 5 gt Trip time because of low input voltage Note Protection from low input voltage is a combination of this parameter and G11 5 gt Trip time because of low input voltage Note In case of the drive is powered with an input voltage of 690V the default value of this parameter will be 600V and the range will be 586 621V G11 5 TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF LOW INPUT VOLTAGE Screen 5 LOW V TO 5s Extended info LO INP VOL TIMEO Description Trip time because of low input voltage Range 0 0 60s OFF Default value 5s Set on run YES Modbus address 40458 Modbus range 0 to 600 610 Read Write YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 179 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function G11 6 Note Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function G11 7 Note Note Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on ru
138. 47 52 C Terrasa 13 Bajo 25005 LLEIDA Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 973 725 952 Avda Rey Juan Carlos 84 22 15 28916 LEGANES MADRID Tel 34 91 688 36 OO Fax 34 91 687 53 84 Leonardo da Vinci 24 26 Parque Tecnol gico Paterna 46980 PATERNA VALENCIA Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 34 96 131 82 01 Avda Alcora 162 12006 CASTELL N Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 34 96 131 82 01 Pol Residencial Santa Ana Avda Venecia 17 30319 CARTAGENA MURCIA Tel 34 968 53 51 94 Fax 34 968 126 623 Parq Tecnol gico Vizcaya Edificio 103 Planta 1 48170 ZAMUDIO VIZCAYA Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 34 944 31 79 08 C Averroes 6 Edificio Eurosevilla 41020 SEVILLA Tel 34 95 426 01 43 Fax 34 95 451 57 73 C Valle Incl n 9 35200 TELDE LAS PALMAS Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 34 92 869 29 52 INTERNATIONAL BRANCHES GERMANY KOREA CHINA Power Electronics Deutschland GmbH Conradtystrasse 41 D 902441 N RNBERG Tel 49 911 99 43 99 O Fax 49 911 99 43 99 8 Power Electronics Asia HQ Co Room 305 SK Hub Primo Building 953 1 Dokok dong Gangnam gu SEOUL 135 270 KOREA Tel 82 2 3462 4656 Fax 82 2 3462 4657 Power Electronics Guangzhou Room 3608 IVEX CITIC Plaza Building 233 TianHe North Road 510613 Guangzhou Guangdong P R CHINA Tel 86 20 87 520 092 Fax 86 20 38 773 559 22 POWER ELECTRONICS A
139. 50 max G4 3 9 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40247 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 max G4 3 9 Read Write YES 110 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function If the Analogue Input 2 is used for introducing the speed reference setting of parameter G4 3 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 2 to N we can set in this parameter the value of this reference corresponding to the minimum voltage or current level set in parameter G4 3 4 gt Minimum range of Analogue Input 2 The value set here is a percentage of the motor rated speed 52 4 Motor rpm See figure 10 20 G4 3 9 SPEED FOR THE MAXIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen 9 SPD HI2 100 Extended info SPD HIG RNG AIN2 Description Speed corresponding to the maximum range of the Analogue Input 2 Range 250 to 250 min G4 3 8 Default value 100 Set on run YES Modbus address 40243 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 min G4 3 8 Read Write YES Function If the Analogue Input 1 is used for introducing the speed reference setting of parameter G4 3 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 2 to N we can set in this parameter the value of this reference corresponding to the maximum voltage or current level set in parameter G4 3 6 Maximum range of Analogue Input 2 The value set here is a percentage of the motor rated speed 52 4 Motor rpm See figure 10 20 G
140. 6x 5070170 6x CONNECTION TERMINALS 27 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 6 1 4 Frame 6 Connections BASE SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS BACK SIDE VIEW POWER CONNECTIONS 393 3 387 2 eos 225 SD70DTD0007AI Figure 6 4 Power connections location for 5070330 5x 5070460 6x SD70210 6x 5070320 6x 6 1 5 Frame 7 Connections 392 2 lags d 208 5 331 25 BASE SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS SIDE VIEW POWER CONNECTIONS e VDC 1 10 A M i 992 2 215 5 50700 00008 Figure 6 5 Power connections location for 5070580 5 5070720 5x 5070385 6x 5070460 6x 28 CONNECTION TERMINALS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 6 1 6 Frame 8 Connections SIDE VIEW SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS L1 L3 voc 50700 00017 Figure 6 6 Power connections location for 5070840 5 5070925 5x 5070550 6x 5070660 6x 6 1 7 Frame 9 Connections 70 2 ees 5 50700 00018 1 Figure 6 7 Power connections location for 5071030 5x 5071440 5x 5070750 6x 5070950 6x CONNECTION TERMINALS 29 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 6 1 8 Frame 10 Connections BASE SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS FRONT VIEW CONNECTIONS FOR 11 L2 L3 50700 00019 Figure 6 8 Power connections location
141. 6x x xx 1712 1667 1132 1097 529 460 1602 1208 5 230 5 81 5 470 SD70720 5x x xx 1712 1667 1132 1097 529 460 1602 1208 5 230 5 81 5 470 Figure 5 4 Dimensions of Frame 6 D1 Figure 5 5 Dimensions of Frame 7 50700 00003 SD70DTD0004CE DIMENSIONS 21 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 5 3 Dimensions of Frames 8 and 9 REFERENCE REFERENCE DIMENSIONS EET 380 500V 550 690V H1 H2 wi W2 W3 D1 D2 Y1 Y2 4 5070840 5x x 5070550 1712 1667 1482 1447 528 460 1619 1209 2475 815 5070925 5 5070660 1712 1667 1482 1447 528 460 1619 1209 2475 815 5071030 5x x xx SD707506xxxx 1712 1667 2352 147 38 528 460 1619 1209 2475 815 5071150 5x 5070840 1712 1667 2352 147 38 528 460 1619 1209 2475 815 5071260 5x x xx SD709506xxxx 1712 1667 2352 TAT 38 528 460 1619 1209 2475 815 SD71440 5x x xx 1712 1667 2352 147 38 528 460 1619 1209 2475 815 SD70DTD0012BE Figure 5 7 Dimensions of Frame 9 Y1 y SD70DTD00013BE 22 DIMENSIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 5 4 Dimensions of Frames 10 and 11 REFERENCE REFERENCE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT 380 500V 550 690V H1 H2 W1 W2 w3 D1 D2 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 SD71580 5x x xx SD71140 6x x xx 1712 1667 3402 1097 38 528 460 1619 1209
142. 7 11 06 2007 18 10 2007 Revision A B C Description Software updating 2 to Software version SW Ver 1 3 Chapter 12 MODBUS Communication Update of chapters 8 9 10 Modbus addresses Dimensions and connections for Frame 3 Update of chapters 11 12 Updated software version SW 1 3 08 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 INDEX SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS eerie ee tenete Lee Errare Eae cut ece rine 7 Me CINTRODUC TION ec 11 1 1 Designation Code rrr rt RR RACE ERE ERES 11 12 nee eite rer ea eee sie 12 2 INSTALLATION AND 13 2 1 Basic Configuration 13 2 2 Environmental 14 2 3 Drive Mounting zer e re le 14 2 4 Power Connection and Control 0 14 3 52222252 2 s naa e EI Leer rei 16 3 1 40 e ea apice ped D HERR RE lente denas 16 3 2 Power Range 690 17 4 TECHNICAL 5 5 18 MEM Bue rcm 20 5 1 Dimensions of Frames 4 5 nennen
143. 7 8 1 910 015 lt 64 2 5 to 3200 Ud Ingenier 654 2 8 8 SPD LO1 0 lt 250 to 250 G4 2 9 9 SPD 1 100 lt gt 250 to 250 G4 2 14 14 AINT LOSS N S Y Yes G4 2 15 15 1 2 BAND OFF lt OFF 0 0 0 1 2 0 G4 2 16 16 FILTER1 OFF lt OFF 0 0 0 1 20 0 4 3 Analogue Input 2 64 3 1 11 SENSOR 2 lt gt N No Y Yes G4 3 2 2 SENSOR 2 ess 64 3 6 6 INmax2 20mA gt 64 37 17 Sma2 10 0Bar S 642510 3200 Engineer Units SE lt gt SD70ITGOOS6BI Figure 10 4 Parameters structure from subgroup S4 2 G4 to subgroup S4 3 G4 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 67 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G4 3 14 14 AIN2 LOSS N S NzNo YzYes 64 3 15 152 2 BAND OFF OFF 0 0 0 1 2 0 G4 3 16 16 FILTER2 OFF OFF 0 0 0 1 20 0 0632760 Fiw Unis 644 313 10001 5 lt 0 to 32760 Flow Units G5 Accel and Decel Ramps 0 01 650 sec oome open G5 6 6 BRK DEC OFF lt OFF 0 to 250 poem sd Sd sd G6 1 1 SEL REF MREF G6 2 2 PID LOC 0 0 G6 3 3 SEL FBK AI2 SD70ITG0057CI Figure 10 5 Parameters structure from subgroup S4 3 G4 to group G7 68 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G7 Start Stop Mode Configuration 68 Outputs G7 1 1 STOP 1 RAMP 67 2
144. 7 PUMP OVERLOA G11 13 TRIP DELAY TIME BECAUSE OF PUMP OVERLOAD Screen 13 DLY OFF Extended info PMP OVERLOAD DLY Description Trip delay time because of pump overload Range OFF 0 0 999 95 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40291 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time to generate the drive trip because of pump overload The overload protection is a combination of this parameter together with parameters G11 11 gt Pump overload level and G11 12 Filter for pump overload When the output current of the drive is higher than the current set in parameter G11 11 during the time adjusted in this parameter the drive turns off its output generating the fault F57 PUMP OVERLOA We can set the value for a low pass filter to read the current in order to avoid oscillations by means of the parameter G11 12 611 14 TO ENABLE UNDERLOAD PROTECTION Screen 14 UNDERLOAD N Description To enable or disable the underload protection of the pump Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Modbus address 42085 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows the possibility of protecting the pump from underload status N gt NO Underload protection disabled Y gt YES Underload protection enabled DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 183 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS To protect the pum
145. 7 Range ModbusRange 42135 G2585 No dd pressure at the starting of 5 fixed 00 _ 3976 Eng Units 0 to 32760 42136 62591 n enable fixed pump associated to Output Relay v No Yes 42137 02592 n enable fixed pump associated to Output Relay N No Yes 0 to 1 42138 G2593 enable fixed pump associated to Output Relay N No Y Yes foot 9 3 4213 G25 9 6 Alternation mode of fixed pumps LINEAR 002 0 DUTY SHARE 421 625101 Flow reading source 002 E PULSE 41 42142 SV85 Read flow value Read only Real Valte M dbus Value 10 42443 672 30 Maximum allowed flow 0 0 3276 Eng Units 0 to 32760 42144 G25 10 3 Offset percentage over maximum flow 0 to 250 0 to 20480 42145 2 Flow percentage to reset algorithm 0 to 100 010100 42146 G25 10 5 Deceleration during algorithm 0 096 to 250 0 to 20480 42147 G25 10 6 Units of measurement of instantaneous flow 42148 C2594 To enable fixed pump associated to Analogue Output 1 42149 C2595 To enable fixed pump associated to Analogue Output 2 4 G25 1 5 42151 SV5 44 Local setpo 4 G25 1 6 42152 84515 Local setpo 4 G25 1 7 42153 Local setpo 8 9 1 Read only N No Y Yes 0 to 1 No Y Yes 0 to 1 1 for P 0 3276 Eng Units 0 to 32760 2 for P 0 3276 Eng Units 0 to 32760 3 for P 6 4 G25 1 42154 15 17 Local setpoint 4 for P 7 625 1 42155 54518 Local setpoint 5 f
146. 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 9 Group 9 G9 Comparators 10 9 1 Subgroup 9 1 S9 1 Comparator 1 G9 1 1 SOURCE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 1 Screen 1 COMP 1 SEL 00 Description Selection of the source for the Comparator 1 Range 00 22 See Function for additional information Default value 00 Set on run YES Modbus address 40302 Modbus range 0 to 22 Read Write YES Function It allows user to select the source for the Comparator 1 according to the following options 00 NONE There is no source for the comparator 01 gt SPEED MOTOR Comparison signal is motor speed 02 CURRENT MOTOR Motor current signal 03 gt VOLTAGE MOTOR Motor voltage signal 04 POWER MOTOR Motor power signal 05 TORQUE MOTOR Motor torque signal 06 3 PF MOTOR Motor cosine de phi 07 gt TEMP MOTOR Motor temperature signal 08 gt FREQUENCY Drive input frequency 09 gt INPUT VOLTAGE Drive input voltage 10 gt DC BUS DC Bus voltage 11 DRIVE TEMP Drive temperature 12 SPEED REF Speed reference 13 gt Reserved Reserved for future use 14 PID REFERENCE Speed reference in PID mode 154 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 15 gt PID FEEDBACK System feedback signal 16 gt PID ERROR PID error signal difference between reference signal and feedback signal of the sensor 17 9 ANLG INPUT 1 Signal connected to Analogue Input 1 18
147. AMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G9 1 4 Screen LIMIT 2 FOR COMPARATOR 1 IN WINDOW MODE Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function G9 1 5 Screen Note 4 LIM 2 C1 100 C1 WINDOW LIMIT2 Limit 2 of the Comparator 1 in window mode 250 to 250 100 5 40305 20480 to 20480 YES It allows defining one of the limits to activate Comparator 1 in window mode Output of Comparator 1 will be activated when source signal of Comparator 1 selected in G9 1 1 is within the limit 1 set in G9 1 5 and the limit 2 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 1 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 1 is set to window mode parameter G9 1 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 1 set to 1 Window LIMIT 1 FOR COMPARATOR 1 IN WINDOW MODE Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function Note 5 LIM 1 C1 0 C1 WINDOW LIMIT1 Limit 1 of the Comparator 1 in window mode 250 to 250 0 YES 40304 20480 to 20480 YES It allows defining one of the limits to activate Comparator 1 in window mode Output of Comparator 1 will be activated
148. AND FILTER FOR ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen 151 7 BAND OFF Extended info AIN1 ZERO BAND Description Zero band filter for the Analogue Input 1 Range OFF 0 0 2 0 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40270 Modbus range 0 to 163 Read Write YES Function Setting a value in this parameter we obtain a filtering of the Analogue Input 1 signal eliminating a possible electrical noise associated to the signal that impedes reading a zero value when it must be read The aim of this parameter is supplying a pre defined zero area for controls by analogue inputs especially for speed control It eliminates small errors in the reference voltage near to zero reference point Note The function of zero band filter is not applied to the reference signals through digital inputs since these settings are absolute zero 106 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G4 29 64 3 9 SPEED G4 2 9 gt Speed for the maximum range of analogue input 1 i ihi G4 3 9 gt Speed for the maximum range of analogue input 2 10 INPUTS 64 2 8 gt Speed for the minimum range of analogue input 1 6428 or G4 3 8 20mA G4 3 8 gt Speed for the minimum range of analogue input 2 SD70ITCC0003AI Figure 10 21 Analogue input of reference with zero band filter G4 2 16 LOW PASS FILTER FOR ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen 16 FILTER1 OFF Extended info AIN1 STABIL FILT Description Low Pass f
149. ATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 11 1 3 Software Communication Protocol Transmission Mode Error Detection Transmission Speed Data length Parity Stop Bit SW Version Address Range X XX Response Time Supported Modbus functions Supported exception codes 11 1 4 RS232 Connections Standard Modbus RTU Remote Terminal Unit CRC 16 Sum Check Selectable by user 600 1200 2400 4800 9600bps 8 data bit optional parity Selectable by user ODD EVEN NONE 1 240 unicast addresses 1 240 1 broadcast address 0 Minimum 3 5 character to 100ms maximum 3 registers reading 16 registers writing 1 gt Illegal function 2 gt Illegal data address 3 2 Illegal data value 6 Busy rejected message 7 negative acknowledgement The following drawing shows a commonly wiring for a RS232 connection SD700 RS Common X1 RS232Rx RS232 Tx l POWER ELECTRONICS MODBUS MASTER The connection of the shield could be realized on the gateway terminals or on the opposite extreme of the cable depending on the installation conditions SD70DTROOOSAI Figure 11 3 RS232 connection MODBUS COMMUNICATION 291 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 11 1 5 5485 Connections The following drawing shows commonly wiring for 5485 connection MODBUS MASTER 42 POWER ELECTRONICS RS Common 42 POWER ELECTRONICS The connection of the
150. Configuration Regarding to the outputs it is useful to take into account some considerations which will help for a correct configuration of the system Digital outputs There are some configuration options for the outputs that are only available if the pump program is operative but they cannot be used in the standard program 28 gt PUMP CNTRL 29 JOCKEY PUMP and 30 3 PRIMING PUMP The needed information has been detailed in the corresponding group G8 1 Digital Outputs Analogue outputs The options available in the standard program can also be used for the pump program and additionally the option 20 gt CURRENT FLOW that can be configured to provide the read flow at any of the analogue output formats o Example 1 for configuring the analogue output as read flow In case the flowmeter data configured in G4 4 are Units litres Pulses second 1001 5 Maximum Range 1000 litres Analogue output setting Format 0 10V Minimum Range 0 Maximum Range 100 For a read flow of 500 litres the analogue output will be R ue 1 1 Readvalue 10V 500 0 MaximumRange 1000 228 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 o Example 2 for configuring the analogue output as read flow If the flowmeter data configured in G4 4 are Units litres Pulses second 1001 5 Maximum Range 1000 litres Analogue output setting Format 4 20mA Minimum Range 0
151. D for additional information 232 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 1 7 LOCAL SETPOINT 3 FOR PID Screen 7 0 0Bar Extended info LOCAL SETPOINT 3 Description Local setpoint 3 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 42153 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 3 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m min l h m h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information G25 1 8 LOCAL SETPOINT 4 FOR PID Screen 8 SETPTA 0 0Bar Extended info LOCAL SETPOINT 4 Description Local setpoint 4 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 42154 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 4 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m min l h m h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information G25 1 9 LOCAL SETPOINT 5 FOR PID Screen 9 5 0 0Bar Extended info LOCAL
152. D FEEDBACK Signal proportional to the feedback PID mode Units 90 16 gt PID ERROR Signal proportional to the error difference between reference signal and feedback signal in PID mode Units 17 gt ANLG INPUT 1 Analogue Input 1 signal is transferred to analogue output Units 18 gt ANLG INPUT 2 Analogue Input 2 signal is transferred to analogue output Units 90 19 INPUT 1 2 Signal proportional to the addition of the two inputs This allows course and fine setting of the signal Units 20 CURRENT FLOW Analogue signal proportional to the read flow through analogue input or pulse input Units 90 21 MAX SCALE It forces the output to the maximum value Units 10096 bottom scale 22 ABSOLUT SPEED Signal proportional to the motor speed without sign absolute value Units Motor speed 27 MACRO PUMP Pump OFF 10V Pump Units Note This option is not directly programmable by user for any of the analogue outputs This option is automatically set for Analogue Input 1 when the user enables the fixed pump 4 in parameter G25 9 4 gt enable fixed pump associated to Analogue Output 17 and it will be automatically set to Analogue Input 2 when the user enables the fixed pump 5 in parameter G25 9 5 gt To enable fixed pump associated to Analogue Output 5 For both outputs the configuration will always be from 0 to 10V where OV indicates that pump is disc
153. D6of 70 0 Extended info FPUMP STP SPEED6 Description Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 6 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 70 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42320 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 6 set in parameter G25 1 10 gt Local setpoint 6 for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 G25 4 25 STOP SPEED 7 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen 25 SPD7of 70 0 Extended info FPUMP STP SPEED7 Description Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 7 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 70 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42321 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 7 set in parameter G25 1 11 gt Local setpoint 7 for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop
154. DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 87 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G2 7 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function MOTOR COOLING AT ZERO SPEED 7 MTR COOL 40 6 MOTOR COOLING Motor cooling at zero speed OFF 20 100 4096 YES 40287 8274 1638 to 8192 YES It calibrates the drive with the characteristics of the motor will be controlled It provides information for the protection of the motor thermal model The following settings can be taken as reference Submersible pumps gt 20 Self cool motor gt 40 Forced cool motor gt 100 The drive capacity KW should be between 50 and 150 of the motor power The motor must have from 2 to 12 poles If the motor power is in HP convert them in kW by using the next formula _ HP 746 1000 Thermal model is reset when disconnecting the drive power These parameters should be introduced before starting the drive If we introduce illogical values the drive will not operate correctly Introduce the rated parameters of the motor nameplate current voltage frequency power speed rpm and cosine phi When the motor nameplate offers multiple configuration possibilities or the start delta motor configuration of the winding has been modified ensure the correct data is introduced for the appropriate configuration Calculate the motor cooling efficiency at zero speed and intr
155. Default value Set on run Modbus address 42011 m minutes 42014 gt d days Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value Read Write Read Only Function Read only parameter For additional information see chapter 10 20 17 S25 11 Registers G25 11 2 OPERATED TIME BY PUMP 2 Screen 2 P2 0d 0m Description Operated time by pump 2 Range Default value Set on run Modbus address 42012 gt m minutes 42015 gt d days Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value Read Write Read Only Function Read only parameter For additional information see chapter 10 20 17 525 11 Registers G25 11 3 OPERATED TIME BY PUMP 3 Screen 3 P3 0d 0m Description Operated time by pump 3 Range Default value Set on run Modbus address 42013 gt m minutes 42016 d days Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value Read Write Read Only Function Read only parameter For additional information see chapter 10 20 17 525 11 Registers DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 287 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 11 4 OPERATED TIME BY PUMP 4 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 4 P4 0d 0m Operated time by pump 4 42018 gt m minutes 42020 d days Real Value Modbus Value Read Only Read only parameter For additional information see chapter 10 20 17 525 11 Registers G25 11 5 OPERATED T
156. E Description Initial voltage Range 0 0 10096 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40592 Modbus range 0 to 8192 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the initial voltage level to apply to the motor at the moment of starting Using this function it is possible to improve breakaway torque when starting heavy loads This parameter is used in association with parameter G19 2 3 gt Torque boost band Note Set a low value first Increase the value gradually until achieving a proper value to start correctly the installation Do not set values higher than needed ones since this would produce current limitation and unnecessary overstress of the drive and motor DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 211 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G19 2 3 TORQUE BOOST BAND Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 3 BW BOOST 0 0 BOOST BAND Torque boost band 0 0 100 0 0 YES 40593 0 to 8192 YES It allows setting a band or range of frequencies during which torque boost set in G19 2 2 gt Initial voltage will be applied at the moment of starting Using this function itis possible to improve breakaway torque when starting heavy loads This parameter is used in association with previous parameter G19 2 2 G19 2 4 SLIP COMPENSATION Screen 4 SLIP COMPENS Description Slip compensation Range N Y See
157. E FLTS All of the faults can be reset automatically 2 gt 11 VIN LOSS To reset fault F11 input power loss 3 gt 13HIVIN To reset fault F13 high input voltage 4 14 LW V IN To reset fault F14 low input voltage 5 gt 18 IMB V OUT To reset fault F18 output voltage imbalance 188 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 6 gt 19 IMB I OUT To reset fault F19 output current imbalance 20 GROUND FLT To reset fault F20 ground fault 8 21 I LIM T O To reset fault F21 current limit time out 9 gt 22 TQ LIM T O To reset fault F22 torque limit time out 10 gt 27 DL SMTH To reset fault F27 DC Bus charge fault 11 gt 40 EXT PTC To reset fault F40 motor PTC fault 12 gt 41 COMMS TRIP To reset fault F41 fault signal from communication network 13 gt 42 AIN1 LOSS To reset fault F42 Analogue Input 1 signal loss 14 43 AIN2 LOSS To reset fault F43 Analogue Input 2 signal loss 15 gt 47 COMMS T O To reset fault F47 communication time out 16 gt 49 SPD LIMIT To reset fault F49 exceeded speed limit 17 gt 65 LOW PRESSURE To reset fault F65 minimum pressure 18 gt 66 HI PRESSURE To reset fault F66 maximum pressure 19 gt 67 LOW WATER To reset fault F67 low water 20 gt 31 SCR L1 To reset fault F31 fault on phase L1 of rectifier 21 gt 32 SCR L2 To reset fault F32 fault on phase L2 of rectifier 22 gt 33 SCR L3
158. EADY 07 ZERO SPEED 08 SET SPEED 09 SP DIRECTION 10 RESERVE 11 SP REF DIRECT 12 RESERVE 13 5 LIMIT 14 CURR LIMIT 15 VOLT LIMIT 16 TORQ LIMIT 17 COMPARATOR1 18 COMPARATOR2 19 COMPARATOR3 20 ACC DEC 2 21 REFERENCE 2 22 STOP 2 23 SP LIMIT 2 24 DC BRAKE 25 RESERVE 26 RESERVE 27 RESERVE 28 PUMP CNTRL 29 JOCKEY PUMP 30 PRIMING PUMP 31 SLEEP CONDIT 32 CRANE BRAKE G8 1 10 10 T R3 ON 0 0s 2100 9995 G8 1 11 11 T R3 OFF 0 0s S 0 0 9995 G8 1 12 12 INVERT REL3 N N No Y Yes 8 1 13 13 CRAspdOF 5 0 lt 0 0 to 250 58 2 Analogue Outputs G8 2 1 1 ANLG OUT1 01 01 SPEED MOTOR 02 CURRENT MOTOR 03 VOLTAGE MOTOR 04 POWER MOTOR 05 TORQUE MOTOR 06 MOTOR 07 MOTOR 08 FREQUENCY MOTOR 09 INPUT VOLTAGE 10 0 BUS 11 DRIVE TEMP 12 SPEED REF 13 Reserved 14 PID REFERENCE 15 PID FEEDBACK 16 PID ERROR 17 ANLG INPUT 1 18 ANLG INPUT 2 19 ANLG INPUT 1 2 20 CURRENT FLOW 21 SCALE 22 ABSOLUT SPEED 27 MACRO PUMP G8 2 2 2 FORMT 174 20 G8 2 3 3 MIN1 RNG 0 lt 250 to 250 68 2 4 4 MAX1 RNG 100 lt 250 to 250 68 2 5 5 FILTER 1 0FF lt OFF 0 0 to 20 05 SD70ITGO0059BI Figure 10 7 Parameters structure from subgroup S8 1 G8 to subgroup S8 2 G8 70 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 68 2 9 9 2 RNG 100 lt gt 250 to 250 68 2 10 10 FILTER 2 21 OFF 0 0 to 20 05 9 1 Comparator 1
159. ER 333 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS PARAMETERS 11 T R3 OFF 0 0s R3 DEACTIV DELAY 12 INVERT R3 N 13 CRAspdOF 5 0 CRANE BRKoff SPD 1 ANLG OUT 1 01 2 FORMT 124 20 mA 3 MIN1 RNG 0 MIN RANG ANAOUT1 4 MAX1 RNG 100 MAX RANG ANAOUT1 5 FILTER 1 FILTER ANAOUTPU1 6 ANLG OUT 2 02 7 FORMT 2 4 20 mA 8 MIN2 RNG 0 MIN RANG ANAOUT2 9 MAX2 RNG 100 MAX RANG ANAOUT2 10 FILTER 2 OFF FILTER ANAOUTPU2 1 COMP 1 SEL 00 2 COMP 1 TYPE 0 3 SP ON 100 C1 ACTIVAT LEVEL 4 LIM 2 1 100 C1 WINDOW LIMIT2 5 LIM 1 C1 0 C1 WINDOW LIMIT1 6 T C1 ON 0 0s C1 ACTIVAT DELAY 7 SP OF 0 C1 DEACTIV LEVEL 8T C1 0 05 C1 DEACTIV DELAY 9 SEL FUNT 1 00 1 COMP 2 SEL 00 2 COMP 2 TYPE 0 3 SP C2 ON 100 C2 ACTIVAT LEVEL 4 LIM 2 C2 100 C2 WINDOW LIMIT2 5 LIM 1 C2 0 C2 WINDOW LIMIT1 6 T C2 ON 0 0s C2 ACTIVAT DELAY 7 SP C2 OF 0 C2 DEACTIV LEVEL 8T C2 0 05 C2 DEACTIV DELAY 9 SEL FUNT 2 00 FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 0 0s N 5 0 SETTING 2 G8 Outputs 58 2 Analogue Outputs 01 mA 0 100 OFF 02 4 20 0 100 OFF G9 Comparators 59 1 Comparator 1 00 0 100 100 0 0 05 0 0 08 00 09 Comparators 59 2 Comparator 2 00 0 100 100 0 0 08 0
160. ER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 user reset L tu te ta tu ts te ty te FAULT RESET Counter 5 5 Hold fault COUNTER to t t2 te te ts te ti te COUNTER RESET TIME to tn te ots te ots te te tia CASE A CASE B The attempts counter of auto reset will be reset because The attempts counter of auto reset will not be reset because the time elapses before occuring 5 faults the fifth fault occurs before the time for reseting the counter has elapsed G12 3 gt Delay time before auto reset G12 4 gt Reset time of the counter of auto reset attempts SD70ITCCO0020AI Figure 10 42 Example Application of auto reset function for 5 faults G12 3 DELAY TIME BEFORE AUTO RESET Screen 3 R STR DEL 5s Extended info TIME BEFORE RESET Description Delay time before executing auto reset function Range 5 120s Default value 5s Set on run YES Modbus address 40573 Modbus range 5 to 120 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the time elapsed from occurring the fault to the fault is reset See figure 10 42 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 187 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G12 4 RESET TIME FOR COUNTER OF AUTO RESET ATTEMPTS Screen 4 RS COUNT 15min Extended info AUTORESET TIMOUT Description Time to reset the counter of auto reset attempts Range 1 60min Default val
161. ES Function It allows configuring the operation of the Relay 2 See parameter G8 1 1 Selection of Relay 1 control source to obtain information about the configuration options G8 1 6 ON DELAY TIME FOR RELAY 2 Screen 6 T R2 ON 0 05 Extended info R2 ACTIVAT DELAY Description ON delay time for the Relay 2 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40367 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set a delay time before activating the Relay 2 If during this time the activation condition disappears the relay will be not activated G8 1 7 OFF DELAY TIME FOR RELAY 2 Screen 7 T R2 OFF 0 05 Extended info R2 DEACTIV DELAY Description OFF delay time for the Relay 2 Range 0 0 9995 Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40368 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set a delay time before deactivating the Relay 2 If during this time the deactivation condition disappears the relay will be not deactivated this is the relay will follow activated DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 141 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G8 1 8 RELAY 2 INVERSION Screen 8 INVERT REL2 N Description Logic inversion of the Relay 2 Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run NO Modbus address 40369 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows user to invert the logic of the R
162. F 0 999s Default value 10s Set on run YES Modbus address 42082 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a value for the time of speed bypass During this time the drive speed will be forced to the value set in parameter G25 5 1 gt Speed bypass at the starting of fixed pumps to avoid over pressure situations in the system at the starting of a fixed pump See figures 10 47 and 10 48 G25 5 3 SPEED BYPASS AT THE STOPPING OF FIXED PUMPS Screen 3 BY SPof 90 Extended info BYPASS OFF SPEED Description Speed bypass at the stopping of fixed pumps Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 90 Set on run YES Modbus address 42083 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a speed bypass value The drive speed will be forced to the value set in this parameter during the time set in parameter G25 5 4 gt Time of speed bypass after stopping fixed pumps to avoid under pressure situations in the system at the stopping of a fixed pump See figure 10 50 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 263 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 5 4 TIME OF SPEED BYPASS AFTER STOPPING FIXED PUMPS Screen 4 BY T OFF 5s Extended info BYPASS OFF DELAY Description Time of speed bypass after stopping fixed pumps Range OFF 0 999s Default value 5s Set on run YES Modbus address 42084 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a value for the time o
163. F69 FLOW SWITCH 270 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 6 16 HABILITACI N INTERRUPTOR DE NO FLUJO EN EL LLENADO DE TUBER AS Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 16 NO FLO FILL To enable No Flow switch during the pipe filling process N Y See Function for additional information N YES 42352 0 to 1 YES It allows the possibility of enabling or disabling the Flow switch to stop the drive during the pipe filling process according to the setting of the parameter G 25 6 14 gt Response from No Flow situation N 3 NO Protection from No Flow situation is disabled The drive will ignore Flow input during the pipe filling process Y gt YES Protection from No Flow situation is enabled The drive will consider Flow input during the pipe filling process to stop G25 6 17 MINIMUM STOP SPEED BECAUSE OF FLOW DETECTION Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 17 NO FLsp 0 0926 NO FLOW MIN SPED Minimum stop speed because of No Flow detection 0 096 to 250 0 096 YES 42349 0 to 20480 YES It allows setting the minimum stop speed of the drive because of No Flow detection When the motor speed is higher that the speed set in this param
164. G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration be set without taking into consideration the setting on parameter G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration which means a block setting All that means that the user will configure the pump program freely according to his requirements selecting the correct functionality and protections The options for inputs configuration standard program options as well as pump program options have been detailed in the corresponding group 64 1 Digital Inputs 10 20 5 Inputs Configuration Rules It is necessary to have into consideration the following rules for a correct digital input configuration when the Pump Program is active Mutual Exclusion Rule o If the pump program is deactivated the user can only set options from 0 to 23 for the digital inputs which are options for functionalities related to the standard program o If the pump program is active the user can only set options from 50 to 69 for the digital inputs which are options for functionalities related to the pump program System Start Terminal Rule Automatic To ensure the start and the stop of the system the user must first of all configure one of the digital inputs as option 50 gt START STP On the contrary the drive does not allow configuring any other option Once this is done it is possible to configure the resting inputs as necessary respecting always the configuration ru
165. G9 1 1 1 COMP 1 SEL 00 01 SPEED MOTOR 02 CURRENT MOTOR 03 VOLTAGE MOTOR 04 POWER MOTOR 05 TORQUE MOTOR 06 PF MOTOR 07 TEMP MOTOR 08 FREQUENCY MTR 09 VOLTAGE 10 0 BUS 11 DRIVE TEMP 12 SPEED REF 13 Reserved 14 PID REFERENCE 15 PID FEEDBACK 16 PID ERROR 17 ANLG INPUT 1 18 ANLG INPUT 2 19 ANLG INPUT 122 20 Reserved 21 MAX SCALE 22 ABSOLUT SPEED G9 1 2 2 COMP 1 TYPE 0 lt 0 Normal 1 Window G9 1 3 3 SP C1 ON 100 lt 250 to 250 G9 1 4 4 LIM 2 C1 100 lt 250 to 250 G9 1 5 5 LIM 1 C1 0 250 to 250 G3 1 6 6 T C1 ON 0 0s lt 00 9995 G9 1 7 7 SP C1 OF 0 lt 250 to 250 G9 1 8 8 T C1 OF 0 0s 0 0 9999s 69 1 9 9 SEL FUNT 1 00 00 USE 01 5 STOP 02 STOP 1 03 5 2 04 RESET O5 START INCH1 O6 START INCH2 07 5 INCH3 08 SPEED O9 ACC DEC 2 10 REFERENCE 2 11 SPEED LIMIT 2 SD70ITGOO6OAI Figure 10 8 Parameters structure from subgroup S8 2 G8 to subgroup S9 1 subgroup G9 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 71 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 59 2 Comparator 2 69 2 1 1 COMP 2 SEL 00 lt gt 69 2 2 2 COMP 2 0 lt gt lt gt lt gt D lt gt 59 3 3 69 3 1 1 COMP 3 SEL 00 lt gt G9 3 2 2 COMP 3 0 G9 3 3 3 SP ON 100 69 3414 LIM 2 3 100 69 3 7 17 SP
166. Group Control with Eight Pressure Setpoints Note Use screened cables for the control and connect the screen to ground COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 329 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 14 CONFIGURATION REGISTER VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE SD700 SERIAL N MODEL APPLICATION DATE CUSTOMER NOTES To save parameters into the display The SD700 can copy the drive configuration into the display to use at a later stage if necessary This allows the user to test different settings without losing current configuration of the equipment program multiple drives using one display or to keep a copy of the drive configuration for future commissioning requirements To achieve this follow the steps described below Go into subgroup 51 10 To memorize parameters into the display o Set G1 10 1 UPLOAD Y o The display will show UPLOADING 100 Current parameter setting of the drive has been stored into the display To transfer memorized data from display to drive o Set G1 10 2 DOWNLOAD Y o The display will show DOWNLOADING 100 Memorized setting inside the display will be transferred to the drive PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 G1 Options Menu 1 LOCK PARMTRS 0 0 2 PASSWORD_ OFF OFF 3 PSW ERR XXXX XXXX 4 LANG ESPANOL ESPANOL 5 INITIALISE 0 0 6 SHORT Menu NO NO 7 PROG STANDARD STANDARD G1 Options Menu 1 10 Eloader UPLOAD N DOWNLOAD N G1
167. I V 5s HI INP VOL TIMEO Trip time because of high input voltage 0 0 60s OFF 5s YES 40460 0 to 600 610 YES It allows setting a time once elapsed it a trip because of high input voltage will be generated Drive will trip it turns off the output to the motor because of fault F13 HI V IN when average voltage measured at the input of the equipment is higher than the value set in G11 6 gt High input voltage level during the time adjusted in this parameter Protection from high input voltage is a combination of parameter G11 6 gt High input voltage level and this one 180 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G11 8 TRIP DELAY TIME DUE TO OUTPUT VOLTAGE IMBALANCE Screen 8 Dlasy VO 1 0s Extended info VOUT asyTRIP DLY Description Trip delay time due to output voltage imbalance Range 0 0 10s OFF Default value 1 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40463 Modbus range 0 to 100 101 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time before generating the trip when an output voltage imbalance has been detected Once elapsed that time drive will trip because of fault F18 IMB V OUT G11 9 PERFORMANCE IN CASE OF INPUT POWER LOSS Screen 9 LOW V BHV 0 Description Performance of the drive in case of input power loss occurs during operation Range 0 2 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus ad
168. IME BY PUMP 5 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 5 P5 0d 0m Operated time by pump 5 42019 m minutes 42021 gt d days Real Value Modbus Value Read Only Read only parameter For additional information see chapter 10 20 17 525 11 Registers G25 11 6 RESET COUNTERS Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function TIME RESTORE Reset counters N Y See Function for additional information N NO 42017 0 to 1 YES It allows the possibility of resetting the counters of the pumps N 3 NO The counters of the pumps are not reset Y gt YES All of the counters of the pumps will be reset 288 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 11 MODBUS COMMUNICATION 11 1 Technical Specifications 11 1 1 Introduction To guarantee a correct operation of the drive peripheral elements should be selected correctly and should be connected properly A wrong installation and or application could cause a wrong operation of the system or a reduction of the long life of the equipment and its parts may get damaged This manual should be read carefully and understood before proceeding X5 Optic Fiber Communication between drives X6 Dynamic Braking Unit connection X7 Communication busses connection
169. ION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 6 MREF 6 60 0 MULTI REFERENCE6 60 0 7 MREF 7 70 0 MULTI REFERENCE7 70 0 G15 Inch Speeds 1 INCH1 0 00 INCH SPEED 1 0 00 2 INCH2 0 00 INCH SPEED 2 0 00 3 INCH3 0 00 INCH SPEED 3 0 00 G16 Skip Frequencies 1 SKIP 1 0 0 SKIP FREQUENCY 1 0 0 2 SKIP 2 0 0 SKIP FREQUENCY 2 0 0 3 SKIP BAND OFF OFFSET BAND OFF G17 Brake 1T DC BRAKE OFF DC BRAKING TIME OFF 2 DC CURR 0 DC CURRENT LEVEL 096 3 DC VOLTS 0 0 DC BR VOLT LEVEL 0 0 4 HEATING OFF Idc HEATING OFF 5 DYN BRAK N N 6 VDC BRAKE OFF VDC BRAKE START OFF G19 Fine Tuning 19 1 IGBT Control 1 TYPE CRTL V Hz V Hz 2 FRQ 4000 MODULAT FREQUENC 4000 3 PEWAVE Y Y G19 Fine Tuning 19 2 MTR Load 1 MIN FLUX 100 MINIMUM FLUX 100 2 0 0 BOOST VOLTAGE 0 096 3 BW BOOST 0 0 BOOST BAND 0 0 4 SLIP COMPENS N N 5 DAMPING 0 0 0 0 6 TTP BAND 0 0 0 0 71 SLIP 2 0 I SLIP COMPENSAT 2 0 9 STR 0 0 START FREQUENCY 0 0 10 V H BREK OFF FRQ V Hz CHANGE OFF 11 STA F AC OFF STABILIZE F ACC OFF CONFIGURATION REGISTER 337 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 12 STA F DC OFF STABILIZE F DEC OFF 13 CTR Vbusz
170. ISTORY 2 F0 NO FAULT FIFTH FAULT FXX Register 2 of fault history 40433 Read Only 33 34 35 36 37 41 42 44 45 46 47 49 50 52 53 54 56 65 66 68 69 71 72 F33 SCR L3 F34 IGBT TEMP F35 PHSE L1 LOSS F36 PHSE L2 LOSS F37 PHSE L3 LOSS 40 EXT F41 COMMS TRIP F42 AIN1 LOSS F43 AIN2 LOSS F44 CAL FLT F45 STOP T O F46 EEPROM FLT F47 COMMS T O F48 SPI COM F49 SPD LIMIT F50 PSU FAULT F51 SCR TEMP F52 SUPPLY FAN F53 INTRNAL TEMP F54 WATCHDOG TMR F56 EMERGEN STOP F57 PUMP OVERLOA F65 LOW PRESSURE F66 HI PRESSURE F67 LOW WATER F68 CAVITATION F69 FLOW SWITCH F70 IRRIGATOR FL F71 CYCLING F72 PRES SW It allows visualizing the information of the fault stored in register 2 of fault history To obtain information about data storage in the different registers and visualize the fault list see section Function in parameter G13 1 Register 1 of fault history DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 193 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G13 3 REGISTER 3 OF FAULT HISTORY Screen 3 FO NO FAULT Extended info FOURTH FAULT FXX Description Register 3 of fault history Range Default value Set on run Modbus address 40434 Modbus range Read Write Read Only Function It allows visualizing the information of the fault stored in register 3 of fault history To obtain information about d
171. If during this time the deactivation condition disappears the relay will be not deactivated this is the relay will follow activated G8 1 12 RELAY 3 INVERSION Screen 12 INVERT REL3 N Description Logic inversion of the Relay 3 Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run NO Modbus address 40373 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows user to invert the logic of the Relay 3 Relay 3 has one normally open contact terminals 32 33 and another normally closed contact terminals 33 34 See figure 10 31 N gt NO No inversion Y gt YES Inversion of relay logical function G8 1 13 SPEED FOR DISCONNECTING RELAY IN OPTION CRANE Screen 13 CRAspdOF 5 0 Extended info CRANE BRKoff SPD Description Speed for disconnecting the relay in option Crane Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 5 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40597 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function This parameter allows setting the speed below which any relay configured with option 432 CRANE BRAKE will be deactivated DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 143 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 8 2 Subgroup 8 2 58 2 Analogue Outputs G8 2 1 MODE SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Screen 1 ANLG OUT1 01 Description Mode selection for the Analogue Output 1 Range 00 27 See Function for additional information Default value 01 Set on run NO Modbus address 40342 Modbus range 0 to 27
172. LE PUMP2 N 3 ENABLE PUMP3 N 4 ENABLE PUMP4 N 5 ENABLE PUMP5 N 6 FP ALTER MOD 0 7 JPon P 0 0Bar JOCKEY ON PRESS 8 JPon DLY 20s JOCKEY ON DELAY 9 JPof P 0 0Bar JOCKEY OFF PRESS 10 PRp BYP 300s PRIM PUM BYP DLY 11 PRp DLY OFF PRIM PUM FLTdly 1 FLOW SEL PULSE 2 MAX FLOW 1000 I s MAX ALLOWED FLOW 3 OFFSET 0 OFFSET MAX FLOW 4 FLO RES 100 FLOW RESET LEVEL 5 DECrat 2 0 8 FLOW DECEL RATE 6 UNIT FLOW 1 6 TIME RESTORE N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G25 Pump Control 25 9 Fixed Pumps Control N N 0 0 0 20s 0 0 3008 OFF G25 Pump Control 525 10 Flow Limitation Algorithm PULSE 1000 0 100 2 096 1s 15 G25 Pump Control 525 11 Registers Read only 342 CONFIGURATION REGISTER DECLARATION CONFORMITY CE The Company Name POWER ELECTRONICS ESPANA S L Address C Leonardo Da Vinci 24 26 46980 Paterna Valencia Telephone 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 34 96 131 82 01 Declares under its own responsibility that the product Frequency Inverter for A C motors Brand Power Electronics Model name SDRIVE 700 Series Is in conformity with the following European Directives References Title 73 23 Electrical Material intended to be us
173. LO PRESS MIN SPED 12 HP MODE PAUSE 13 HP LEV 100Bar HIFH PRESS LEVEL 14 Hipr DLY 0 0s HI PRESS FLT DLY 15 FLO SWm PAUSE 16 NO FLO FILL N 17 NO FLsp 0 0 NO FLOW MIN SPED 18 NO FLbyp 0 0s NO FLO BYPAS DLY 19 NO FLdly 0 0s NO FLOW FLT DLY 20 CYCLE 0 CYCLE RESET DELY 21 CYCLE CNT 5 MAX CYCLES ALLOW 1 PRESSU SOU PID 2 FILL SP 70 0 PIPE FILLING SPD 3 FILL P 2 0Bar PFILL END PRESSU 4 FILL TIM 15m PFILL END DELAY 5 SPT RAMP 1 0Bar s FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 G25 Pump Control 25 5 Speed Bypass 70 0 10s 90 5s G25 Pump Control 25 6 Protection 20s N FAULT A 100 10s N 5 0Bar 10 0s 0 0 SETTING 2 PAUSE 100Bar 0 0s PAUSE N 0 0 0 0s 0 05 0 5 G25 Pump Control 25 7 Pipe Filling Setpoint Ramp PID 70 2 0 15 1 s CONFIGURATION REGISTER 341 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 G25 Pump Control 525 8 Setpoint Compensation due to Pressure Loss 1 1 0 0 SETPOINT 1 2 2 0 0Bar SETPOINT COMPEN2 3 COMP 3 0 0 SETPOINT COMPEN3 4 COMP 4 0 0Bar SETPOINT COMPEN4 5 COMP 5 0 0Bar SETPOINT COMPEN5 1 ENABLE PUMP 1 N 2 ENAB
174. N delay time for comparator 1 69 1 8 OFF delay time for comparator 1 SD70ITCCO0019AI Figure 10 40 Example Activation of Comparator 1 in window mode when limit 2 is lower than limit 1 160 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G9 1 9 SELECTION OF OUTPUT FUNCTION FOR COMPARATOR 1 Screen 9 SEL FUNT C1 00 Description Selection of the output function for the Comparator 1 Range 00 11 See Function for additional information Default value 00 Set on run YES Modbus address 40308 Modbus range 0 to 11 Read Write YES Function It allows user to select which function will be activated by Comparator 1 according to the following options 00 NO USE Comparator output deactivated Comparator has no effect 01 gt START STOP When comparator output is activated it will give the start command and when comparator output is deactivated it will give the stop command 02 3 STOP 1 Stop mode 1 is activated set in G7 1 when comparator output is activated 03 gt STOP 2 Stop mode 2 is activated set in G7 2 when comparator output is activated 04 gt RESET When comparator output is activated drive reset is executed 05 gt START INCH1 Output of comparator activates the start command and takes inch speed 1 as speed reference When comparator output is activated drive will start and will accelerate until the speed reference is reached in this case the speed reference is inch
175. NO To disable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 2 The relay is configured with the option 00 gt ALWAYS OFF and free configuration is allowed for it Y gt YES To enable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 2 The relay is configured with the option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL and free configuration is not allowed for it TO ENABLE FIXED PUMP ASSOCIATED TO OUTPUT RELAY 3 3 ENABLE PUMP3 N To enable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 3 pump 3 N Y See Function for additional information N YES 42138 0 to 1 YES It allows setting enabling or disabling the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 3 If this parameter is set to Y when activating pump control in parameter G1 7 gt Program activation option PUMP and configuring one digital input parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with option 54 gt FIX PUMP3 FLT the Output Relay is configured with option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL to control fixed pumps If the pump associated to this relay is not required we recommend you disable it from this parameter In this way the relay can be configured for other uses N gt NO To disable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 3 The relay is configured with the option 00 gt ALWAYS OFF and free configuration is allowed for it Y gt YES To enable the fixed pump asso
176. NPUTS CONFIGURATION Screen 4 DIGIT MODE 1 Description Selection of digital inputs configuration Range 0 5 Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write See Function for additional information 1 NO 40038 0 to 5 YES 92 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It determines the configuration mode of digital inputs All of the selectable configuration modes assign specific functions to some digital inputs together except for the option 1 ALL PROGRAMMABLE that allows us to configure them individually Description of the configuration modes 0 gt 3 WIRES It allows controlling the functions of Start Stop and Reset through the terminals of multi function digital inputs Digital inputs will be configured like this 011 01 START NO 012 04 STOP1 RESET DI3 03 gt STOP2 RESET 014 15 gt REFERENCE 2 NO 015 10 gt INV SPEED NC 16 17 CONTROL 2 NO Push buttons are connected to the terminals of the digital inputs 1 2 and 3 In this mode all of the digital inputs are used therefore we cannot add other functionality to this configuration 1 ALL PROGRAMMABLE It allows user to configure each digital input individually The functions assignment to the inputs is realized in parameters G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi functio
177. NSOR 2 Bar Description Selection of units of measurement for the sensor 2 Range 96 1 5 m3 s I m m m I h m3 h m s m m m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K Default value Bar Set on run NO Modbus address 40273 Modbus range 0 to 16 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting different units of measurement for the Analogue Input 2 according to the sensor that is going to be used If this parameter is modified the minimum and maximum values are affected by the proper conversion For this reason the settings of the parameters G4 3 5 gt Minimum range of sensor 2 and G4 3 7 gt Maximum range of sensor 2 should be checked Note This parameter is only available if G4 3 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 2 is set to Y 108 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G4 3 3 ANALOGUE INPUT 2 FORMAT Screen 3 AIN2 FORMAT mA Description Analogue Input 2 format Range V mA Default value mA Set on run NO Modbus address 40265 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows user to configure the format of the Analogue Input 2 to connect a voltage or current signal according to the sensor or signal type used to introduce the reference 94 3 4 MINIMUM RANGE ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen 4 INmin2 4mA Extended info AIN2 LOW RANGE Description Minimum range of the Analogue Input 2 Range 10 to 10V max G4 3 6 Default value Set on run Modbus address Modb
178. ODE2 2 Seu G4 1 3 3 RESET MODE Y lt N No Y Yes 64 1 414 DIGIT MODE 1 lt gt 023 WIRES 1 ALL PROGRAMMABLE 2 MREF 2 WIRES 3 MREF 3 WIRES 4 MOTORIZED POT 5 ERASAB POT 64 1 5 5 DIGITL IN 1206 00 NO USE 01 5 02 5 1 03 STOP2 RESET 04 STOP1 RESET 05 5 5 06 START RST STOP 07 RESET 08 START INCH1 09 START INCH2 10 INV SPEED 11 RESERVE 12 RESERVE 13 INV INCHS 14 ACCIDEC 2 15 REFERENCE 2 16 RESERVE 17 CONTROL 2 18 START STP RST 19 5 2 20 SPEED LIMIT 2 21 0 BRAKE 22 START MODE 2 23 CURRENT LIMI2 50 START STP G4 1 6 6 DIGITL IN 2 00 51 FLOW PULSE 52 FIX PUMP1 FLT G4 1 7 7 DIGITL IN 3 00 53 FIX PUMP2 FLT 54 FIX PUMP3 FLT 64 1 8 8 DIGITL IN 4 00 55 FIX PUMP4 FLT 56 FIX PUMPS FLT 641 919 DIGITL 5 00 57 MAN PROTstart 58 PRESS FLT G4 1 10 10 DIGITL 6217 59 10 WATER FLT 60 10 PRESS FLT 61 FLOW SWITCH 62 IRRIGAT TRIP 63 5 PIN1 64 5 PIN2 65 SETPONT PIN3 66 REF 2 67 MAN OVR STAR 69 PRESSUR SWITCH 70 ALTER PID STP 50701160055 Figure 10 3 Parameters structure of subgroup 54 1 G4 66 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 4 2 Analogue Input 1 G4 2 2 2 SENSOR 1zl s 64 2 3 3 AINT FORMAT V Q lt 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA G4 2 5 5 Smit 0 0l s 3200 to G 4 2 7 Engineer Units G4 2 6 6 Inmax1 10V lt 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA 64 2 7 1
179. ODUCED THROUGH ANALOGUE INPUT Screen 29 SLPspA 40 096 Extended info SLEP SPD STP ANA Description Sleep speed when the setpoint is introduced through Analogue Input Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 40 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42375 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the sleep speed 1 below which the drive will activate the sleep mode whenever the setpoint is selected to be introduced through Analogue Input 1 or 2 It is set as percentage of motor speed 262 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 11 Subgroup 25 5 525 5 Speed Bypass G25 5 1 SPEED BYPASS AT THE STARTING OF FIXED PUMPS Screen 1 BY SPon 70 0 Extended info BYPASS ON SPEED Description Speed bypass at the starting of fixed pumps Range 0 096 to 250 Default value 70 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42081 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a speed bypass value The drive speed will be forced to the value set in this parameter during the time set in parameter G25 5 2 gt Time of speed bypass after starting fixed pumps to avoid over pressure situations in the system at the starting of a fixed pump See figures 10 47 and 10 48 G25 5 2 TIME OF SPEED BYPASS AFTER STARTING FIXED PUMPS Screen 2 105 Extended info BYPASS ON DELAY Description Time of speed bypass after starting fixed pumps Range OF
180. OFF REGEN BUS VOLT OFF G19 Fine Tuning 19 3 MTR Model 1 R STATOR 0 9 STATOR RESISTOR 0 9 G20 Serial Communication Controls 1 PROTOCOL M M 2 COMMS T O OFF COMMS TIMEOUT OFF G20 Serial Communication Controls 20 3 Modbus 1 COMMS ADDR 10 COMM ADDRESS 10 2 BAUDS 9600 9600 3 PARITY NONE NONE G20 Serial Communication Controls 20 4 Modbus TCP 1 IP A 192 192 21 PARAM B 168 168 PARAM C 1 1 41 PARAM D 143 143 5 SUBNET 255 255 6 SUBNET B 255 255 7 SUBNET C 255 255 8 SUBNET D 0 0 9 GATEWAY A 0 0 10 GATEWAY 0 0 11 GATEWAY C 0 0 12 GATEWAY D 0 0 13 MAC A 12 12 14 MAC B 34 34 15 MAC 56 56 16 MAC D 78 78 17 MAC E 90 90 18 MAC 171 171 338 CONFIGURATION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS 1 CONTROL MODE 1 2 MAN SPD REF LOC 3 MAN SPEED 0 0 MANUAL SPEED 4 ALT MAN S R LOCAL 5 SETPT1 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 1 6 SETPT2 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 2 7 SETPT3 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 3 8 SETPT4 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 4 9 SETPT5 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 5 10 SETPT6 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 6 11 SETPT7 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 7 12 SETPT8 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 8 13 T AutOFF OFF AUTO OFF DELAY 1 PID SETP LOCAL 2 PID aSTP LOCAL 3 PID FBK AI2 4 PID 1 0 PROPORTIONAL PID 5 PID It 5 0s INTEGRAL PID
181. ON OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 18 Group 19 G19 Fine Tuning 10 18 1 Subgroup 19 1 19 1 IGBT Control G19 1 1 SELECTION OF CONTROL TYPE Screen 1 TYPE CTRL V Hz Description Selection of control type Range V Hz PEVE See Function for additional information Default value V Hz Set on run NO Modbus address 40522 Modbus range 0101 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the drive control type Configuration options are V Hz Scalar control mode Drive carries out the control by applying a voltage frequency ramp to the motor PEVE Compensation of stator voltage drop Torque delivery is improved at specific moments when motor overload is present G19 1 2 COMMUTATION FREQUENCY Screen 2 FRQ 4000 Hz Extended info MODULAT FREQUENC Description Commutation frequency Range 4000 8000Hz Default value 4000Hz Set on run YES Modbus address 40523 Modbus range 4000 to 8000 Read Write YES Function It allows modifying the commutation frequency of the output stage to the motor This allows reducing the noise of the own motor G19 1 3 PEWAVE CONTROL Screen 3 PEWAVE Y Description Pewave control Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value Y Set on run YES Modbus address 40524 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 209 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows user to select Pewave control This c
182. Protections OFF 10 360V 5s 440V 5 0s 1 0s CONFIGURATION REGISTER 335 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS PARAMETERS 9 LOW V 0 10 PTC EXT ZN 11 PUMP 20 0 PUMP OVERLOAD LV 12 FIL OFF PMP OVL FILTER 13 Povl DLY OFF PMP OVERLOAD DLY 14 UNDERLOAD N 15ULDCUR A UNDERLOAD CURREN 16 ULD SPD 100 UNDERLOAD SPEED 17 ULD DELY 10s UNDERLOAD DELAY 1 AUTORESET N 2 NUMBR 1 MAX ATTEMPT NUMB 3R STR DEL 5s TIME BEFORE RESET 4 RS COUNT 15Min AUTORESET TIMOUT 5 F1 AUTO RST 0 6 F2 AUTO RST 0 7 AUTO RST 0 8 F4 AUTO RST 0 1 F0 NO FAULT LAST FAULT FXX 2 F0 NO FAULT FIFTH FAULT FXX 3 F0 NO FAULT FOURTH FAULT FXX 4 F0 NO FAULT THIRD FAULT FXX 5 FO NO FAULT SECOND FAULT FXX 6 FO NO FAULT FIRST FAULT FXX 7 CLEAR FAULTS N 1 MREF 1 10 0 MULTI REFERENCE1 2 MREF 2 20 0 MULTI REFERENCE2 3 MREF 3 30 0 MULTI REFERENCE3 4 MREF 4 40 0 MULTI REFERENCE4 5 MREF 5 50 0 MULTI REFERENCES FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 0 N 20 0A OFF OFF N A 100 10s G12 Auto Reset 5s 15min G13 Fault History G14 Multi references 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 SETTING 2 336 CONFIGURAT
183. R ELECTRONICS SPEED REFERENCE SPEED RUN COMMAND STOP COMMAND to tu tis tu G7 1 gt Stop mode 1 67 2 gt Stop mode 2 67 3 gt Changing speed for stop mode 67 4 gt Start mode G7 6 gt Start delay time b t and tio ts 67 7 gt Stop delay time 6 and 67 9 gt Delay time between stop and next start ts t 5070 0010 Figure 10 27 Parameters representation of group G7 97 8 MINIMUM STOP SPEED Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 8 STP MIN SP N Minimum stop speed N Y See Function for additional information N YES 40008 0 to 1 YES It allows user the possibility of stopping the motor if the speed reference is below the lower speed limit Options N gt NO If the drive is decelerating motor will reach the minimum speed defined as lower speed limit set G10 1 gt Minimum speed limit 1 or G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 even if speed reference is below these settings For example if G10 1 gt Minimum speed limit 1 is set to 30 00 and the speed reference is 20 00 then drive will operate at 30 0096 and not below that value 132 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Y YES If the drive is decelerating and the reference is below the lower speed limit then drive will stop by spin
184. RAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SV8 6 STATUS OF PUMP PROGRAM Screen ESTATUS PUMP PROGRAM Units Modbus address 42002 Modbus range 0 to 22 See Modbus range in parameter SV8 2 Read Write Read Only Description In the visualization lines of the display it is possible to select this option In this way the following messages are going to be shown according to the current program status Status Description PID REGULATION Drive is regulating in PID mode PROTECTED MANUAL The drive is at protected manual mode OVERRIDE MANUAL Drive is in manual mode not protective mode HI PRESSURE PAUS Drive is stopped pause due to high pressure according to the read data in the analogue input HI PRESSURE FAUL A fault due to high pressure has occurred according to the read data in the analogue input or in the digital input NO FLOW PAUSE The drive has stopped Pause status due to No Flow detection NO FLOW FAULT The drive has tripped Fault status due to No Flow detection CAVITATION PAUSE The drive has stopped Pause status due to Cavitation CAVITATION FAULT The drive has tripped Fault status due to Cavitation LO PRESSURE FAUL The drive has tripped due to low pressure fault LO WATER FAULT The drive has tripped due to a fault detected in one of the digital inputs configured as No Water CYCLING FAULT The drive has tripped du
185. RAMMING PARAMETERS 217 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 19 1 Subgroup 20 3 20 3 Modbus G20 3 1 COMMUNICATION ADDRESS Screen 1 COMMS ADDR 10 Extended info COMM ADDRESS Description Drive address for communication Range 1 255 Default value 10 Set on run YES Modbus address 40414 Modbus range 1 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows assigning an identification address to the drive for communicating with it from the network If communication is required with several drives different address is required for each unit G20 3 2 COMMUNICATION SPEED Screen 2 BAUDS 9600 Description Communication speed Range 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 Default value 9600 Set on run YES Modbus address 40415 Modbus range 0 to 4 Read Write YES Function It is data transmission speed It allows setting transmission rating for MODBUS serial communications This transmission rating must be the same than the rating of the master of the communication bus on which the drive is integrated G20 3 3 COMMUNICATION PARITY Screen 3 PARITY NONE Description Selection of communication parity Range ODD NONE EVEN Default value NONE Set on run YES Modbus address 40416 Modbus range 0 to 2 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the parity of MODBUS serial communication It is used for data validation If you do not want to validate data set this parameter to NONE Parity selection must be the same than the parity of the master
186. RIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 REFERENCE VALUE G5 12 Screen SPEED REFERENCE 65 7 gt Ramp 1 of reference increase for motorized pot 1 at 65 8 gt Ramp 1 of reference decrease for motorized pot 65 9 gt Ramp 2 of reference increase for motorized pot 65 10 9 Ramp 2 of reference decrease for motorized pot 65 11 gt Speed for ramp change with motorized pot Acceleration 1 Acceleration 2 Reference speed Deceleration 1 Deceleration 2 5070 0006 Figure 10 24 Main and alternative acceleration deceleration ramps of motorized potentiometer TIME CONSTANT TO FILTER THE SPEED Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function Note 12 SP FLT 0 250s SMOOT SPD FILTER Time constant for the filtering of speed signal 0 000 60 05 0 250s YES 40403 0 to 60000 YES It provides with S Curve filter for the speed reference changes including Start Stop commands The 5 Curve filter limits acceleration and deceleration changes by making soft It is especially useful in cranes and elevators If different value is not required set to default value A value different to 0 will affect to the system response DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 121 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 6 Group 6 G6 PID Control SDRIVE 700 is provided with a PID regulator tha
187. RONICS 4 625 34 6253 8 REFERENCE LU Se Ae cien PT PLUR oe 100 i TN 20 62533 TIME 5 t t SPEED 62534 02538 in 25 32 G25 5 1 TIME T T T t gt t 2 2 DRIVE PUMP t 5 t ON TIME ti t t FIXED PUMP X ON TIME gt t2 t t G25 3 2 gt Start speed for the fixed pumps G25 3 3 gt gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps G25 3 4 4 Delay time to start fixed pump 1 Relay 1 G25 3 5 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 2 Relay 2 G25 3 6 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 3 Relay 3 G25 3 7 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 4 1 G25 3 8 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 5 2 G25 5 1 lt gt Speed bypass at the starting of fixed pumps G25 5 2 gt Time of speed bypass after starting fixed pumps SD70ITCCO0027CI Figure 10 48 Starting of the fixed pumps according to the start speed the PID error and the delay time for each pump 244 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 3 4 DELAY TIME TO START FIXED PUMP 1 RELAY 1 Screen 4 FP T1 ON 10s Extended info FIX PMP1 STR DLY Description Delay time to start the fixed pump 1 Relay 1 Range OFF 0 6000s Default value 10s Set on run YES Modbus address 42062 Modbus range 0 to 60000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Relay 1 At the moment of starting the fix
188. RS 199 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G14 7 MULTI REFERENCE 7 Screen 7 MREF 7 70 096 Extended info MULTI REFERENCE7 Description Multi reference 7 Range 250 to 250 Default value 70 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40058 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the value of multi reference 7 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 200 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 15 Group 15 G15 Inch Speeds This group of parameters allows setting the value of three possible inch speeds of the motor Inch speed selection can be realized through a comparator output or by means of a digital input configured for this purpose one input for inch speed 1 and other one for inch speed 2 For inch speed 3 a combination of two previous inputs is required To select an inch speed through a comparator output you must set the output function of the Comparator 1 2 or 3 to option 05 gt START INCH1 06 gt START INCH or 07 gt START for Comparator 1 2 or 3 in parameter G9 1 9 G9 2 9 or G9 3 9 respectively In case of selecting an inch speed through digital input you must select option 08 gt START INCH1 for inch speed 1 or 09 gt START INCH for inch speed 2 in one of the parameters G4 1 5 3 Multi function Digital Input 1 conf
189. Read Write YES Function It allows user to configure the Analogue Input 1 according to the following options 00 gt NONE It is not used 01 gt SPEED MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor speed Units Motor speed 02 CURRENT MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor current Units Motor rated current 03 gt VOLTAGE MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor voltage Units Motor rated voltage 04 POWER MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor power Units Motor power 05 TORQUE MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor torque Units Motor torque 06 3 PF MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor power factor Units Motor rated Cosine Phi 07 gt TEMP MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor temperature Units Motor temperature 08 FREQUENCY MTR Signal proportional to the input frequency Units lnput frequency 50Hz 100 09 3 INPUT VOLTAGE Signal proportional to the input voltage Units Equipment rated voltage 10 gt DC BUS Signal proportional to the DC Bus voltage Units Motor voltage x 1 414 11 gt DRIVE TEMP Signal proportional to the drive temperature Units Drive temperature 144 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 12 SPEED REF Signal proportional to the speed reference Units Motor speed 13 gt Reserved Reserved for future use 14 gt PID REFERENCE Signal proportional to the reference in PID mode Units 15 gt PI
190. S Modbus address 42157 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 7 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m min l h m h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information G25 1 12 LOCAL SETPOINT 8 FOR PID Screen 12 SETPTS 0 0Bar Extended info LOCAL SETPOINT 8 Description Local setpoint 8 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 42158 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 8 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 l s m s l min m min l h m h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information 234 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 1 13 TIME FOR AUTOMATIC STOP Screen 13 T AutOFF OFF Extended info AUTO OFF DELAY Description Setting of a time for automatic stop Range OFF 0 1 99 9h Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 42044 Modbus range 0 to 999 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a time after elapsing it the d
191. S Function It allows setting the value of the proportional gain for the PID regulator according to the requirements of the installation Note The default value is usually proper for pump control application Nevertheless if it is necessary to have a higher control response then increase this value If this value is increased a higher instability can be introduced in the system G25 2 5 INTEGRAL TIME OF PID REGULATOR Screen 5 PID It 5 05 Extended info INTEGRAL PID Description Integral time of PID regulator Range 0 1 999 95 Max Default value 5 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 42048 Modbus range 1 to 9999 10000 Read Write YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 237 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows setting the integral time of PID regulator according to the requirements of the installation Note The default value is usually proper for pump control application If this value is increased accuracy of the system is improved but system response can be slow down G25 2 6 DERIVATION TIME OF PID REGULATOR Screen 6 PID Dt 0 0s Extended info DIFFERENTIAL PID Description Derivation time of PID regulator Range 0 0 250s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 42049 Modbus range 0 to 2500 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the derivation time of PID regulator according to the requirements of the installation Note The default value is usually proper for pump control appl
192. S OF FIXED PUMPS 1 2 AND 3 Screen Units Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Description 10FF 2 30FF 42003 gt Fixed Pump 1 42004 3 Fixed Pump 2 42005 Fixed Pump 3 0 OFF 1 RDY 2 gt ON 3 gt FLT Read Only The status of the fixed pumps 1 2 and 3 is shown according to the next information Status Description OFF Pump disabled by keypad RDY Pump ready to start ON Pump started Pump in a fault status input which controls the signal is active FLT Note See digital input configuration parameter G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration in Pump Control mode parameter G1 7 Program activation option PUMP VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 61 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS SV8 4 STATUS OF FIXED PUMPS 4 AND 5 Screen 4OFF 50OFF Units Modbus address 42022 gt Fixed Pump 4 42023 gt Fixed Pump 5 Modbus range 0 OFF 1 RDY 2 3 gt FLT Read Write Read Only Description The status of the fixed pumps 4 and 5 is displayed according to the information shown in the parameter SV8 3 SV8 5 READ FLOW VALUE Screen Flow 0 0l s Units Engineering units Modbus address 42142 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the present value read by the analogue input or by pulse input where sensor is connected 62 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PA
193. SDRIVE Series VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE SDRIVE g x 5 variable speed drive User Manual 22 POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE variable speed drive User Manual Edition October 2007 SD70MTO1CI Rev C SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SAFETY SYMBOLS Always follow safety instructions to prevent accidents and potential hazards from occurring N WARNING This symbol means improper operation may results in serious personal injury or death AN CAUTION Identifies shock hazards under certain conditions Particular attention should be given because dangerous voltage may be present Maintenance operation should be done by qualified personnel Identifies potential hazards under certain conditions Read the message and follow the instructions carefully Identifies shock hazards under certain conditions Particular attention should be given because dangerous voltage may be present Edition of October 2007 This publication could present technical imprecision or misprints The information here included will be periodically modified and updated and all those modifications will be incorporated in later editions To consult the most updated information of this product you might access through our website www power electronics com where the latest version of this manual can be downloaded Revisions Date 10 04 200
194. SE FAULT Options N gt NO No Flow input disabled Y gt YES No Flow input enabled When this input is activated and after delay time set G25 4 1 gt Delay time before activating sleep mode has elapsed the drive goes in sleep mode See figure 10 49 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 251 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 11 FLOW LEVEL TO SLEEP THE DRIVE Screen 11 Fsi 0 01 6 Extended info FLOW SLEEP LEVEL Description Flow level to sleep the drive Range OFF 0 0 to 3276 Flow units Default value 0 01 6 Set on run YES Modbus address 42324 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the flow level to activate the sleep mode The flow will be monitored and when it is below the level set in this parameter delay time to activate sleep mode will start elapsing Once elapsed this delay time the drive will go in sleep mode So it allows setting the value of the flow read through pulse input or analogue input below which a situation of no demand will be detected This situation will send the drive to sleep When this parameter is set to OFF it will be disabled The source of flow reading is set in parameter G25 10 1 gt Flow reading source See figure 10 49 G25 4 12 OUTPUT CURRENT LEVEL TO SLEEP THE DRIVE Screen 12 SLEEP xxxA Extended info CURR SLEEP LEVEL Description Level of output current to sleep the drive Range OFF 0 to 1229A Defa
195. SETPOINT 5 Description Local setpoint 5 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 42155 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 5 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m min l h m h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 233 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 1 10 LOCAL SETPOINT 6 FOR PID Screen 10 SETPT6 0 0Bar Extended info LOCAL SETPOINT 6 Description Local setpoint 6 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 42156 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 6 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m min l h m h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information G25 1 11 LOCAL SETPOINT 7 FOR PID Screen 11 SETPT7 0 0Bar Extended info LOCAL SETPOINT 7 Description Local setpoint 7 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YE
196. STP DELAY Delay time to stop the fixed pump 5 Analogue Output 2 0 6000s 105 5 42080 to 60000 YES It allows setting the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 2 At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local setpoint depending on the selected local setpoint and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated G25 4 19 STOP SPEED 1 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 19 SPD1of 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED1 Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 1 0 0 to 250 70 0 YES 42315 0 to 20480 YES It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 1 set in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID If you want the speed condition is not considered at the moment of stopping fixed pumps you must set this parameter to a value that is always above the drive speed In this way this condition is always fulfilled and therefore it is not already a cond
197. See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Modbus address 42326 Modbus range Read Write YES Function It is possible to get an inverse operation of the drive output in PID mode N 3 NO PID output inversion disabled In this case the PID regulator response if the feedback decreases is an increasing of the output speed This is the standard setting when the PID is used for an application of constant pressure control If the pressure decreases feedback signal due to a higher demand it is required to increase the pump speed to keep constant the pressure in the system Y gt YES PID output inversion enabled In this case the PID regulator response when the feedback signal is falling down is a reduction of the output speed For example this operation is typical for a temperature control by means of PID mode A reduction of the temperature feedback signal due to a lower demand requires that the speed of the fan is reduced to keep the temperature DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 239 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 20 9 Subgroup 25 3 25 3 Start Conditions General considerations for starting conditions During the setpoint ramp neither the conditions for the activation of fixed pumps nor the conditions for sleep mode will be considered Only when the drive is in regulation mode see parameter G25 7 4 gt Setpoint ramp for additional information those conditions will be con
198. Setpoint 1 for the PID x xBar Local setpoint 1 Set according to the installation G25 Pump Control 25 2 PID Setting 25 2 1 PID reference source 25 2 3 PID feedback source G25 Pump Control 25 3 Start Conditions x xBar gt When demand decreases the drive can go in sleep G25 3 1 Wake up level of the drive mode It allows setting the wake up level for the drive This value is set as units of PID setpoint 90 0 It sets the drive speed above which fixed pumps wil 0 purse Start speed forthe Mixed pumps start Set according to the installation TE inimum PID error to start fixed 10 0 gt This parameter allows user to consider the PID error 96 at the moment of starting fixed pumps 10 05 It sets the delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Relay 1 10 05 It sets the delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Relay 2 G25 3 6 Delay time to start fixed pump 3 10 05 It sets the delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Relay 3 G25 Pump Control 25 4 Stop Conditions 20s gt This delay time will be applied to any conditions that activate the sleep mode These conditions are sleep speed No Flow input Flow measurement and sleep current 40 0 gt The drive will sleep below the value set here whenever local setpoint 1 is selected 0 0 gt This parameter allows user to consider the PID error at the moment of stopping fixed pumps Set according to the requirements G
199. T 2 When comparator output is activated the alternative speed limits set in G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 and G10 4 Maximum speed limit 2 Note If activation and deactivation levels are set to similar values and delay times are set to OFF any noise that appears in the signals of selected source can cause an oscillation in the comparator and therefore an incorrect operation You should set these levels keeping a reasonable margin between them and if it is necessary set a delay time to improve the operation 162 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 9 2 Subgroup 9 2 S9 2 Comparator 2 Comparator 2 operates in the same way of Comparator 1 Additionally it includes the same setting parameters with the same configuration options Therefore figures 10 47 10 48 10 49 and 10 50 are also valid for this comparator For this we recommend observe these figures in order to understand better its operation G9 2 1 SOURCE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 2 Screen 1 COMP 2 SEL 00 Description Selection of the source for the Comparator 2 Range 00 22 Default value 00 Set on run YES Modbus address 40311 Modbus range 0 to 22 Read Write YES Function It allows user to select the source for the Comparator 2 Configuration options are the same than the options for Comparator 1 See Function in parameter G9 1 1 Source selection for Comparator 1 to obtain information about confi
200. TOR 08 FREQUENCY MTR 09 INPUT VOLTAGE E T 12 SPEED REF 13 Reserved 14 PID REFERENCE 15 PID FEEDBACK 17 ANLG INPUT 1 18 ANLG INPUT 2 19 ANLG INPUT 1 2 20 Reserved 21 MAX SCALE 22 ABSOLUT SPEED MODBUS COMMUNICATION 301 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Address Screen Description 7 Range ModbusRange 40303 69 1 2 Type selection for Comparator 1 0 Normal 0101 1 Window 69 1 5 Limit 1 for Comparator 1 Window mode G9 1 7 Deactivation value of Comparator 1 in Normal mode G9 1 4 Limit 2 for Comparator 1 in Window mode 69 1 3 Activation value of Comparator 1 in Normal mode 40305 40306 40307 40308 Selection of output function for Comparator 1 G9 1 9 40311 22 40312 2 69 2 5 Limit 1 for Comparator 2 Window mode G9 2 7 Deactivation value of Comparator 2 in Normal mode G9 2 4 Limit 2 for Comparator 2 in Window mode G9 2 3 Activation value of Comparator 2 in Normal mode EM E 40315 40316 40317 40320 40321 69 3 5 Limit 1 for Comparator 3 in Window mode G9 3 7 Deactivation value of Comparator 3 in Normal mode G9 3 4 Limit 2 for Comparator 3 in Window mode 69 3 3 Activation value of Comparator in Normal mode 40323 40324 40325 40326 250 20480 to 250 250 to 250 20480 250 20480 to 250 250 to 250 20480 G9 1 6 ON delay time for Comparator 1 0 0 9995 0 to 9999
201. Under these conditions if a contact is opened on this digital input this fault is generated indicating that the pump is working with no load When the motor current is lower than the cavitation current and the motor speed is higher or equal than the F68 CAVIT UNDERL cavitation speed during the time set for that purpose the fault or the pause is produced according to the setting realized This protection is to avoid that pump operates with no water detection is realized by under load F69 FLOW SWITCH The digital input configured as flow detection indicates flow absence according to the settings realized in the corresponding parameters See the protections set in G25 6 to obtain more detailed information F70 IRRIGATOR F The digital input configured as 62 IRRIGAT TRIP detects that an external fault in the irrigating equipment has been produced F71 CYCLING Conditions set in group G25 6 are not met regarding to the cycle time of the drive and the cycle counter The SD700 has started a number of times higher than the allowed number without relaxing the established time F72 N PRES SW This fault is produced because of two causes 1 After starting the system the time set in G25 9 11 has been exceeded without the digital input configured as PRESSUR SWITC is activated 2 After the Priming pump has stopped and the drive pump has started the digital input configured as PRESSUR SWITC is opened during the time set in G25 9 10
202. VE 700 drives recognize and execute messages with groupcast or broadcast addressing but do not answer to the master with a confirmation 11 6 3 Function Field The function field indicates to the addressed equipment the action to execute When the slave detects that a communication error has occurred the more significant bit of this field takes value 1 to indicate to the master this abnormal situation There is more information about the exception codes in section 12 5 6 11 6 4 Data Field Data field is used to transmit information to the addressed slaves and from them The length of data field is 16 or multiple bits transmitted in 2 bytes byte more significant firstly MODBUS COMMUNICATION 311 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 11 6 5 Sum Check CRC Sum check is used by the master and slave to detect transmission errors This code is added at the end of the transmitted frame The characteristic polynomial of this code is CRC 16 x6 x5 x2 1 Receiver calculates the of the received messages compares it with the sum check received If an error occurs the entire message is ruled out It is not possible to recover errors inside the message 11 6 5 1 Theory The entire message with no start stop bits nor parity bit is considered like a continuous sequence to be processed with the more significant byte transmitted firstly The message is multiplied by 25 2 bytes on the left hand a
203. While reference is below this limit drive will be ready Once reference exceeds the lower speed limit the drive will start until reaching the reference value introduced whenever the start command is activated Note If stopping the motor when reference is below a predefined speed is required this parameter must be set to Y Additionally you must set the correct values in G10 1 gt Minimum speed limit 1 or G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 G7 9 DELAY TIME BETWEEN STOP AND NEXT START Screen 9 OFFdly OFF Extended info DELAY AFTER STOP Description Delay time to start after stopping the drive Range 0 000 10 0005 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40014 Modbus range 0 to 10000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time between the moment the drive has stopped and the next starting At the moment of the drive is stopped it begins to count the time set in this parameter Several situations can occur 1 Drive receives the start command after elapsing the minimum time set in this parameter In this case the drive will not count any delay time more at the moment of the starting whenever any delay time is not set in parameter G7 6 gt Start delay time 2 Drive receives the start command before elapsing the minimum time set in this parameter In this case if any delay time at the starting has not been set in G7 6 the drive will start immediately after elapsing the min
204. age over maximum flow 0 to 250 0 YES 42144 0 to 20480 YES It allows setting the offset margin over the maximum allowed flow to activate the flow limitation algorithm It is set in of the value set in parameter G25 10 2 gt Maximum allowed flow G25 10 4 FLOW PERCENTAGE TO RESET ALGORITHM Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 4 FLO RES 100 FLOW RESET LEVEL Flow percentage to reset algorithm 0 to 100 100 YES 42145 0 to 100 YES It allows setting the flow level to reset the flow limitation algorithm When the level of the instantaneous read in the source set in parameter G25 10 1 is below the value set in this parameter the flow limitation algorithm will give the PID regulator the control It is set in of the range of analogue input 1 or 2 in case of selecting option 0 gt Alt or 1 3 AI respectively in parameter 525 10 1 gt Flow reading source or it is set in of the value set in the parameter G4 4 3 gt Maximum range of flow meter in case of selecting the option 2 PULSE as flow reading source in parameter G25 10 1 G25 10 5 DECELERATION RAMP DURING ALGORITHM Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 5 DECrat 2 0 s FLOW DECEL RATE Deceleration ramp during the flow limita
205. amage and personal injuries G17 5 USE OF EXTERNAL BRAKE Screen 5 DYN N Description Use of external brake Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Modbus address 40026 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function User must configure the drive if an external dynamic brake is going to be used Options N gt NO Application does not require the use of external brake Y YES External brake is going to be installed DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 207 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G17 6 VOLTAGE FOR ACTIVATING REGENERATION CONTROL Screen 6 VDC BRAKE OFF Extended info VDC BRAKE START Description Voltage for activating the regeneration control Range For VIN 400V 500V gt 800 to 810V OFF 811 Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function For VIN 690V gt 1150 to 1160V OFF 1161 OFF YES 40509 For VIN 400V 500V gt 800 to 810 811 For VIN 690V gt 1150 to 1160 1161 YES It allows setting the DC Bus voltage level to activate voltage regeneration control When an external brake is used in some applications although braking resistors are not enough to dissipate energy returned to the drive at specific moments In this case the drive will use the regeneration control to limit DC bus voltage with the level value set here by acting over motor deceleration 208 DESCRIPTI
206. ange 8192 100 of motor rated torque Read Write Read Only Description It shows the present torque applied to the motor SV1 7 MOTOR POWER FACTOR Screen Mtr Pfactr 0 0 Units Modbus address 40168 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the power factor of the motor SV1 8 MOTOR POWER CONSUMPTION Screen Mtr Pwr 0 0 Units kW Modbus address 40165 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the instantaneous power consumption of the motor SV1 9 CURRENT CONSUMPTION PER PHASE OF THE MOTOR Screen 0 0A 0 0A 0 0A Units A Modbus address 40177 Phase 40178 Phase V 40179 gt Phase W Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the instantaneous current of each phase of the motor U V and W SV1 10 VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE MOTOR PHASES Screen 0 0 OV Units V Modbus address 40180 gt Phases UV 40181 Phases VW 40182 Phases UW Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value Read Write Read Only Description It shows the instantaneous voltage applied to the motor terminals 44 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SV1 11 MOTOR PTC CONNECTION Screen PTC Motor 0 Units Modbus address 40218 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write Read Only Description It shows if the motor PTC temperature sensor is conne
207. are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units G25 8 4 COMPENSATION PRESSURE AT THE STARTING OF 4 FIXED PUMPS Screen 4 COMP 4 0 0 Extended info SETPOINT 4 Description Compensation pressure at the starting of four fixed pumps Range 0 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42134 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows compensating the pressure loss in the pipe by increasing the setpoint automatically when four fixed pumps are connected Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units G25 8 5 COMPENSATION PRESSURE AT THE STARTING OF 5 FIXED PUMPS Screen 5 COMP 5 0 0Bar Extended info SETPOINT 5 Description Compensation pressure at the starting of five fixed pumps Range 0 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 42135 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows compensating the pressure loss in the pipe by increasing the setpoint automatically when five fixed pumps are connected Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 Selection
208. as reached a level of 110 C See parameter SV2 4 F35 PHSE L1 LOSS Input phase L1 is not present Phase fault F36 PHSE L2 LOSS Input phase L2 is not present Phase fault F37 PHSE L3 LOSS Input phase L3 is not present Phase fault F40 EXT PTC External trip or motor device has operated terminals 8 and 9 Values lower than 900 10 or higher than 1K5 x 1096 generate the fault F41 COMMS TRIP Trip generated through RS232 or 5485 communication Master PLC or PC is generating a fault in the 50700 through serial communication F42 AIN1 LOSS The 50700 is not receiving a signal on Analogue Input 1 and G4 2 14 AIN1 LOSS is set to Yes The signal connected to this input has been lost The SD700 is not receiving a signal on the Analogue Input 2 and G4 3 14 AIN2 LOSS is set to Yes The signal FAS AINZLOSS connected to this input has been lost F44 CAL FLT Internal reference voltage levels are wrong F45 STOP T O Trip generated due to excessive stopping time The elapsed time from stop signal activation has exceeded the value set in parameter G11 2 STOP TO F46 EEPROM FLT Non volatile memory is faulty F47 COMMS T O Trip generated due to excessive delay of serial communication The elapsed time from the last valid data transmission has exceeded the time set in parameter G20 2 COMMS T O F48 SPI COM Trip beca
209. ata storage in the different registers and visualize the fault list see section Function in parameter G13 1 gt Register 1 of fault history G13 4 REGISTER 4 OF FAULT HISTORY Screen 4 F0 NO FAULT Extended info THIRD FAULT FXX Description Register 4 of fault history Range Default value Set on run Modbus address 40435 Modbus range Read Write Read Only Function It allows visualizing the information of the fault stored in register 4 of fault history To obtain information about data storage in the different registers and visualize the fault list see section Function in parameter G13 1 gt Register 1 of fault history G13 5 REGISTER 5 OF FAULT HISTORY Screen 5 FO NO FAULT Extended info SECOND FAULT FXX Description Register 5 of fault history Range Default value Set on run Modbus address 40436 Modbus range Read Write Read Only Function It allows visualizing the information of the fault stored in register 5 of fault history To obtain information about data storage in the different registers and visualize the fault list see section Function in parameter G13 1 gt Register 1 of fault history 194 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G13 6 REGISTER 6 OF FAULT HISTORY Screen 6 FO NO FAULT Extended info FIRST FAULT FXX Description Register 6 of fault history Range Default value Set on run Modbus address 40437 Modbu
210. ation at steady status DEC Decelerating Drive is decreasing the output frequency Motor decreasing in speed it is decelerating Drive is decreasing the output frequency due to a stop command Motor is 22 Stopping stopping by ramp until zero speed is reached STO Free run stop when a fault Drive is stopping by free run stop after a fault occurs emergency stop Motor occurs stopping time is determined by inertia as the drive output has turned off SPN Flying start Flying start operation must be configured if required The SD700 will search for the actual motor shaft speed once the drive has received a start command DCB DC brake SD700 is applying DC current injection to stop the motor 50700 is injecting DC current to prevent moisture condensing within the motor HEA Non condensing current is A activated CAUTION Although the motor is not running there is dangerous voltage Run Led will be lit during this process Be careful to avoid damages and personal injury TBR DC brake ON delay Drive is applying a delay time before DC current injection is active When this time is elapsed the DC brake will be active SD700 is working according to inch speed 1 command and Start Inch speed 1 mode is active When operated in this mode the Start Inch speed Inch speed 1 1 command is dominant over other inputs programmed for Start functionality Therefore if one input is configured as Start and it is deactivated in spite of
211. ation pipe if the system requires this function 10 20 2 Operation modes There are three operation modes basically Manual Protected Mode One of the digital inputs must be set as Automatic and a second digital input must be set as Protected Manual Both inputs must be closed to start In this operation mode the system protections are operative for example high pressure cavitation etc A main speed reference source and an alternative speed reference source exist they are set by means of a digital input Manual Non Protected Mode This is an operation mode thought for commissioning and test of the system It is not recommended for a normal operation since the protections are not active There are two possibilities of configuring this mode o Manual non protected mode with exclusive control from the keypad o Manual non protected mode controlled by the digital inputs A main speed reference source and an alternative speed reference source exist they are set by means of a digital input Pumps Mode The drive will operate in regulation mode with all the available functions and the protections will be operative 10 20 3 General Descriptions of Protections In case of the pump program is active the drive will function in three different ways depending on the activated protections Faults of the Drive Standard Program Here we can find those trips of the drive or trips of the installation that have been configured in t
212. ative rotation direction is not allowed Y gt YES Enabled inversion Motor running in both rotation directions is allowed DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 177 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 11 Group 11 G11 Protections G11 1 TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF SPEED LIMIT Screen 1 SP LIM TO OFF Extended info TMAX LIMITIN SPD Description Trip time because of speed limit has been reached Range 0 to 60s OFF Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40452 Modbus range 0 to 600 610 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time to generate the fault F49 SPD LIMIT when the drive reaches the predefined speed limit G11 2 MAXIMUM TIME FOR STOP LIMIT Screen 2 STOP TO OFF Extended info TIMEOUT STOPPING Description Maximum time for stop limit Range 0 0 to 9995 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40454 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a maximum time of stop limit It supplies a safety function to stop the drive automatically if the motor has not stopped after the time set in this parameter has elapsed and if the drive has received a stop command The drive will fault on F45 STOP T O This function is used to protect from uncontrolled stops where motor needs a longer time than the predict time to stop As well as other protections integrated into the drive this time can be set to turn off the output voltage and stop the motor by free
213. c power supply for analogue inputs Input power for maximum 2 potentiometers gt 1 e A m 19 GND USR Common for analogue inputs 0Vdc 2 E 2 20 24V USR User power supply Allows for the supply to an external sensor Maximum 24Vdc 150 z 21 RS485 A 5485 serial communication interface for Modbus E 22 RS485 B 4 RS UE cz 23 Common for RS485 5232 serial communication signals oz 24 RS232 Rx o RS232 serial communication interface for Modbus 25 RS232 Tx 26 Relay1 NO 27 5 1C Digital Output 1 Programmable change over relay NO NC Potential free Maximum E cay 250Vac 8A 30Vdc 8A 28 Relay1 5 29 Relay2NO _ 2 30 2 C Digital Output 2 Programmable change over relay NO NC Potential free Maximum z 250Vac 8A 30Vdc 8 lt 31 Relay2 NC 9 32 Relay3NO 5 33 Relav3 C Digital Output 3 Programmable change over relay NO NC Potential free Maximum y 250Vac 8A 30Vdc 8A 34 Relay3 NC 34 CONNECTION TERMINALS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 7 DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD 7 1 Keypad Unit Description The display of the SD700 is removable for remote installation as the illustration shows There are three leds on the display which indicate the drive operational status one LCD screen with 4 lines of 16 characters each and keys for control and parameter setting STATUS
214. cables 0 V Insulation Megger check between and W and join them terminals of output circuit together Check the More than 5 gger yp resistance m 500V and ground terminal resistance between this join and ground Note Long life of the main components above indicated is based on a continuous operation for the stipulated load These conditions can change according to the environment conditions FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 319 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 13 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 13 1 Start Stop Commands and Speed Reference by Keypad 13 1 1 Parameters Configuration arameter LANG ENGLISH 1 4 Language selection ENGLISH PROG STANDARD 1 7 Program activation STANDARD G2 1 Motor rated current G2 2 Motor rated voltage i H 62 3 Motor rated power 62 4 Motor rpm G2 5 Cosine Phi 2 6 Motor frequency Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt 20 4009 7 MTR COOL 40 G2 7 Motor cooling at zero speed Self cool motor gt 40 Force cooled motor gt 100 G3 References LOCAL 5 Reference will be determined by keypad and is set in 1 REF1 SPD LOCAL G3 1 Speed reference source 1 C3 3 Local Speed Reference 3 LOCAL SPD 100 100 G4 Inputs 54 1 Digital Inputs gt LOCAL Drive control is done by keypad Y YES Enables reset by keypad 13 2 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Refer
215. ciated to AO2 27 s 27 27 S Voltage applied to the motor phases Phases ied to the motor phases Phases ied to the motor phases Phases ied to the drive Phases RS ied to the drive Phases ST 0 0 400 0 to 32760 Frequency Real Value Read only Phases RS Modbus Read only Value 10 Frequency Real Value Read only Phases ST Modbus Value 10 Frequency Real Value Phases RT Modbus Value 10 8192 10096 of motor rated speed Real Value Modbus Value 10 8192 10096 of motor rated torque Real Value Modbus Value 10 Real Value Modbus Value Real Value Modbus Value 10 8192 10096 of motor rated speed Real Value Modbus Value 8192 10096 of motor temperature 110 Trip Real Value Phase U Real Value Phase V Real Value Phase W Real Value Phases UV Real Value Phases VW Real Value Phases UW Real Value Phases RS Real Value Phases ST Real Value Phases RT Modbus Value Real Value Modbus Value 1000 Real Value Modbus Value 1000 8192 100 Maximum range of the AI1 8192 100 Maximum range of the 12 Real Value Modbus Value 1000 Real Value Modbus Value 1000 8192 100 Maximum range of the AO1 8192 100 Maximum range of the AO2 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only R
216. ciated to the Output Relay 3 The relay is configured with the option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL and free configuration is not allowed for it TO ENABLE FIXED PUMP ASSOCIATED TO ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 4 ENABLE PUMP4 To enable the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 pump 4 N Y See Function for additional information N YES 42148 0 to 1 YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 279 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows setting enabling or disabling the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 If this parameter is set to Y when activating pump control in parameter G1 7 gt Program activation option PUMP and configuring one digital input parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with option 55 gt FIX PUMP4 FLT the Analogue Output 1 is configured with option 27 gt MACRO PUMP to control fixed pumps If the pump associated to this analogue output is not required we recommend you disable it from this parameter In this way the analogue output can be configured for other uses N gt NO To disable the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 This analogue output is configured with the option 00 gt NONE and free configuration is allowed for it Y gt YES To enable the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 This analogue output is configured with
217. cted X PTC Connected 0 PTC Not Connected SV1 12 MOTOR TEMPERATURE Screen Motor Temp 0 0 Units motor heat Modbus address 40173 Modbus range 8192 100 of the motor temperature Read Write Read Only Description It shows the estimated motor temperature A level of 110 will cause an F25 trip motor overload VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 45 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 9 2 Parameters SV 2 Drive Visualization SV2 1 VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE DRIVE Screen 390 390 390V Units V Modbus address 40183 4 Phases RS 40184 Phases ST 40185 gt Phases RT Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value Read Write Read Only Description It shows the input instantaneous voltage applied to the drive RS ST RT SV2 2 AVERAGE INPUT VOLTAGE TO THE DRIVE Screen Inp Vol 390V Units V Description It shows the average input voltage to the drive SV2 3 FREQUENCY OF THE INPUT VOLTAGE TO THE DRIVE Screen 50 0 50 0 50 0Hz Units Hz Modbus address 40159 3 Phases RS 40160 gt Phases ST 40161 Phases RT Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the frequency of the input voltage to the drive SV2 4 DC LINK VOLTAGE OF THE DRIVE Screen Bus vol 540V Units Vdc Modbus address 40171 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value Read Write Read Only Description It shows DC Link voltage of the drive SV2 5 IGBT TEMPERATURE Screen IGBT Temp 23 C Units
218. ctive relay is activated See group G9 COMPARATORS 20 2 Relay is activated if the alternative acceleration deceleration ramps are being used These alternative ramps are set 55 3 Acceleration ramp 2 and 55 4 gt Deceleration ramp 2 and are selected through one of the digital inputs option 14 ACC DEC 2 in parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by means of the output function of one of the comparators option 09 ACC DEC 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 1 to G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 3 21 gt REFERENCE 2 Relay is activated if reference 2 G3 2 Reference source 2 for speed has been selected through one of the digital inputs option 15 gt REFERENCE 2 in parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by means of the output function of one of the comparators option 10 gt REFERENCE 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 1 to G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 3 22 gt STOP 2 Relay is activated if stop mode 2 G7 2 is being used Stop mode 2 is selected through one of the digital inputs option 19 gt STOP 2 in parameter G4 1 5 gt
219. dbus range 0 to 9 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the units of measurement for reading the flow G4 4 2 FLOWMETER CONFIGURATION Screen 2 Pls s 1001 5 Extended info LIQU AMOUNT PULS Description Flowmeter configuration Range 0 to 32760 Flow units Default value 1001 5 Set on run YES Modbus address 40582 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the amount of the fluid per pulse received For example if setting is 100l s default value and the present flow is 500l s 5 pulses per second will be received G4 4 3 MAXIMUM RANGE OF FLOWMETER Screen 3 Rng 10001 5 Extended info FLOW MAX RANGE Description Maximum range of flowmeter Range 0 to 32760 Flow units Default value 100018 Set run YES Modbus address 40583 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the maximum range of the flowmeter It is used to calculate the reset level of the flow control algorithm The percentage set G25 10 4 gt Flow percentage to reset algorithm is linked to the value set in this parameter For example if 100 units are set as maximum range in this parameter and we want that the reset level of the flow algorithm is below 30 units then G25 10 4 should be set to 30 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 113 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 5 Group 5 G5 Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps G5 1 ACCELERATION RAMP 1 Screen 1 ACCE1
220. ding to the application requirements 7 2 MREF 2 20 0 614 2 Multi reference 2 420 0 a NS setting the setpoint 2 value To be set according to the application requirements 5 30 0 Allows setting the setpoint 3 value for the drive PBR 3590 0 set according to the application requirements 4 MREF 4 40 0 G144 Multi reference 4 40 0 Allows setting the setpoint 4 value for the drive be set according to the application requirements B 7 50 0 Allows setting the setpoint 5 value for the drive SUA set according to the application requirements s 2 60 0 Allows setting the setpoint 6 value for the drive set according to the application requirements S gt 7 MREF 7 470 0 6147 Multi reference 7 19 0 M IONS setpoint suo tor the ON be set according to the application requirements 13 4 2 Connections Drawing 7 MTR COOL 40 otor cooling at zero speed Terminals 1 and 2 start stop command NO status Terminals 1 and 5 multi reference A NO status Terminals 1 and 6 multi reference M NO status Terminals 1 and 7 multi reference B NO status COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 323 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS SPEED REF Digital Input 4 Digital Input 5 Digital Input 6 Multi reference A Multi reference M Multi
221. dress 40462 Modbus range 0 to 2 Read Write YES Function It modifies the performance of the drive when input power drops while motor is running according to the selected option 0 NO FAULT No action will be done by the drive 1 gt FAULTS Drive will trip because of fault F11 VIN LOSS 2 gt STOP Drive will not trip because of fault will try to control the motor stopping while DC Bus voltage level allows it G11 10 PTC MOTOR OPTION Screen 10 PTC EXT N Description To enable PTC motor option Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Modbus address 40462 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 181 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows user to enable or disable the PTC motor option A PTC sensor can be connected directly to the drive to detect high motor temperature terminals 8 and 9 on control board If PTC value is higher or equal than 1K5 10 a fault will be generated in the drive F40 EXT PTC On the other hand if the value decreases below 900 10 a fault will be generated too Options N gt NO PTC motor option is disabled Y gt YES PTC motor option is enabled G11 11 PUMP OVERLOAD LEVEL Screen 11 PUMP OV 20 0 Extended info PUMP OVERLOAD LV Description Pump overload level Range 0 0 3200A Default value 20 0A Set on run YES Modbus address 40289 Modbus range 0 to 32000 Read Wr
222. dy status Damage may occur to the motor and the torque variations can affect the load Current limit should work only when an overload occurs or due to excessive acceleration and deceleration values or because motor data details are entered incorrectly G10 6 TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF CURRENT LIMIT Screen 6 I LIM TO OFF Extended info TIMOUT MAX CURRE Description Trip time because of current limit Range 0 to 60s OFF Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40453 Modbus range 0 to 600 610 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the trip time because of current limit has been reached This parameter provides with the possibility of tripping the drive automatically if current limit set in G10 5 has been reached during a time set in this parameter DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 175 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G10 7 ALTERNATIVE CURRENT LIMIT Screen 71 MAX2 Extended info MAX CURRENT 2 Description Alternative current limit Range 0 254 to 1 50 In Default value depending on the drive capacity Set on run YES Modbus address 40109 Modbus range 2048 to 12288 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the alternative output current limit Motor current will be within this programmed limit When this protection is active the drive status of current limitation ILT is displayed Note In normal operation status avoid adjusting values very lower than value of motor rated current since s
223. e 100 Set on run YES Modbus address 42087 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a value for underload speed above which the second detection condition to activate the protection is fulfilled This parameter operates together with parameters G11 15 gt Underload curren and G11 17 gt Delay time to activate underload protection See Function in parameter G11 14 gt To enable underload protection to obtain information about the setting of underload parameters 184 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G11 17 DELAY TIME TO ACTIVATE UNDERLOAD PROTECTION Screen 17 ULD DELY 10s Extended info UNDERLOAD DELAY Description Delay time to activate underload protection Range 0 9995 Default value 10s Set on run YES Modbus address 42088 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time to activate the underload protection The drive will wait for this time before activating the protection and then will stop This parameter operates together with parameters G11 15 gt Underload current and G11 16 gt Underload speed See Function in parameter 511 14 gt To enable underload protection to obtain information about the setting of underload parameters DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 185 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 12 Group 12 G12 Auto Reset G12 1 AUTO RESET Sc
224. e Input 1 SV3 4 AVERAGE VALUE OF THE ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen ANLG IN2 0 0V Units V or mA Modbus address 40187 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 1000 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the value of the Analogue Input 2 SV3 5 REFERENCE VALUE OF THE ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen AIN2 Refr 0 00 Units bottom scale Al2 Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Description 40191 8192 100 maximum range of the Analogue Input 2 Read Only It shows the value or the PID reference proportional to the Analogue Input 2 signal 48 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SV3 6 VALUE OF THE SENSOR 2 ASSOCIATED TO THE Al2 Screen AIN 2 S 0 00Bar Units Engineering units Modbus address 40263 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the value of sensor 2 associated to the Analogue Input 2 SV3 7 ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 VALUE Screen ANL OUT1 4 0 Units V or mA Modbus address 40192 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 1000 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the value of Analogue Output 1 SV3 8 VALUE OF THE MAGNITUDE ASSOCIATED TO AO1 Screen AOUT1 Refer 0 0 Units associated magnitude Modbus address 40194 Modbus range 8192 100 maximum range of the Analogue Output 1 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the magnitude value associated to the Analogue Output 1 speed current
225. e fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 3 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 70 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42317 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 3 set in parameter G25 1 7 Local setpoint for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 258 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 4 22 STOP SPEED 4 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 22 SPD4of 70 096 FPUMP STP SPEED4 Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 4 0 0 to 250 70 0 YES 42318 0 to 20480 YES It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 4 set in parameter G25 1 8 Local setpoint 4 for PID See Function in parameter G25
226. e in the pressure switch the fault F72 IN PRESS SW will be produced Note The fault F72 is only produced if there is some output relay configured with the option 80 PRIMING PUMP parameters G8 1 1 68 1 5 and G8 1 9 and some digital input configured with the option 69 PRESSUR SWITC parameter G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 283 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 20 16 Subgroup 25 10 525 10 Flow Limitation Algorithm G25 10 1 FLOW READING SOURCE Screen 1 FLOW SEL PULSE Description Flow reading source Range AI2 PULSE See Function for additional information Default value PULSE Set on run YES Modbus address 42141 Modbus range 0 to2 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the source to introduce the PID setpoint of the instantaneous flow Selection options 2 Reference signal PID setpoint introduced through Analogue Input 1 AI2 Reference signal PID setpoint introduced through Analogue Input 2 PULSE 2 Reference signal PID setpoint introduced by means of a pulse input connected to one Multi function Digital Input parameter G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 option 51 FLOW PULSE See Subgroup 54 4 Pulse Input for additional information G25 10 2 MAXIMUM ALLOWED FLOW Screen 2 MAX FLOW 10001 5 Extended info MAX ALLOWED FLOW Description Value of maximum allowed flow Range 0 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 1000l s Set on run YES M
227. e local setpoint 8 for PID Multi reference 8 For additional details check parameter G25 1 12 gt Local setpoint 8 for PID SV5 22 TIME FOR AUTOMATIC STOP Screen T AutOFF OFF Units Hours Modbus address 42044 Modbus range 0 999 Read Write YES Description Time for Automatic Stop For additional details check parameter G25 1 13 SV5 23 REMAINING TIME FOR AUTOMATIC STOP Screen TIME OFF OFF Units Minutes Modbus address 42356 Modbus range 0 6000 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the remaining time in minutes for the automatic stopping of the system SV5 24 MAXIMUM FLOW LEVEL Screen MAX flow 10001 5 Units Engineering units Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Description 42143 0 32760 YES It allows setting a level for the maximum flux as in parameter G25 10 2 gt Maximum allowed flow VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 57 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS SV5 25 RESET LEVEL FOR THE FLOW CONTROL ALGORITHM Screen RESET LEVL 100 Units maximum range of sensor Modbus address 42145 Modbus range 0 100 Read Write YES Description It allows setting a reset level for the flux control algorithm as in parameter G25 10 4 gt Flow percentage to reset algorithm SV5 26 FLOW LEVEL FOR SLEEP MODE Screen SLEP FLO 0 01 6 Units Engineering units Modbus address 42324 Modbus range 0 32760 Read Write YES Description It allows setting a flo
228. e ramp 1 of reference decrease for motorized potentiometer function This function is configured in G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration with the option 4 MOTORIZED POT or 5 9 ERASAB POT Additionally it is necessary to set G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed or G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with the option depending on the selected source is 1 or 2 With this function user can introduce the speed reference by means of two push buttons connected to the digital inputs DI5 up or increase the speed reference and DI6 down or decrease the speed reference While we press Down push button we can decrease the speed by applying up to two different ramps previously set ramps 1 and 2 of reference decrease The ramp change is set in parameter G5 11 gt Speed for ramp change with motorized potentiometer If G5 11 is set to OFF any ramp change will not be done In this case the drive will search the reference speed by only applying the ramp 1 for reference decrease of motorized potentiometer set in this parameter Setting is realized in deceleration units decrease in of speed per second See figure 10 24 G5 9 RAMP 2 OF REFERENCE INCREASE FOR MOTORIZED POTENTIOMETER Screen 9 INC2 1 0 6 Extended info MOTO POT INC2 Description Ramp 2 of reference increase for motorized potentiometer function Range 0 01 650 5 Default value 1 0 s Set on run YES Modbus address 40
229. e to excessive starting cycles IRRIGATOR FAULT The drive has tripped due to a fault in the irrigation equipment which has been detected in the digital input configured in that option LIMITING FLOW The drive is limiting the speed to limit the flow PUMP STOP The drive has received the stop command SLEPT NO DEMAND The drive is in sleep mode because there is no flow demand BYPASSING SPEED The drive is forcing the speed after starting or stopping some of the fixed pumps SETPOINT RAMP Setpoint ramp activated PIPE FILLING The drive is running at reduced speed because Pipe Fill function is active COMPLETED The time of automatic stop has expired and the drive is stopped JOCKEY PUMP ON The Jockey pump is running PRIMING PUMP ON The Priming pump suction filling is connected PRESSU SWITCH ON The pressure switch is open VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 63 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS The different parameters of the SD700 are displayed in the alphanumeric LCD These parameters are organized in groups G1 to G25 To access to the parameters or sub groups which are in a lower level press the C key When you have accessed the desired parameter this parameter will be shown as either a numerical value or a list of possible options Programming Line E SDRIV T
230. ead only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only MODBUS COMMUNICATION 299 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Address Screen Description ModbusRange LSB 40196 SV3 11 Status of Digital Inputs Read only BIT6 PTC 001 BIT 0 R1 Range from 0 to 1 40197 SV3 12 Status of Output Relays Read only 2 R3 Range from 0 to 1 9 40203 SV48 PID error value Read only s 0 40204 SV46 PID reference value Read only 8192 100 Maximum range of he Analogue Input 40205 5 47 PID feedback value Read only 8192 100 Maximum range of he Analogue Input 40206 5 44 Read only Real Value Modbus Value 40209 42 Drive rated current Read only 40210 8 43 Drive rated voltage Read only pub 40218 5 1 11 Motor connection Read only 0101 STATUS General status 40219 LINE First field of the first display line Read oniy 40232 5 4 9 Status of comparators Comparator 1 Read only 40233 5 4 9 Status of comparators Comparator 2 Read only 40234 5 4 9 Status of comparators Comparator 3 Read only 40235 SV4 1 Actual fault Read only Fault number Real Value Modbus 40240 SV2 6 Drive temperature Read only Value 10 40242 64
231. ed in the following table Code Name Cause 01 Illegal function The function code received by the slave is out of range The range of valid function code is the code 3 and 16 02 Illegal data address Data address received by the slave is out of range 03 Illegal data value Data value received by the slave is out of range 06 Busy rejected message The slave cannot execute the action required by the master immediately 07 Acknowledgement The required action cannot be executed 312 MODBUS COMMUNICATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 12 FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS When a fault occurs the SD700 will stop the motor and show the generated fault on the display You can display this fault in the programming line lower line while motor current and the speed values at the moment of the fault are displayed in the upper line It is possible to navigate through the additional display lines to access other status parameters without resetting the fault These additional status parameters offer further information about the moment at which the fault occurred Additionally the FAULT led will blink and the fault message will be displayed until the fault is remedied and the drive is reset Fault Messages It shows the faults of the drive In the upper line are displayed the conditions at trip moment stant SD70ITCO0021AI Figure 11 1 Fault displaying Programming Line 12 1 Descriptio
232. ed pumps CAVITATION PAUSE will be displayed Once elapsed the delay time after pause the drive will start FAULT 2 It will generate a fault and next fixed pumps will be stopped In this case the visualization will be F68 CAVIT UNDERL 266 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 6 4 CAVITATION CURRENT Screen 4 CAV CURR Extended info CAVITATION CURRE Description Cavitation current Range 0 2 to 1 50 In Default value This value depends on the drive capacity Set on run YES Modbus address 42086 Modbus range 0 to 12288 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the cavitation current below which the first detection condition to activate the protection is fulfilled This parameter operates together with parameters G25 6 5 Cavitation speed and G25 6 6 gt Delay time to activate cavitation protection See Function in parameter G25 6 2 gt To enable cavitation protection to obtain information about the setting of cavitation parameters G25 6 5 SPEED CAVITATION Screen 5 SPED 100 Extended info CAVITATION SPEED Description Cavitation speed Range 0 095 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Modbus address 42087 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the cavitation speed above which the second detection condition to activate the protection is fulfilled This parameter operates together with paramete
233. ed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 Start speed for the fixed pumps and the PID error G25 3 3 gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps Note If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figures 10 47 and 10 48 G25 3 5 DELAY TIME TO START FIXED PUMP 2 RELAY 2 Screen 5 FP T2 ON 10s Extended info FIX PMP2 STR DLY Description Delay time to start the fixed pump 2 Relay 2 Range OFF 0 6000s Default value 10s Set on run YES Modbus address 42065 Modbus range 0 to 60000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Relay 2 At the moment of starting the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 Start speed for the fixed pumps and the PID error G25 3 3 gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps Note If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figures 10 47 and 10 48 G25 3 6 DELAY TIME TO START FIXED PUMP 3 RELAY 3 Screen 6 FP T3 ON 10s Extended info FIX PMP3 STR DLY Description Delay time to start the fixed pump 3 Relay 3 Range OFF 0 6000s Default value 10s Set on run YES Modbus address 42066 Modbus range 0 to 60000 Read Wri
234. ed with certain limits of voltage 93 68 CEE Modification of Directive 73 23 CEE 89 336 CEE Electromagnetic Compatibility 92 31 CEE Modification of Directive 89 336 CEE 93 68 CEE Modification of Directive 89 336 CEE References of the harmonized technical norms applied under the Low Voltage Directive References Title UNE EN 50178 1998 Electronic equipment for use in power installations References of the harmonized technical norms applied under the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive References Title UNE EN 61800 3 1998 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods UNE EN 61800 3 A11 2002 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods Paterna September 3 2005 David Salvo Executive Director POWER ELECTRONICS www power electronics com 24 Hours Technical Assistance 365 days a year HEAD OFFICE C Leonardo da Vinci 24 26 Parque Tecnol gico 46980 Paterna Valencia Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 34 96 131 82 01 SPANISH BRANCHES ARAGON Y LA RIOJA CATALUNA CENTRO LEVANTE NORTE SUR CANARIAS C Madre Rafols 2 Edificio Aida 9 Ofic 4 50004 ZARAGOZA Tel 34 976 282 016 Fax 34 976 435 862 Avda de la Ferrer a 86 88 08110 MONTCADA REIXAC BARCELONA Tel 34 93 575 33 22 Fax 34 93 564
235. elay 2 Relay 2 has one normally open contact terminals 29 30 and another normally closed contact terminals 30 31 See figure 10 31 N 3 NO No inversion Y gt YES Inversion of relay logical function G8 1 9 SELECTION OF RELAY 3 CONTROL SOURCE Screen 9 SEL RELAY 3 05 Description Selection of the control source for the Relay 3 Range 00 32 Default value 05 Set on run NO Modbus address 40370 Modbus range 0 to 32 Read Write YES Function It allows configuring the operation of the Relay 3 See parameter G8 1 1 gt Selection of Relay 1 control source to obtain information about the configuration options G8 1 10 RETARDO A LA CONEXI N DEL REL 3 Screen 10 T R3 0 05 Extended info R3 ACTIVAT DELAY Description ON delay time for the Relay 3 Range 0 0 9995 Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40371 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set a delay time before activating the Relay 3 If during this time the activation condition disappears the relay will be not activated 142 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G8 1 11 OFF DELAY TIME FOR RELAY 3 Screen 11 T R3 OFF 0 0s Extended info R3 DEACTIV DELAY Description OFF delay time for the Relay 3 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40372 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set a delay time before deactivating the Relay 3
236. en 5 INITIALISE 0 Description Parameters initialize to default values Range 0 3 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set on run NO Function It allows selecting the parameters that we desire to initialize back to the factory default values factory settings Options description 0 gt NO INIT Any parameter is initialized 1 gt USR PRMTR User parameters are only initialized this is all of the parameters groups except for the groups G2 MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA and G19 FINE TUNING 2 MTR PRMTR Motor data are only initialized this is parameters of the groups G2 and G19 3 gt ALL PRMTR All parameters of the drive are initialized 82 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G1 6 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function G1 7 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function TO HIDE SOME CONFIGURATION MENUS 6 SHORT Menu NO To hide some configuration menus NO YES NO NO When this parameter is active configuration menus are hidden Groups G1 OPTIONS MENU G10 LIMITS and Visualization groups are only visible PROGRAM ACTIVATION 7 PROG STANDARD Program activation STANDARD PUMP STANDARD NO It allows selecting additional functionalities If option PUMP is selected the extended functionality for the pump control G25 PUMP CONTROL will be available The group G25 will be hidden if the pu
237. en strikes and oscillations are observed during the motor starting Nevertheless do not to modify this value unnecessarily since the motor operation will be affected G19 2 7 CURRENT LIMIT FACTOR Screen 7 I SLIP 2 0 Extended info I SLIP COMPENSAT Description Current limit factor Range 0 0 20 0 Default value 2 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 40508 Modbus range 0 to 1638 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the current limit factor It modifies the speed by reducing the output frequency to keep the output current within a controllable margins display shows the warning message ILT Adjusting this parameter can improve the stability of the current limit function considering the motor slip Note We only recommend setting this value when limitation current action is unstable Usually this value must be set to the motor rated slip A low value will improve the stability although the current limit action will operate earlier G19 2 9 INITIAL FREQUENCY Screen 9 STR FRQ 0 0 Extended info START FREQUENCY Description Starting initial frequency Range 0 0 100 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40594 Modbus range 0 to 8192 Read Write YES Function It allows setting an initial frequency that will be applied at the moment of the drive starting DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 213 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G19 2 10 FREQUENCY V Hz CHANGE Screen 10 V H BREK OFF E
238. ence by Analogue Input 13 2 1 Parameters Configuration G1 Options Menu 1 4 Language selection 1 7 Program activation Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt 20 4 009 7 MTR COOL 40 otor cooling at zero speed Self cool motor gt 40 Force cooled motor gt 100 G3 References LOCAL gt Reference will be introduced by keypad and is set in 1 REF1 SPD LOCAL G3 1 Speed reference source 1 G3 3 Local Speed Reference 2 REF2 SPD LOCAL G3 2 Speed reference source 2 Reference will be introduced by Analogue Input 1 3 LOCAL SPD 100 G3 3 Local Speed Reference 100 320 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 arameter Description G4 Inputs 54 1 Digital Inputs 1 CNTROL MODE1 2 G4 1 1 Main Control Mode 2 REMOTE Drive control is done through control terminals 4 DIGIT 1 MODE 1 6414 Digital Inputs configuration 1 gt ALL PROGRAMMABLE all digital inputs can be individually selection configured by the user 5 DIGITL IN 1 05 04 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 05 gt Start Stop Allows the start stop command to be given by a configuration switch G4 1 6 Multi function Digital Input 2 15 gt Reference 2 It allows selecting the alternative speed 6 DIGITL IN 2 15 configuration reference programmed 63 2 13 2 2 Connections drawing Terminals 1 and 2 start stop command NO status Term
239. ent Average voltage and 3 phase motor voltage Average input voltage and 3 phase input voltage Speed Torque Power Power factor of motor Relay status Digital input status PTC status Output comparator status Value of analogue inputs and sensors Analogue output value Motor overload status and drive overload status IGBT temperature Motor output frequency Fault history 6 last faults Local from keypad Remote from digital inputs Serial communications Type Length Connection Alphanumeric Display Visualization Leds Removable 3 meters RJ45 4 lines of 16 characters LED ON Control board is energized LED RUN Motor receiving power supply from SD700 LED FAULT Blinking shows that a fault has occurred Keypad 6 control keys to program the drive start and stop reset Provided with independent memory Graphic Display Optional graphical display with 3 5 TFT touch screen Independent memory Real time clock Perpetual calendar CE UL cUL cTick Possibility of increasing length Consult with Power Electronics TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS 19 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 5 DIMENSIONS 5 1 Dimensions of Frames 3 4 and 5 REFERENCE REFERENCE DIMENSIONS Tee 380 500V 550 690V H1 H2 wi w2 D D2 y1 2 y4 SD700605xxxx SD700526xxxx 8535 8385 3005 200 140 358 827 15 SD700755xxxx 80700626 8535 8385 3005 200 14
240. er G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 1 G9 2 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 2 or G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 3 or automatically by setting a changing speed G7 3 3 Changing speed for stop mode 128 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 07 4 START MODE Screen 4 START RAMP Description Start mode definition Range RAMP SPIN See Function for additional information Default value RAMP Set on run YES Modbus address 40002 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the main start mode of the motor Selection options RAMP 2 Drive will start by applying a frequency ramp to the motor until reaching the speed or setpoint value See figures 10 26 and 10 27 SPIN 2 In this mode drive searches the motor shaft speed and the output frequency of the drive is set to match with the actual motor speed From this point the motor is accelerated up to the reference speed This allows starting loads that are already rotating without braking the motor when the drive receives a start command by accelerating progressively up to reference speed See figure 10 26 If starting a load that are already rotating is required for example a fan in a conventional way several problems can appear due to the motor power supply starts from OHz to the reference frequency setpoint of speed This means that r
241. eration by decreasing the value of this parameter This parameter operates together with parameter G19 2 10 Frequency V Hz change See Function in parameter G19 2 10 for additional information G19 2 12 STABILIZE FACTOR IN DECELERATION Screen 12 STA F DC OFF Extended info STABILIZE F DEC Description Stabilize factor in deceleration Range 80 0 99 9 OFF 100 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40020 Modbus range 6554 to 8192 Read Write YES 214 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting a value as stabilize factor during deceleration Usually the instability of the system is reduced during the deceleration by decreasing the value of this parameter This parameter operates together with parameter G19 2 10 Frequency V Hz change See Function in parameter G19 2 10 for additional information G19 2 13 REGENERATION BUS VOLTAGE Screen 13 Vbus OFF Extended info REGEN BUS VOL Description Regeneration of bus voltage Range For VIN 400V 500V gt 625 to 799V OFF 800V For VIN 690V gt 950 to 1250V OFF 1251V Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40021 Modbus range For VIN 400V 500V 625 to 799 800 For VIN 690V gt 950 to 1250 1251 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a voltage value in order to remove over voltage fault If the setting of the previous parameters G19
242. es to read the content of 3 registers of a drive where the current used by each phase is The information that should be attached in the ask frame is the following one Data address of the drive Modbus function code 3 Registers reading Starting Data address Registers number for reading CRC 16 code The answer of the drive slave should contain the following fields Data address of the slave Modbus function code 3 Registers reading Bytes number for reading Bytes number 2 registers CRC 16 code Each register consists of 2 bytes 2x8bits 16 bits This one is the default length of all of the registers that form the SD700 MODBUS COMMUNICATION 293 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 11 2 1 1 Operation Example of Modbus Function Code 3 Registers Reading We suppose that we want to read the motor current nameplate data via communications This data corresponds to the parameter G2 1 1 CUR 00 00A The frame that should be transmitted is Modbus Modbus Function Starting Data Address Code Address 40282 0 0 0 03 0 00 2 0 0001 0 2493 We suppose that instantaneous current of the equipment is 8 2 Modbus value 82 decimal 0x52 Hexadecimal The answer of the slave will be Modbus Modbus Function Data address 20 Address Code Bytes Number 2110 CRC 16 0x0A 0x03 0x02 0x0052 0x9C78 1
243. escription OFF delay time for the Relay 1 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40364 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set a delay time before deactivating the Relay 1 If during this time the deactivation condition disappears the relay will be not deactivated this is the relay will follow activated G8 1 4 RELAY 1 INVERSION Screen 4 INVERT REL1 N Description Logic inversion of the Relay 1 Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run NO Modbus address 40365 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows user to invert the logic of the Relay 1 Relay 1 has one normally open contact terminals 26 27 and another normally closed contact terminals 27 28 N gt NO No inversion Y gt YES Inversion of relay logical function X2 CONNECTOR NO Contact Common RELAY 1 NC Contact NO Contact Common RELAY 2 NC Contact NO Contact Common RELAY 3 NC Contact Multifunction Relay Outputs 50700 0008 Figure 10 31 X2 connector Connections for the outputs relays 140 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G8 1 5 SELECTION OF RELAY 2 CONTROL SOURCE Screen 5 SEL RELAY 2 03 Description Selection of the control source for the Relay 2 Range 00 32 Default value 03 Set on run NO Modbus address 40366 Modbus range 0 to 32 Read Write Y
244. et run YES Modbus address 40314 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the activation value of the Comparator 2 output Output of Comparator 2 will be activated when source signal of Comparator 2 selected in G9 2 1 is higher than the value set in this parameter and additionally ON delay time set in G9 2 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figure 10 38 Note This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 2 is set to normal mode parameter G9 2 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 2 set to 0 gt Normal G9 2 4 LIMIT 2 FOR COMPARATOR 2 IN WINDOW MODE Screen 4 LIM 2 C2 100 Extended info C2 WINDOW LIMIT2 Description Limit 2 of the Comparator 2 in window mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Modbus address 40314 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows defining one of the limits to activate Comparator 2 in window mode Output of Comparator 2 will be activated when source signal of Comparator 2 selected in G9 2 1 is within the limit 1 set in G9 2 5 and the limit 2 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 2 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 Note
245. eter the No Flow Switch can generate a stopping by PAUSE or by FAULT if the other conditions above mentioned are fulfilled On the contrary when the motor speed is lower than the speed set in this parameter the Flow switch can generate that the drive goes in sleep mode whenever the other needed conditions to activate the sleep mode are fulfilled Therefore when the drive speed is lower than the speed set in this parameter the equipment will check the setting of the parameter G25 4 10 gt enable No Flow input to sleep the drive If this parameter has been set to Y then the equipment will 90 to sleep if the other conditions to sleep are fulfilled DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 271 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 6 18 BYPASS TIME FOR FLOW SWITCH Screen 18 NO FLbyp 0 05 Extended info NO FLO BYPAS DLY Description Bypass time for No Flow switch Range 0 0 to 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 42350 Modbus range 0 to 9990 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the bypass time for the No Flow switch During this time No Flow input is ignored This time has only sense elapsed from the starting of the drive whenever the pipe filling process is not activated If the filling option is has been activated then the drive will check the setting of the parameter G25 6 16 gt To enable No Flow switch during pipe filling process before I
246. eve inverse scaling In this way as the magnitude taken as reference in G8 2 6 Mode selection for Analogue Output 2 increases the output will decrease and vice versa See figure 10 32 G8 2 9 HIGH RANGE SELECTION OF ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen 9 2 RNG 100 Extended info MAX RANG ANAOUT2 Description High range selection of Analogue Output 2 Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Modbus address 40350 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the maximum level of the Analogue Output 2 Maximum value setting can be lower than the value of minimum level This allows the user to achieve inverse scaling In this way as the magnitude taken as reference in G8 2 6 gt Mode selection for Analogue Output 2 increases the output will decrease and vice versa See figure 10 32 148 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G8 2 10 FILTER SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen 10 FILTER 2 OFF Extended info FILTER ANAOUTPU2 Description Filter selection for the Analogue Output 2 Range OFF 0 0 20 05 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40351 Modbus range 0 to 200 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting a filter for the Analogue Output 2 value and in the same time setting a value Sometimes if the analogue signal appears slightly unstable improved stability and response can be achieved with the addition
247. everal effects torque boost settings fast acceleration and deceleration can produce false results We do not recommend that current limit works constantly in applications when the motor is at steady status Damage may occur to the motor and the torque variations can affect the load Current limit should work only when an overload occurs or due to excessive acceleration and deceleration values or because motor data details are entered incorrectly G10 8 CHANGE SPEED FOR 2 ALTERNATIVE CURRENT LIMIT Screen 8 MI2 brSP OFF Extended info MAX CURR BRK SPD Description Change speed to alternative current limit Range OFF 0 1 to 250 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40110 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the speed level to change from current limit 1 set in G10 5 to current limit 2 set in G10 7 Additionally it is possible to select the alternative current limit 2 by using one digital input parameters G4 1 5 2 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration 6 set to option 23 gt CURRENT LIMI2 G10 9 TORQUE LIMIT Screen 9 TOR 150 Extended info MAX TORQUE Description Torque limit Range 250 to 250 Default value 150 Set on run YES Modbus address 40107 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES 176 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 70
248. f speed bypass During this time the drive speed will be forced to the value set in parameter G25 5 3 gt Speed bypass at the stopping of fixed pumps to avoid under pressure situations in the system at the stopping of a fixed pump See figure 10 50 264 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 12 Subgroup 25 6 S25 6 Protection G25 6 1 DELAY TIME AFTER PROTECTION PAUSE Screen 1 PAUSE DEL 20s Extended info DELAY AFTER PAUS Description Delay time after protection pause Range 0 999s Default value 20s Set on run YES Modbus address 42336 Modbus range 0 to 9990 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a value of delay time before the drive starts after stopping by protection pause This delay time starts elapsing once the cause that produced the pause disappears For example we suppose that a pause had been produced due to an over pressure situation Once the over pressure condition disappears the delay time set in this parameter starts elapsing and when it is elapsed the drive will start again This delay time will be applied to all of the pauses High pressure analogue feedback if option PAUSE is selected in parameter G25 6 12 gt Response from over pressure Cavitation if option PAUSE is selected in parameter G25 6 3 gt Response from cavitation No Flow Switch if option PAUSE is selected in parameter G25 6 15 gt Response from No Flow situa
249. f this parameter is set to Y then the option of No Flow during the pipe filling process is active In this case the bypass time will be counted although pipe filling process is active On the contrary if this parameter is set to N then the option of No Flow during the pipe filling process is not activated In this case the bypass time will start elapsing after pipe filling process finishes G25 6 19 TRIP DELAY TIME BECAUSE OF FLOW Screen 19 NO FLdly 0 05 Extended info NO FLOW FLT DLY Description Trip delay time because of Flow detection Range 0 0 to 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 42351 Modbus range 0 to 9990 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the delay time from the Flow switch is opened to the drive stops In case of the bypass delay time G25 6 18 is also configured both delay times will be considered G25 6 20 CYCLE TIME OF THE DRIVE Screen 20 CYCLE TI 0m Extended info CYCLE RESET DELY Description Cycle time of the drive Range OFF 0 to 99m Default value Set on run YES Modbus address 42353 Modbus range 0 to 99 Read Write YES 272 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting the time that must elapse from the drive stops to starts again for the cycle counter G25 6 21 is reset This protection is thought from situations where the drive has problems to keep the pre
250. follows N WARNING Do not remove the cover while the power is applied or the unit is in operation Otherwise electric shock could occur Do not run the drive with the front cover removed Otherwise you may get an electric shock due to the high voltage terminals or exposure of charged capacitors Do not remove the cover except for periodic inspections or wiring even if the input power is not applied Otherwise you may access the charged circuits and get an electric shock Wiring and periodic inspections should be performed at least 10 minutes after disconnecting the input power and after checking the DC Link voltage is discharged with a meter below 30VDC Otherwise you may get an electric shock Operate the switches with dry hands Otherwise you may get an electric shock Do not use cables with damaged insulation Otherwise you may get an electric shock Do not subject the cables to abrasions excessive stress heavy loads or pinching Otherwise you may get an electric shock SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS CAUTION Install the drive on a non flammable surface Do not place flammable material nearby Otherwise fire could occur Disconnect the input power if the drive gets damaged Otherwise it could result in a secondary accident or fire After the input power is applied or removed the drive will remain hot for a couple of minutes Touching hot parts may result i
251. for 5071580 5x 5071800 5x 5071140 6 5071420 6x 30 CONNECTION TERMINALS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 6 1 9 Frame 5 Connections 00 HEF 111213 BASE SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS TOP SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS SD70DTD00224AI Figure 6 9 Power connections location for SD70210 50 SD70275 50 00 CONNECTION TERMINALS 31 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 6 2 Control Connections The following figure shows the SD700 control board Although the control board is insulated galvanically for safety reasons it is recommended not change the wiring while the equipment is connected to the input power supply N CAUTION Changes of control wiring or bridges should be performed at least 10 minutes after disconnecting the input power and after checking the DC Link voltage is discharged with a meter below 30Vdc Otherwise you may get an electric shock Users access to the control board is via a series of terminals and plugs As standard the control board is fitted with terminals and plugs for control input and output connections display connection communication serial port RS232 RS485 communication USB port Optional boards can be fitted for additional control input SD70ITPO001CE outputs fibre optic input output encoder inputs serial communication interfaces dynamic braking control Figure 6 10 Control board of SD700 6 2 1 Connectors a
252. force the end of the pipe filling process changing the equipment from FILL status to setpoint ramp RAMP Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units SAFETY TIME FOR PIPE FILLING PROCESS Function Note G25 7 4 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function G25 7 5 Screen Note 4 FILL TIM 15m PFILL END DELAY Safety time for pipe filling process OFF 0 1 9999min 15m YES 42118 0 to 9999 YES It allows setting a safety time to force the end of pipe filling process The pressure level set in parameter G25 7 3 Pressure for the end of pipe filling process together with the time set in this parameter are the conditions to end the pipe filling process The condition that is fulfilled before pressure or time will force the end of the pipe filling process changing the equipment from FILL status to setpoint ramp RAMP If this time is set to 0 the drive will not execute the pipe filling process SETPOINT RAMP Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function Note 5 SPT RAMP 1 0Bar s Setpoint ramp 0 01 320 00 Engineering units s 1 0Bar s YES 42119 0 to 32000 YES It
253. frequency Hz Set according to motor nameplate Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt 20 7 MTR COOL 40 otor cooling at zero speed 5 DIGITL IN 1 50 G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration E G4 1 6 Multi function Digital Input 2 8 DIGITL IN 4 54 7 DIGITL IN 3 53 G4 1 7 Multi function Digital Input 3 configuration G4 1 8 Multi function Digital Input 4 configuration Self cool motor gt 40 Force cooled motor gt 100 64 Inputs 4 1 Digital Inputs 50 gt PMP START STP Automatic starting of the system 52 FIX PUMP1 FLT Detection of auxiliary pump 1 in fault status 53 gt FIX PUMP2 FLT Detection of auxiliary pump 2 in fault status 54 gt FIX PUMP3 FLT Detection of auxiliary pump in fault status 324 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 arameter Name Description CONTROL MODE 1 625 Pump Control 525 1 Setpoints 25 1 1 Control mode 1 Pumps The drive will start in pump control mode SETPT1 x xBar PID SETP LOCAL PID 12 m o 2 212 e 8 79 A n e o 79 A N z e e o e N c o m 79 z LN e e o 79 A e N o 13 FP erOFF 0 0 19 SPD1of 70 0 79 gt r A 2 25 1 5
254. g figure we can observe easily the behaviour of the comparator output for each operation mode DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 155 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS NORMAL MODE WINDOW MODE WINDOW MODE Limit 2 Limit 1 Limit 2 lt Limit 1 COMPARISON COMPAR T COMPAR SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL ON Condition Lim 2 Lim 1 OFF Condition Lim 1 Lim 2 Tr COMPARATOR COMPAR COMPAR OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT ON ON ON TIME OFF OFF Er ti b b SD7O0ITCCO016AI Figure 10 37 Operation modes of the comparators G9 1 3 ACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 1 IN NORMAL MODE Screen 3 SP C1 ON 100 Extended info C1 ACTIVAT LEVEL Description Activation value of Comparator 1 in normal mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Modbus address 40305 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the activation value of the Comparator 1 output Output of Comparator 1 will be activated when source signal of Comparator 1 selected in G9 1 1 is higher than the value set in this parameter and additionally ON delay time set in G9 1 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figure 10 38 Note This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 1 is set to normal mode parameter G9 1 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 1 set to 0 gt Normal 156 DESCRIPTION OF PROGR
255. ge selection of analogue output 1 gt G8 2 4 gt High range selection of analogue output 1 4 8 5 T G8 2 2 SD70ITCCO0013AI Figure 10 34 Example 2 Analogue Output 1 with format 10V DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 151 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Example 3 We want to configure Analogue Output 2 as 4 to 20mA output This analogue value represents the current of the motor the rated current of which is 20A with a consumption range from to 50A Set mode of Analogue Output 2 G8 2 6 to 02 CURRENT MOTOR motor current Select format for Analogue Output 2 G8 2 7 to 4 20mA Set minimum and maximum values high range and low range of the Analogue Output 2 scale in parameters G8 2 8 for low range and G8 2 9 for high range G8 2 8 gt 0 G8 2 9 gt 250 since 50A is 250 of motor rated current 20A Imax Imin Motor current Tinto Rngna Rngmin Where Imax Maximum current of Analogue Output 2 Imin gt Minimum current of Analogue Output 2 RNgmax Maximum current of the motor Rngmin 2 Minimum current of the motor lint 0 Output current when motor current is Replacing the values 20 4 20 4 10 4mA 50 0 With this setting Analogue Output 2 will supply 10 4mA when motor current is 20A G8 2 8 G8 2 9 0 20 250 G8 2 7 4 Format selection for analogue output 2 0A 12 5 25A 37 5 50A 68 2 8
256. gt ALWAYS OFF and free configuration is allowed for it Y gt YES To enable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 1 The relay is configured with the option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL and free configuration is not allowed for it TO ENABLE FIXED PUMP ASSOCIATED TO OUTPUT RELAY 2 2 ENABLE PUMP2 N To enable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 2 pump 2 N Y See Function for additional information N YES 42137 0 to 1 YES It allows setting enabling or disabling the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 2 If this parameter is set to Y when activating pump control in parameter G1 7 gt Program activation option PUMP and configuring one digital input parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with option 53 gt FIX PUMP2 FLT the Output Relay 1 is configured with option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL to control fixed pumps If the pump associated to this relay is not required we recommend you disable it from this parameter In this way the relay can be configured for other uses 278 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 9 3 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function G25 9 4 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write N gt
257. gt Low range selection of analogue output 2 G8 2 9 gt High range selection of analogue output 2 1 12 4mA 10 4mA 20mA G8 2 7 SD70ITCCO0014AI Figure 10 35 Example 3 Analogue Output 2 with format 4 20mA 152 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Example 4 Now we want to configure Analogue Output 2 as 0 to 20 output the analogue value of which represents the current of the previous motor with a rated current of 20A and a consumption range from 0A to 50A Set mode of Analogue Output 2 G8 2 6 to 02 CURRENT MOTOR motor current Select format for Analogue Output 2 in G8 2 7 to 0 20mA Set minimum and maximum values high range and low range of the Analogue Output 2 scale in parameters G8 2 8 for low range and G8 2 9 for high range G8 2 8 gt 0 0A G8 2 9 gt 250 since 50A is 250 of motor rated current 20A Then 2 50 0 Analogue Output 2 will supply 8mA when motor current is 20A G8 2 8 G8 2 9 anos of 0 20 250 68 2 7 gt Format selection for analogue output 2 0A 12 5 25A 37 5 50A G8 2 8 Low range selection of analogue output 2 q G8 2 9 gt High range selection of analogue output 2 t 10mA 8mA 27 0 20 G6 SD70ITCCO0015AI Figure 10 36 Example 4 Analogue Output 2 with format 0 20mA DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 153 SDRIVE
258. guration options G9 2 2 TYPE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 2 Screen 2 COMP 2 TYPE 0 Description Selection of Comparator 2 type Range 0 1 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40312 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the operation mode of the Comparator 2 Operation modes are 0 gt Normal Comparator 2 will be activated when the ON condition is given setting realized in G9 2 3 gt Activation value of Comparator 2 in normal mode and will be deactivated when the OFF condition is given setting realized in G9 2 7 Deactivation value of Comparator 2 in normal mode 1 gt Window Comparator 2 will be activated when signal is within the limit 1 setting realized in G9 2 5 gt Limit 1 for Comparator 2 in window mode and limit 2 setting realized G9 2 4 Limit 2 for Comparator 2 in window mode and additionally limit 2 is higher than limit 1 If limit 2 is lower than limit 1 logical function of comparator output will be inverted See figure 10 37 to observe the behaviour of the comparator output for each operation mode DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 163 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G9 2 3 ACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 2 IN NORMAL MODE Screen 3 SP C2 100 Extended info C2 ACTIVAT LEVEL Description Activation value of Comparator 2 in normal mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 S
259. he user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user The format of the Subnet Mask address is the following one A B C D Therefore the setting of this address is realized by introducing a value in each parameter that configure the complete address this is by assigning a value to each one of the 4 parameters from parameter G20 4 5 gt Subnet Mask address to parameter G20 4 8 Subnet Mask address DY G20 4 6 SUBNET MASK ADDRESS B Screen 6 SUBNET B 255 Description Subnet Mask address B Range 0 255 Default value 255 Set on run YES Modbus address 40379 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field B of the Subnet Mask address of the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 5 gt Subnet Mask address for additional information 220 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G20 4 7 SUBNET MASK ADDRESS C Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 7 SUBNET C 255 Subnet Mask address C 0 255 255 YES 40380 0 to 255 YES It allows setting the field C of the Subnet Mask address of the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 5 g
260. he output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 170 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G9 3 7 DEACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 3 IN NORMAL MODE Screen 7 SP OF 0 Extended info C3 DEACTIV LEVEL Description Deactivation value of Comparator 3 in normal mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40322 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the deactivation value of the Comparator 3 output Output of Comparator 3 will be deactivated when source signal of Comparator 3 selected in G9 3 1 is lower than the value set in this parameter and additionally OFF delay time set in G9 3 8 has elapsed If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears before elapsing OFF delay time the output of the comparator will be not deactivated See figure 10 38 Note This parameter is only displayed if Comparator 3 is set to normal mode parameter G9 3 2 gt Type selection for Comparator 3 set to 0 gt Normal G9 3 8 OFF DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 3 Screen 8 T OF 0 05 Extended info C3 DEACTIV DELAY Description OFF delay time to deactivate Comparator 3 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40325 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a timer to deactivate the output of the Comparator 3 When the deact
261. he standard program of the drive In case of any of these conditions occur the motor controlled by the drive will stop followed by the fixed pumps and the display will show the corresponding fault message Pause of the Pumps Program Certain protections can be configured to stop the drive temporary without tripping by fault For all of them there is only one time to start after the pause and this time will start once the cause which provoked the pause disappears The protections which can be set in this way are DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 225 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS o High Pressure Configurable at Pause mode or at Fault mode If it is set as Pause the displayed message will be PRESSURE PAUS but if this is set to Fault the message will be 66 HI PRESSURE o No Flow Configurable at Pause mode or at Fault mode If it is set as Pause the displayed message will be NO PLOW PAUSE but if this is set to Fault the message will be 69 FLOW SWITCH o Cavitation Configurable at Pause mode or at Fault mode If it is set as Pause the displayed message will be CAVITATION PAUSE but if this is set to Fault the message will be 68 CAVIT UNDERL Note The pauses are not faults consequently the do not generate a fault code and they will not be stored in the fault history Faults of Pumps Program That means the drive or installation faults that have been configured from the pump program
262. ication Therefore we recommend do not modify this setting If this value is increased the system response is improved but system accuracy can be reduced slightly G25 2 7 ERROR OF PID REGULATOR Screen 7 PID ERR xx x Description Error of PID regulator Range 0 to 100 Default value Set on run Modbus address 42050 Modbus range Read Write Read Only Function It displays the difference between the value of PID setpoint source of which is set in G25 2 1 gt PID setpoint source and the value of the feedback signal of the process source of which is set in G25 2 3 gt PID feedback source in percentage This parameter is read only G25 2 8 ERROR OF PID REGULATOR IN ENGINEERING UNITS Screen 8 ERR xx xxkPa Description Error of PID regulator in engineering units Range 0 0 to 3276 Engineering units Default value Set on run Modbus address 42051 Modbus range Read Write Read Only 238 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It displays the difference between the value of PID setpoint source of which is set in G25 2 1 gt PID setpoint source and the value of the feedback signal of the process source of which is set in G25 2 3 3 PID feedback source in engineering units Bar kPa m s etc This parameter is read only G25 2 9 PID OUTPUT INVERSION Screen 9 PID INVERT N Description Inversion of the PID regulator output Range N Y
263. iguration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration Inch speed 3 is selected by combination of the two digital inputs configured as inch speed 1 and 2 INPUTS SPEED DIX DIY Inch speed 1 1 0 Inch speed 2 0 1 Inch speed 3 1 1 Note The activation of this function includes the start command Therefore this signal prevails over any other input configured as start SPEED 6152 STEADY SPEED 6153 T 51 6151 Tr SPEED WHEN DRIVE IS RUNNING TIME 6152 T 6153 T 6151 T 151 IS STOPPED z Y lt ke DIY 152 ON VAI DIX 151 c G15 1 gt Inch speed 1 151 G15 2 gt Inch speed 2 152 G15 3 gt Inch speed 3 153 SD70ITCC0035AI Figure 10 44 Operation of the SD700 according to the activation of the inch speeds through digital inputs DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 201 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G15 1 INCH SPEED 1 Screen 1 INCH1 0 0096 Extended info INCH SPEED 1 Description Inch speed 1 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 00 Set on run YES Modbus address 40092 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set a value as inch speed 1 For more information see chapter 10 15 G15 INCH SPEEDS and figure 10 44 G15 2 INCH SPEED 2 Screen 2 INCH2 0 00 E
264. ilter for the Analogue Input 1 Range OFF 0 0 20 0 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40274 Modbus range 0 to 200 Read Write YES Function It allows filtering the signal of the Analogue Input 1 By setting the value of this time constant we can eliminate possible instabilities in the value of the same ones due to noise wiring faults etc Note When applying a Low Pass filter to any analogue signal a delay time in the own signal is generated This delay time is the value of the configured time constant approximately DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 107 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 4 3 Subgroup 4 3 54 3 Analogue Input 2 G4 3 1 TO ENABLE SENSOR OF ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen 1 SENSOR 2 N Description It enables the sensor of the Analogue Input 2 Range N See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run NO Modbus address 40269 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows user to use the Analogue Input 2 and to access to the needed parameters for configuring the sensor See G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units up to G4 3 7 gt Maximum range of sensor 2 N 3 NO The analogue input will remain scaled in default units 96 Y YES The analogue input and any variables relating to the analogue input will be configured in the engineering units selected in G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units G4 3 2 SELECTION OF SENSOR 2 UNITS Screen 2 SE
265. ilter value Note Filter use can add a slight delay to the analogue output signal G8 2 6 MODE SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen 6 ANLG OUT2 02 Description Mode selection for the Analogue Output 2 Range 00 27 Default value 02 Set on run NO Modbus address 40347 Modbus range 0 to 27 Read Write YES Function It allows user to configure the Analogue Input 2 For this see parameter 58 2 1 gt Mode selection for Analogue Output 1 where different configuration options are listed and explained DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 147 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G8 2 7 FORMAT SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen 7 FORMT 2 4 20mA Description Format selection for the Analogue Output 2 Range 0 10V 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA Default value 4 20mA Set on run NO Modbus address 40348 Modbus range 0 to 3 Read Write YES Function It allows configuring the Analogue Output 1 in one of four possible formats according to the system requirements G8 2 8 LOW RANGE SELECTION OF ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen 8 MIN2 RNG 0 Extended info MIN RANG ANAOUT2 Description Low range selection of Analogue Output 2 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40349 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the minimum level of the Analogue Output 2 Minimum value setting can be higher than the value of maximum level This allows the user to achi
266. imum time set here If a start delay time has been set in G7 6 the drive will begin to count this time from the moment of receiving the start command If the start delay time elapses before this minimum time the drive will wait for this minimum time is elapsed to start If the minimum time elapses before the start delay time the drive will wait for the start delay time is elapsed to start In short the drive will wait for the time set in this parameter at least before starting DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 133 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS SPEED RUN 1 ti amp t t 5 5 COMMAND STOP i ti 6 6 t t COMMAND 22 SS SS t 1 t t b t 67 6 gt Start delay time 67 9 gt Delay time between stop and next start 5070 0033 Figure 10 28 Drive starting and stopping according to the parameters G7 6 G7 9 G7 10 RUN AFTER OCCURING POWER LOSS Screen 10 RUN AFTR VFL Y Description Run after occurring power loss Range N S See Function for additional information Default value Y Set on run YES Modbus address 40009 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the equipment to start automatically when input power is lost and restored immediately power supply loss or instant power supply loss Configuration options N 3 NO Drive will not start after recovering input power even if the
267. inals 1 and 3 alternative reference command NO status X1 CONNECTOR X2 CONNECTOR 24 Contact 5 011 05 Start Stop a 4 58 012 gt 15 Reference 2 8 NC Contact 3 8 Contact 2 5 5 Contact z 02 5 Motor Input Incase of trip relay will change over c Analogue Signal Ref 0 10Vdc 26 Common for Analogue Signal Power Supply for Analogue Signal 10Vdc 26mA Common Terminal Common Terminal 24Vdc 50700 0003 Figure 13 1 Start Stop commands by terminals and speed reference by analogue input Note Use screened cables for the controls and connect screen to ground COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 321 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 13 3 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by Motorized Potentiometer 13 3 1 Parameters Configuration LANG ENGLISH PROG STANDARD G2 Motor Nameplate Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt 20 Self cool motor gt 40 Force cooled motor 100 G3 References 1 REF1 SPD PMOT 63 1 Speed reference source 1 Motorized potentiometer with or without reference G4 Inputs 54 1 Digital Inputs 4 MOTORIZED POT It assigns the function of up and down speed reference to two of the digital inputs DI5 Up NO Contact and DI6 Down NC Contact Reference i
268. ing of the parameter G7 2 gt Stop mode 2 Activation of the input in this mode also acts as a Reset signal 04 gt STOP1 RESET Stop command in mode 1 from a push button with a normally closed contact NC according to the setting of the parameter G7 1 gt Stop mode 1 Activation of the input in this mode also acts as a Reset signal 05 gt START STOP It allows starting when closed and stopping when open 2 wires start stop NO 06 gt START RST STOP It allows starting when closed and stopping when open 2 wires start stop Activation of this input also acts as a fault reset NO 07 gt RESET Reset signal by push button NC 08 gt START INCH1 Start command and inch speed 1 programmed G15 1 gt Inch speed 1 taken as reference NO DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 97 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 09 gt START INCH2 Start command and inch speed 2 programmed in G15 2 gt Inch speed 2 taken as reference NO Note If two inputs configured with options 08 gt START INCH1 09 START INCH2 are activated simultaneously combination of Start Inch speed 3 is obtained Inch speed 3 is programmed in parameter G15 3 gt Inch speed 3 10 gt INV SPEED It causes a deceleration of the motor until motor is stopped and inverts the rotation direction NO Note Rotation inversion must be enabled in parameter G10 11
269. ion of cavitation protection in parameter G25 6 1 From this moment on the drive will try to start again If three previous conditions are fulfilled the drive will stop the pump to protect it from cavitation status no water Note To adjust cavitation parameters Power Electronics recommend whenever it is possible follow the next steps If the load is variable adjust the application for the most frequent load value for example select a middle consumption for an irrigator water pump Start the drive at manual speed Set the drive speed to the minimum functional speed minimum flow in case of pumps or to the minimum operation level of your application Make a note of the output current and the motor speed Set the cavitation speed to the speed that you have made a note before Set the cavitation current to 6 less than the current that you have made note before Set the desired activation time for example 10s Check the system and if it is necessary set the parameters for an optimum response again G25 6 3 RESPONSE FROM CAVITATION Screen 3 CAV MODE FAULT Description Response of the drive from cavitation situation Range PAUSE FAULT See Function for additional information Default value FAULT Set on run YES Modbus address 42344 Modbus range 1 to2 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the response of the drive from cavitation situation PAUSE 2 It will generate that the drive stops and next fix
270. ions G25 3 1 1 LP Pon 0 0Bar lt 0 0 3276Bar G25 3 2 2 FP SpON 90 S 250 to 250 G25 3 3 3 FP ErON 10 0 lt OFF 0 to 200 G25 3 4 4 1 ON 10s G25 3 5 5 FP T2 ON 10s G25 3 6 6 FP ON 10s G25 3 7 7 FP T4 ON 10s G25 3 8 8 FP 5 ON 10s 25 4 Stop Conditions SD70ITGOO66CI Figure 10 14 Parameters structure from subgroup S25 1 G25 to subgroup S25 4 G25 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 77 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 25 4 13 13 FP 40 09 lt 250 to 0 0 e G25 4 15 15 FP T2 OF 10s 625 4 16 16 FP OF 10s G25 4 17 17 FP T4 OF 10s 25 4 18 18 FP 5 OF 10s G25 4 19 19 SPD10f 70 0 625 4 20 20 SPD20f 70 0 G25 4 21121 SPD30f 70 0 G25 4 22122 SPD4ofz 70 0 G25 4 23123 SPD50f 70 0 G25 4 24 24 SPD60f 70 0 G25 4 25 25 SPD7of 70 0 G25 4 26 26 SPD80f 70 0 G25 4 27 1 27 PIDISL 0 0 lt 0 0 to 250 G25 4 28 28 SLEEP Y lt gt N No Y Yes 625 4 29 29 SLPspA 40 0 lt 0 0 to 250 25 5 Speed Bypass G25 5 1 1 BY SPon 70 0 lt gt 0 0 to 250 fore 00000 me U ope opments Tur FAULT fier 50701 60067 Figure 10 15 Parameters structure from subgroup S25 4 G25 to subgroup S25 6 G25 78 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 9 71
271. ipment status Parameter Equipment Status has Word size like the rest of Modbus parameters but in this case the more significant byte MSB is reserved for internal use bit by bit User should only use the less significant byte LSB to access to the information of the drive status Alternation of two statuses During the standard running of the equipment the drive status value will appear in a stable and continuous way only changing when the drive status changes from Accelerating to Run for example Nevertheless there are two situations where the status value alternates between two statuses in a blink First case If the equipment presents a Warning this one will appear by alternating with the equipment status for example Normal status RUN and the warning ILT in alternative way Second case If a faults occurs the status value will alternate between the last status of the drive before occurring the fault and the current fault number for example normal status RUN and F40 in alternative way STATUS MESSAGES 39 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 8 2 List of Status Messages Screen Name Description OFF Deactivated power Drive power is deactivated ON Activated power Drive power is activated ACL Accelerating Drive is increasing the output frequency Motor increasing in speed it is accelerating RUN Running Drive is operating at reference speed Oper
272. is signal for the time set in this parameter If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears before elapsing OFF delay time the output of the comparator will be not deactivated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 NORMAL MODE TIME s TIME s 69 1 3 gt Activation value of comparator 1 in normal mode 69 1 6 ON delay time for comparator 1 G9 1 7 gt Deactivation value of comparator 1 in normal mode G9 1 8 gt OFF delay time for comparator 1 SD70ITCCO0017AI Figure 10 38 Example Activation of Comparator 1 in normal mode DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 159 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS WINDOW MODE MOTOR Lim 2 Lim 1 SPEED 10096 10 69 1 4 gt 2 30 69 1 5 gt Lim 1 5 COMPARATOR OUTPUT ON TIME s OFF 45 78 10 12 145 165 19 22 24 28 305 69 1 4 Limit 2 for comparator 1 in window mode 69 1 5 gt Limit 1 for comparator 1 in window mode 69 1 6 gt ON delay time for comparator 1 69 1 8 gt OFF delay time for comparator 1 SD70ITCCO0018AI Figure 10 39 Example Activation of Comparator 1 in window mode when limit 2 is higher than limit 1 WINDOW MODE MOTOR Lim 2 Lim 1 SPEED 100 10 6915 Lim 1 30 69 14 gt Lim 2 TIME s COMPARATOR OUTPUT ON TIME s OFF gt 69 1 4 Limit 2 for comparator 1 in window mode G9 1 5 gt Limit 1 for comparator 1 in window mode 69 1 6 gt O
273. isted pare cable where more equipment is also connected RS232 physical port has two separated lines for receiving Rx and transmitting Tx It allows the net to work in full duplex mode Full duplex means that the master can transmit and receive data simultaneously RS485 physical port used in the drive uses the same twisted pare cable in the reception Rx and in the transmission Tx It only allows the 5485 system to work in half duplex mode Half duplex means that the master cannot transmit and receiver information simultaneously In a half duplex System it usually uses the Request To Send line RTS to control the information flux via half duplex System in a RS232 system 11 6 Annexe B Modbus Communication Protocol 11 6 1 RTU Frame Group In the RTU frame group data are transmitted and received as sequences of 8 bits When you want to transmit a register of 16 bits it is divided in two sections of 8 bits and the more significant byte MSB is transmitted firstly If more than 3 5 byte periods between the characters reception drive considers that the next received byte will correspond to a different frame and it also will consider finished the present frame 11 6 2 Address Field The address field has 8 bits length and allows addressing 1 240 single addresses 241 255 group addresses and one 0 broadcast addresses Each SD700 drive is identified with an address that the master uses to communicate with it All of the SDRI
274. ite YES Function It allows setting the current value that determines the overload level of the pump The overload protection is a combination of this parameter together with parameters G11 12 Filter for pump overload and G11 13 gt Trip delay time because of pump overload When the output current of the drive is higher than the current set in this parameter during the time adjusted in parameter G11 13 the drive turns off its output generating the fault F57 PUMP OVERLOA We can set the value for a low pass filter to read the current in order to avoid oscillations by means of the parameter G11 12 G11 12 FILTER FOR PUMP OVERLOAD Screen 12 FIL OFF Extended info PMP OVL FILTER Description Filter for pump overload Range OFF 0 1 to 5s Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40290 Modbus range 0 to 50 Read Write YES 182 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting the value of the low pass filter in order to avoid oscillations when the output current of the drive is read The overload protection is a combination of this parameter together with parameters G11 11 gt Pump overload level and 511 13 gt Trip delay time because of pump overload When the output current of the drive is higher than the current set in parameter G11 11 during the time adjusted in parameter G11 13 the drive turns off its output generating the fault F5
275. ite YES Description It allows giving the start command to the equipment through communications network HOST STOP CONTROL Screen Range 0 1 Modbus address 40563 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Description It allows giving the stop command to the equipment through communications network HOST RESET CONTROL Screen Range 0 1 Modbus address 40564 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Description It allows giving the reset command to the equipment through communications network HOST TRIP CONTROL Screen Range 0 1 Modbus address 40565 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Description It allows the equipment to generate a fault through communications network DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 85 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 2 Group 2 G2 Motor Nameplate Data G2 1 MOTOR RATED CURRENT Screen 1 MTR CUR 00 00A Extended info MOTOR CURRENT Description Motor rated current Range 1 9999 limited from 0 2 1 5 In of the drive Default value Value depending on the drive rated current Set on run YES Modbus address 40282 Modbus range 1638 to 12288 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the motor rated current according to the motor nameplate G2 2 MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE Screen 2 MTR VOLT 400V Extended info MOTOR VOLTAGE Description Motor rated voltage Range 220 999V Default value 400V Set on run YES Modbus address 40283 Modbus range 220 to 999 Read Write
276. ition At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 257 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 20 STOP SPEED 2 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen 20 SPD2of 70 0 Extended info FPUMP STP SPEED2 Description Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 2 Range 0 096 to 250 Default value 70 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42316 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 2 set in parameter G25 1 6 gt Local setpoint 2 for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 G25 4 21 STOP SPEED 3 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen 21 SPD3of 70 0 Extended info FPUMP STP SPEED3 Description Stop speed for on
277. ivation condition of the output signal of Comparator 3 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the deactivation of this signal for the time set in this parameter If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears before elapsing OFF delay time the output of the comparator will be not deactivated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 171 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G9 3 9 SELECTION OF OUTPUT FUNCTION FOR COMPARATOR 3 Screen 9 SEL FUNT C3 00 Description Selection of the output function for the Comparator 3 Range 00 11 Default value 00 Set on run YES Modbus address 40326 Modbus range 0 to 11 Read Write YES Function It allows user to select which function will be activated by Comparator 3 To get information about the configuration options see Function in parameter G9 3 9 2 Selection of output function for Comparator 3 Note If activation and deactivation levels are set to similar values and delay times are set to OFF any noise that appears in the signals of selected source can cause an oscillation in the comparator and therefore an incorrect operation You should set these levels keeping a reasonable margin between them and if it is necessary set a delay time to improve the operation 172 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 10 Group 10 G10 Limits G10 1 MINIMUM SPEED LIMIT 1 Screen 1 MIN1 SP 0
278. l errors in the reference voltage near to zero reference point See figure 10 21 Note The function of zero band filter is not applied to the reference signals through digital inputs since these settings are absolute zero G4 3 16 LOW PASS FILTER FOR ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen 16 FILTER2 OFF Extended info AIN2 STABIL FILT Description Low Pass filter for the Analogue Input 2 Range OFF 0 0 20 0 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40275 Modbus range 0 to 200 Read Write YES Function It allows filtering the signal of the Analogue Input 2 By setting the value of this time constant we can eliminate possible instabilities in the value of the same ones due to noise wiring faults etc Note When applying a Low Pass filter to any analogue signal a delay time in the own signal is generated This delay time is the value of the configured time constant approximately 112 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 4 4 Subgroup 4 4 54 4 Pulse Input This input is used for the flow limitation algorithm See subgroup 525 10 Flow Limitation Algorithm For using this input you must have a flow meter with a pulse digital output of pulsewidth greater than 50ms G4 4 1 SENSOR UNITS OF PULSE INPUT Screen 1 Sensr U I m Description Sensor units of pulse input Range 96 1 5 m3 s I m m3 m I h m h m s m m m h Default value Im Set on run YES Modbus address 40581 Mo
279. l level 1 logical 5V differential 0 logical 5V differential Insulation 50Vdc regarding to the earth Programmable inputs via Modbus T digital inputs 2 programmable analogue inputs 0 10V x 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA Programmable outputs via Modbus 3 relay outputs 2 programmable analogue outputs 0 10V 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA Maximum number of SD700 240 connected into a network Maximum cable length 1000m For the correct operation of the USB connection you should install the Connector USB 1 1 type B proper ee For this you only need to access to the information of the USB Controller FTDI chip hs ae er Model FT232BM http www ftdichip com Drivers VCP htm From here you can download the required files and complete their correct installation Note USB connection of SD700 in the USB connection of the 50700 a RS232 internal conversion is executed For this reason the transmission speed is the indicated one in the section RS232 9600Baudios USB connector type is USB 1 1 B Slave Note Installation in the driver Host of the SD700 USB USB device of the SD700 will be detected by operating systems XP and 2000 it is only necessary to indicate the driver at the moment of the installation In case of operating systems before W98 Me execute a search of new Hardware in the device administrator and complete the installation by indicating the drivers when the computer requires them 290 MODBUS COMMUNIC
280. les DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 227 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Rule for Multiple References Selection With the pump program is possible to operate using up to 8 different regulation setpoints in PID mode settable in G25 1 5 to G25 1 12 To active each different setpoint 3 digital inputs configured as options 63 64 and 65 can be used It is necessary to take into consideration the following items o No Digital Input could be configured as 64 SETPONT PIN2 unless previously other different input has been configured as 63 gt SETPONT PIN1 o No Digital Input could be configured as 65 gt SETPONT PIN3 unless previously two different inputs have been configured as options 63 SETPONT PIN1 and 64 gt SETPONT PIN2 Rule for Selection De selection of Auxiliary Pumps For selecting one auxiliary pump it is necessary to act in the following way o Set any digital input to options 52 FIX FLT 53 gt FIX PUMP2 FLT 54 FIX FLT 55 gt FIX PUMPA FLT or 56 gt FIX PUMPS FLT o To enable the control of the pump in the corresponding parameter G25 9 1 G25 9 2 G25 9 3 G25 9 4 and G25 9 5 respectively To remove this fixed pump configuration and release the relay for another different use it is necessary to o To disable the control of the pump in the corresponding parameter G25 9 1 G25 9 2 G25 9 3 G25 9 4 and G25 9 5 respectively 10 20 6 Outputs
281. low demand if the drive is in sleep mode This pump will stop when the pump of the drive is connected or when the demand disappears 30 gt PRIMING PUMP To fill the suction pipe This pump will stop when the suction is filled and then the drive pump will start 31 SLEEP CONDIT The relay commutates if the equipment has the sleep conditions fulfilled or not Once the equipment is stopping the relay commutates again This function operates together with the parameter G25 4 28 gt To enable sleep mode see this parameter 32 CRANE BRAKE The relay will be activated like in option 05 RUN considering the ON delay time for the relay itself parameters G8 1 2 G8 1 6 or G8 1 10 depending on the used relay and will be deactivated when the motor speed is below the speed set in G8 1 13 gt Speed for disconnecting relay in option Crane G8 1 2 ON DELAY TIME FOR RELAY 1 Screen 2 T R1 ON 0 05 Extended info R1 ACTIVAT DELAY Description ON delay time for the Relay 1 Range 0 0 9995 Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40363 Modbus range 0 to 9999 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set a delay time before activating the Relay 1 If during this time the activation condition disappears the relay will be not activated DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 139 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G8 1 3 OFF DELAY TIME FOR RELAY 1 Screen 3 T R1 OFF 0 0s Extended info R1 DEACTIV DELAY D
282. lt value 2 Set on run YES Modbus address 40041 Modbus range 0 to 3 Read Write YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 91 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows user to set the secondary control mode or alternative of the drive to give the orders that drive it Start Stop Reset The configuration options of the alternative control mode are the same than the main control mode therefore see Function in parameter G4 1 1 gt Main control mode to obtain additional information Note Control mode 2 alternative will be activated through digital inputs For that one of them should be configured parameters G4 1 5 3 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with the option 17 gt CONTROL 2 When the input configured for that is activated the alternative control mode will be activated disabling the main control mode G4 1 3 RESET FROM KEYPAD Screen 3 RESET MODE Y Description Reset from keypad Range N S See Function for additional information Default value Y Set on run YES Modbus address 40039 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It enables or disables the possibility of resetting a fault from the keypad unit LOCAL Options N gt NO Reset from keypad unit is not possible Y gt YES It is possible to reset the equipment by reset key from the keypad unit G4 1 4 SELECTION OF DIGITAL I
283. m speed limit 2 and maximum speed limit 2 alternative speed limits is realized through one of the digital inputs parameters from G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration set to option 20 SPEED LIMIT 2 by means of the output function of one of the comparators parameters G9 1 9 Selection of output function for Comparator 1 G9 2 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 2 and G9 3 9 Selection of output function for Comparator 3 set to option 11 gt SPEED LIMIT 2 Note Commands to operate out of these limits are restricted to those limits See figure 10 41 G10 5 CURRENT LIMIT Screen 5ILIMT Extended info MAX CURRENT Description Output current limit Range 0 25 1 to 1 50 In Default value depending on the drive capacity Set on run YES Modbus address 40106 Modbus range 2048 to 12288 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the output current limit Motor current will be within this programmed limit When this protection is active the drive status of current limitation ILT is displayed Note In normal operation status avoid adjusting values very lower than value of motor rated current since several effects torque boost settings fast acceleration and deceleration can produce false results We do not recommend that current limit works constantly in applications when the motor is at stea
284. mp program is not active Once selected the pump program a character will appear in the upper line of the display beside the drive status indicating constantly that the pump program is active The letter b appears in Spanish and the letter p for English German The most of parameters relative to the pump control are located in group G25 except for those settings relative to inputs and outputs that can be found in groups G4 and G7 Additionally there are some visualization screens included in visualization groups SV 5 and SV 8 A WARNING The activation of pump program changes the inputs and outputs configuration of the equipment automatically See parameter G4 1 4 Selection of Digital Input configuration for additional information Output relays are also configured automatically see S8 1 Output Relays Make sure there is not a hazard of accidental starting to avoid property damage or personal injury DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 83 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 1 1 Subgroup 1 10 1 10 Eloader EEPROM loader G1 10 1 SAVE PARAMETERS FROM DRIVE TO DISPLAY Screen UPLOAD Description Save parameters from the drive to the display unit Range N Y Default value N Set on run NO Function When this parameter is set to Y the parameters copy to the display starts automatically saving the drive configuration It exists one sub screen that shows the load process UPLOADING 100
285. n Blocked or poor ventilation Heat sink and cooling fan fault on the SD700 Improve the cooling ACTIONS Check the motor load Check the setting of parameters G2 1 MTR CUR and G2 7 COOL relating to the motor thermal model Increasing the parameter G2 7 MTR COOL can be undertaken when there is motor PTC fitted and it is connected to the SD700 to reset the fault Disconnect and re connect again the input power If the fault persists contact Power Electronics for technical service Disconnect and re connect SD700 input power of the drive If the same fault appears initialize all of the parameters parameter G1 5 INITIALISE and connect the input power again If the fault persists request technical assistance Disconnect and connect again SD700 input power If the same fault appears initialize all of the parameters parameter G1 5 INITIALISE and connect the input power again If the fault persists request technical assistance Reset the fault If the fault persists request technical assistance Try to reset the fault Disconnect and re connect again the input power If the fault persists request technical assistance Check if there is an object blocking ventilation Check if the heat sink and the cooling fan are operating correctly Ambient temperature is higher than 50 Input phase L1 is not connected correctly or there is no voltage on it Input phase L2 is not connec
286. n Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function Note It allows setting a time once elapsed it a trip because of low input voltage will be generated Drive will trip it turns off the output to the motor because of fault F14 LW V IN when average voltage measured at the input of the equipment is lower than the value set in G11 4 gt Low input voltage level during the time adjusted in this parameter Protection from low input voltage is a combination of parameter G11 4 gt Low input voltage level and this one HIGH INPUT VOLTAGE LEVEL 6 HIGH VOLT 440V HI INPUT VOLTAGE Maximum level of input voltage 418 550V for 400V 726 759V for 690V 440 for 400V 740V for 690V YES 40459 4180 5500 for 400V 7260 7590 for 690 YES It allows setting a maximum level of input voltage Drive will trip it turns off the output to the motor because of fault F13 HI V IN when average voltage measured at the input of the equipment is higher than the value set in this parameter during the time adjusted G11 7 gt Trip time because of high input voltage Protection from high input voltage is a combination of this parameter and 611 7 gt Trip time because of high input voltage In case of the drive is powered with an input voltage of 690V the default value of this parameter will be 740V and the range will be 726 759V TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF HIGH INPUT VOLTAGE 7H
287. n 2 DECEL1 3 0 s Extended info INITIAL DECEL Description Deceleration ramp 1 Range 0 01 650 s Default value 3 0 s Set on run YES Modbus address 40394 Modbus range 10 to 65000 Read Write YES 114 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows user to set the deceleration ramp 1 according to the requirements of each process The setting is in deceleration units decrease in 96 of speed per second For example a deceleration ramp of 10 s means that the drive decreases its speed by 10 of motor rated speed per each second elapsed If parameter G5 6 gt Speed for deceleration ramp change is set to OFF drive will search the reference speed by following the deceleration pattern set in this parameter See figures 10 22 and 10 23 Note Usually it should be used slower settings supported by the application A deceleration ramp too much fast can cause motor regeneration to the drive VLT For this drive will replace the set ramp with a slower ramp automatically To get a better programming you must be realistic with these settings If you need fast accelerations and or decelerations we advise you to use slower settings firstly until the remaining operations are checked G5 3 ACCELERATION RAMP 2 Screen 3 ACCE 2 1 0 s Extended info SECOND ACCELE Description Acceleration ramp 2 Range 0 01 650 5 Default value 1 0 s Set on run YES Modbus address 40393 Modbus ra
288. n Digital Input 6 configuration 2 gt MREF 2 WIRES Two of the six digital inputs DI5 and DI6 are configured to select the settings of multiple references getting up to 4 references set before These ones can be speed references or PID references See group G14 MULTI REFERENCES The four remaining inputs DI1 to DI4 can be programmed individually in the parameters G4 1 5 3 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 8 2 Multi function Digital Input 4 configuration Note To configure this mode as well as selecting this option it is necessary to realize one of the settings described below 1 Choice of multi references as speed references We should set the parameter G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed and or G3 2 Reference source 2 of speed with option MREP 2 Choice of multi references as PID references First we should enable the PID regulator 53 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed and or 53 2 Reference source 2 of speed option PID and next select option MREF in parameter G6 1 gt Source selection for introducing reference signal DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 93 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 3 MREF WIRES Three of the six digital inputs DI4 DI5 and DI6 are configured to select the settings of the multiple references getting up to 7 references set before These ones can be speed references or PID references See group G1
289. n It allows user to set the step frequency value See parameter G15 3 gt Inch speed 3 for additional data SV5 13 LOCAL MANUAL SPEED REFERENCE Screen PMP manSP 0 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 42042 Modbus range 250 20480 to 250 20480 Read Write YES Description To set the value of the manual speed reference in local For additional details check parameter G25 1 3 gt Value of speed reference for LOCAL source in manual mode SV5 14 LOCAL SETPOINT 1 FOR PID Screen PMP MRe1 0 0 Units motor speed Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Description 42151 0 32760 YES To set the local setpoint 1 for PID Multi reference 1 For additional details check parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 55 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS SV5 15 LOCAL SETPOINT 2 FOR PID Screen PMP MRe2 0 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 42152 Modbus range 0 32760 Read Write YES Description To set the local setpoint 2 for PID Multi reference 2 For additional details check parameter G25 1 6 Local setpoint 2 for PID SV5 16 LOCAL SETPOINT 3 FOR PID Screen PMP MRe3 0 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 42153 Modbus range 0 32760 Read Write YES Description To set the local setpoint 3 for PID Multi reference 3 For additional details check parameter G25 1 7 gt Local setpoint for PID SV5 17
290. n of Faults List DISPLAY DESCRIPTION F0 NO FAULT Drive is operative There is no fault Output current has reached a dangerous level Its value is above 220 of the drive rated current Protection is F1 ILIM FLT activated instantaneously DC Bus voltage has reached a dangerous level 850Vdc Hardware Protection Drive will turn off the output to F2 V LIM FLT ibedmotor F3 PDINT FLT DC Bus voltage and the output current of the equipment have reached dangerous levels F4 U DESAT F5 U DESAT F6 V DESAT TEE F7 V DESAT Internal protection within the appropriate IGBT semiconductor has acted F8 W DESAT F9 W DESAT F10 NEG IGBT Automatic internal protection of several of the IGBT semiconductors has acted F11 VIN LOSS Power supply loss of any input phase for a time higher than 20ms has occurred 9 Input voltage imbalance greater than 10 of average input power supply of 50700 for a time higher than F12 IMB V IN 100ms 2 Average supply voltage has exceeded the value set in G11 6 HIGH VOLT for greater than the time set in G11 7 HIGH V Average supply voltage is lower than the value set in G11 4 LOW VOLT for greater than the time set in 11 5 F14 LW V IN LOW V TO F15 CURL Vdc Unstable bus voltage There is a DC Bus voltage ripple higher than 100Vdc for more than 1 1sec F16 HI Vdc DC Bus voltage has exceeded critical operating level 850Vdc Software Protection F
291. n parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration for additional information about the configuration options G4 1 10 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 6 CONFIGURATION Screen 10 DIGITL IN 6 17 Description Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration Range 00 70 Default value 17 Set on run NO Modbus address 40037 Modbus range 0 to 70 Read Write YES Function It allows user to configure the Digital Input 6 for its individual use See Function in parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration for additional information about the configuration options DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 101 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 4 2 Subgroup 4 2 4 2 Analogue Input 1 G4 2 1 TO ENABLE SENSOR OF ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen 1 SENSOR 12 Description It enables the sensor of the Analogue Input 1 Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run NO Modbus address 40268 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows user to use the Analogue Input 1 and to access to the needed parameters for configuring the sensor See G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units up to G4 2 7 gt Maximum range of sensor 1 N gt NO The analogue input will remain scaled in default units Y gt YES The analogue input and any variables relating to the analogue input will be configured in the engineering units selected G4 2 2 gt Selec
292. n skin burns Do not apply power to a damaged drive or to a drive with parts missing even if the installation is complete Otherwise you may get an electric shock Do not allow lint paper wood chips dust metallic chips or other foreign matter into the drive Otherwise fire or accident could occur N WARNINGS RECEPTION The SDRIVE 700 is carefully tested and perfectly packed before leaving the factory n the even of transport damage please ensure that you notify the transport agency and POWER ELECTRONICS 902 40 20 70 International 34 96 136 65 57 or your nearest agent within 24hrs from receipt of the goods UNPACKING Make sure model and serial number of the variable speed drive are the same on the box delivery note and unit Each variable speed drive is supplied with a SDRIVE 700 technical manual 8 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SAFETY Before operating the drive read this manual thoroughly to gain and understanding of the unit If any doubt exists then please contact POWER ELECTRONICS 902 40 20 70 34 96 136 65 57 or your nearest agent Wear safety glasses when operating the drive with power applied and the front cover is removed Handle the drive with care according to its weight Install the drive according to the instructions within this manual Do not place heavy objects on the drive Ensure that the mounting orientation is correct Do not dr
293. n the drive output current exceeds a defined level calculated as 96 of In a ramp change occurs See figures 10 22 and 10 23 G5 6 SPEED FOR DECELERATION RAMP CHANGE Screen 6 BRK DEC OFF Extended info BREAKPOINT DCL Description Speed for deceleration ramp change Range OFF 0 to 25096 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40397 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES 116 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function Note OUTPUT SPEED SPEED REFERENCE SPEED 100 65 6 60 G5 5 25 OUTPUT It allows using the alternative deceleration ramp parameter G5 4 When the drive is decelerating and the speed set in this parameter is reached drive will start to apply the alternative deceleration ramp from that moment on If this parameter is set to OFF default value drive will only apply the deceleration ramp 1 parameter 65 2 The alternative deceleration ramp can be selected independently of drive speed This selection can be realized through digital inputs by configuring one of them with the option 14 gt ACC DEC 2 or by using the output functions of comparators for example if the magnitude of the comparator is the drive rated current when the drive output current is below a defined level calculated as of In a ramp change occurs See figures 10 22 and 10 23 G5 1 gt Acceleration ramp 1 65 2 gt Deceleration ramp
294. nce 5 for additional data SV5 8 MULTI REFERENCE 6 Screen Mref6 60 0 Units motor speed Modbus address 40057 Modbus range 250 20480 to 250 20480 Read Write YES Description It allows user to set the speed value assigned to Multi reference 6 See parameter G14 6 Multi reference 6 for additional data SV5 9 MULTI REFERENCE 7 Screen Mref7 70 0 Units motor speed Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Description 40058 250 20480 to 250 20480 YES It allows user to set the speed value assigned to Multi reference 7 See parameter G14 7 Multi reference 7 for additional data 54 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SV5 10 INCH SPEED 1 Screen Inch Spd1 0 00 Units motor speed Modbus address 40092 Modbus range 250 20480 to 250 20480 Read Write YES Description It allows user to set the step frequency 1 value See parameter G15 1 gt Inch speed 1 for additional data SV5 11 INCH SPEED 2 Screen Inch Spd2 0 00 Units motor speed Modbus address 40093 Modbus range 250 20480 to 250 20480 Read Write YES Description It allows user to set the step frequency 2 value See parameter G15 2 gt Inch speed 2 for additional data SV5 12 INCH SPEED 3 Screen Vel Fija3 0 00 Units motor speed Modbus address 40094 Modbus range 250 20480 to 250 20480 Read Write YES Descriptio
295. nd Jumpers Description X5 Optic Fiber Communication between drives X6 Dynamic Braking Unit connection X7 Communication busses connection PF EPEUDREPEEETPFF TIEFE F TFE TER X10 Connector for optional encoders board X2 Programmable digital outputs X3 Keypad connection X8 Communication buses connection X1 Digital inputs PTC connection programmable analog inputs and outputs control power supply and X9 For optional serial communication inputs outputs board Jp4401 JP1104 To select communication port via 5232 485 or USB X4 USB port SD70ITCOO02CI Figure 6 11 Location and description of user connectors 32 CONNECTION TERMINALS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 6 2 2 Control Wiring The following figure provides an overview of the standard wiring of control terminals through the X1 and X2 user connectors X1 CONNECTOR 24Vdc Mutifunction Digital Inputs Factory Settings X2 CONNECTOR Common Terminal 24Vdc 011 gt 06 Start Reset Stop 012 gt 00 Not used gt 00 Not used 014 gt 00 Not used DI5 3 00 Not used DI6 3 17 Control 2 NO Contact Common NC Contact NO Contact Common NC Contact 02 No Fault Common NC Contact Multifunction Relay Outputs Motor PTC Input Analogue Ref Signal 0 10Vdc Programmable V or mA Power supply common for Analogue Signal
296. nd then is divided by the polynomial shown above Quotient is rejected and the rest of 16 bits is added to the message This rest is initialized to OFFFFH to avoid a possible sequence of zeros as a valid sequence Receiver receives the complete sequence and executes the division with the same characteristic polynomial if the message has been received with no errors the rest of the division is zero The device used for data serial transmission will send the less significant bit LSB of each character firstly In the CRC generation the first transmitted bit is defined like the more significant bit of the dividend By convenience we suppose that there are not carries and assume that the more significant bit MSB is the right one For this if we want to be solid the bit order of the characteristic polynomial should be inverted The more significant byte is ruled out if only affects to the quotient and does not affect to the rest In this way original polynomial 6 15 2 1 1100 0000 0000 00101 becomes like this 1010 0000 0000 0001 A001H 11 6 6 Exception Codes Protocol errors and data range errors generate an answer of SD700 with an exception answer An exception answer consists of the slave address that has detected the error the function code received by the slave more significant bit with 1 value to indicate the exception answer the error code and the sum check CRC The exception codes and its causes are summariz
297. ng to the setting If this parameter is set to 0 0 this condition will not be considered This parameter allows user to consider the PID error at the moment of stopping the fixed pumps At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local setpoint depending on the selected local setpoint and the stop delay time for each fixed pump G25 4 14 for pump 1 G25 4 15 for pump 2 G25 4 16 for pump 3 G25 4 17 for pump 4 and G25 4 18 for pump 5 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 253 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS FEEDBACK REFERENCE 10096 SPEED G25 5 3 G254 19 G25 4 26 DRIVE PUMP ON t FIXED PUMP X 2 G25 4 14 625418 t 8 ON G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps G25 4 14 gt Delay time to stop fixed pump 1 Relay 1 G25 4 15 gt Delay time to stop fixed pump 2 Relay 2 G25 4 16 gt Delay time to stop fixed pump 3 Relay 3 G25 4 17 gt Delay time to stop fixed pump 4 AO1 G25 4 18 gt Delay time to stop fixed pump 5 02 G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump G25 4 20 gt Stop speed 2 for one fixed pump G25 4 21 gt Stop speed 3 for one fixed pump 625 4 22 gt Stop speed 4 for one fixed pump G25 4 23 gt Stop speed 5 for one fixed pump G25 4 24 lt gt S
298. nge 10 to 65000 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the alternative acceleration ramp according to the requirements of each process The setting is in acceleration units increase in of speed per second For example an alternative acceleration ramp of 10 s means that the drive increases its speed by 10 of motor rated speed per each second elapsed If parameter G5 5 gt Speed for acceleration ramp change is set to a specific value drive will search the reference speed by following the acceleration pattern set in parameter 55 1 gt Acceleration ramp 1 and once reached the change speed drive will continue the search of the reference speed by applying the alternative acceleration pattern set in this parameter See parameter G5 1 gt Acceleration ramp 1 for additional information See figures 10 22 and 10 23 G5 4 DECELERATION RAMP 2 Screen 4 DECEL2 1 0 s Extended info SECOND DECELE Description Deceleration ramp 2 Range 0 01 650 s Default value 1 0 s Set on run YES Modbus address 40395 Modbus range 10 to 65000 Read Write YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 115 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows user to set the alternative deceleration ramp according to the requirements of each process The setting is in deceleration units decrease in 96 of speed per second For example an alternative deceleration ramp of 1096 s means that the drive decreases its speed by 1
299. ns has been overheated The limit of internal temperature of the electronics chamber has been exceeded A fault in the microcontroller has occurred An external trip has been produced by closing a contact on the digital input configured in this option High current used by the motor due to heavy load The load exceeds the capacity of the motor cooling under normal operating conditions Incorrect setting of the parameters related to pump overload Phase loss of the motor or a fault in motor windings Pressure reference is lower than the minimum pressure level Active in Pump Control mode only An external trip has been produced by closing a contact on the digital input configured in this option Active in Pump Control mode only An external trip has been produced by opening a contact on the digital input Active in Pump Control mode only Wait for the temperature of the power supply decreases down to a value in normal conditions and restart it You can disconnect the equipment connect it again and restart the power supply again If the fault persists request technical assistance of Power Electronics Verify that the ambient conditions are proper for the equipment Be sure that there is nothing obstructing the cooling fans dust papers dirt in general and that these rotate correctly Disconnect and re connect the input power of the drive If the fault persists request technical assistance of Power Elec
300. nt is reaching a dangerous level The value is above the set value protections settings UNV Low input voltage Input voltage of the equipment is reaching a dangerous level The value is below the set value protections settings S1L Speed limit 1 reached Motor speed has reached speed limit 1 S2L Speed limit 2 reached Motor speed has reached speed limit 2 STATUS MESSAGES 41 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 9 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP G0 These parameters constantly indicate the input signal status and dynamic parameter status of the SD700 Visualization lines are the second and the third lines The user can select the parameter to be displayed in each line from the different visualization options To select a display parameter you should move to the cursor to the second or third line For this you need to press key for two seconds approximately The cursor moves from one line to the next Once located on the second or third line you can navigate like the programming line line 4 and select the desired parameter to be displayed Once selected these parameters are saved into memory These parameters are then displayed on lines 2 and 3 whenever the drive is powered up Thanks to these lines user can display desired parameters and obtain additional information easily Visualization Lines SDRIVE gt These lines show specific parameters that can be useful for the user 5070
301. nu G1 1 PARAMETERS LOCK Screen 1 LOCK PARMTRS 0 Description Parameters lock Range 0 2 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set on run NO Function It allows user to lock the parameters setting totally or partially The selected lock is executed by introducing a password in parameter 51 2 Access password The different selectable options are detailed below 0 gt NO Parameters lock is not active 1 PARTIAL LOCK When the partial lock of the parameters is activated we can only modify the value of the parameters G1 1 and G1 2 parameters used for lock and unlock function as well as the parameter 53 3 gt Local speed reference and G6 2 gt PID local reference whenever the option LOCAL or locPID is selected 56 1 gt Source selection for introducing reference signal The remainder of the parameters cannot be modified but can be visualized 22 TOTAL LOCK When the total lock of the parameters is activated we can only modify parameters G1 1 and G1 2 until the password is introduced again to unlock parameters G1 2 ACCESS PASSWORD Screen 2 PASSWORD OFF 2 PASSWORD 2 OFF Description Access password Range OFF 0000 to 9999 Default value 0 Set on run YES Function It allows user to introduce an access password to lock parameters and avoid unauthorized changes in the programming If we select option 1 gt PARTIAL LOCK or 2 TOTAL LOCK in parameter G1 1
302. o display all groups and sub groups needed to set the drive Figure 10 1 Detail of Programming Line 50701 0020 64 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 See the information below for the whole parameter list and possible options of configuration G1 Options Menu G1 1 1 LOCK PARMTRS 0 lt gt 0 NO 1 PARTIAL LOCK 2 LOCK G1 2 2PASSWORD OFF 0000 9999 61 3 3 PSW ERR XXXX lt gt 0000 9999 G1 4 4 LANG ESPANOL lt gt ENGLISH ESPANOL DEUTSCH 61 5 SINITIALISE 0 1 USR PRMTR 2 MTR PRMTR 3 ALL PRMTR 61 6 6 SHORT Menu NO lt gt NO YES G1 7 7 PROG STANDARD lt STANDARD PUMP G1 10 1 UPLOAD N lt gt N No YzYes G1 10 2 DOWNLOAD N lt gt NzNo YzYes 61 11 11 FAN CTRL FIXE lt gt FIXE TEMP G2 Motor Nameplate Data 62 111 MTR CUR 00 00A lt gt 1 9999 62 212 VOLT 400V gt 999V G2 3 3 MTR PWR 00 0kW lt 0 6500kW G2 4 4 MTR RPM 1485 lt gt 0 24000 G2 51 5 PFA 0 85 lt 0 to 0 99 G2 6 6 MTR FRQ 50Hz gt 62 7 17 MTR COOLN 40 OFF 20 100 G3 References G3 1 1 REF1 SPD LOCAL 63 2 2 REF2 SPD LOCAL SD70ITG0054BI Figure 10 2 Parameters structure from group G1 to group G3 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 65 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 4 1 Digital Inputs 64 1 1 1 CNTROL MODE1 1 1 LOCAL 2 REMOTE G4 1 2 2 CNTROL M
303. o the setting realized in parameter G25 6 12 Response from over pressure G25 6 14 TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF HIGH PRESSURE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 14 DLY 0 05 PRESS FLT DLY Trip time because of high pressure 0 999s 0 0s YES 42339 0 to 9990 YES It allows setting the trip time because of high pressure Once exceeded the detection level set in parameter G25 6 13 gt Maximum pressure level and elapsed set in this parameter the drive will stop by PAUSE or will trip by FAULT according to the setting realized in 525 6 12 gt Response from over pressure G25 6 15 RESPONSE FROM NO FLOW SITUATION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 15 FLO SWm PAUSE Response of the drive from No Flow detection situation PAUSE FAULT See Function for additional information PAUSE YES 42348 1102 5 It allows selecting the response of the drive from Flow detection situation PAUSE 2 It will generate the stopping of the drive and next of fixed pumps NO FLOW will be displayed Once the high pressure condition disappears if the delay time after pause has elapsed the drive will start FAULT It will generate a fault and next fixed pumps will be stopped In this case the visualization will be
304. odbus address 42143 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the maximum allowed flow When the present flow value is higher than the value set in this parameter plus the margin set in G25 10 3 gt Offset percentage over maximum flow G25 10 2 G25 10 3 the flow limitation algorithm will be activated showing the drive status FLOW In that moment the speed reference of the pump will start decreasing using the ramp set in G25 10 5 gt Deceleration ramp during algorithm The speed reference will decrease until the present flow is lower than the value set in this parameter minus the margin set in G25 10 3 G25 10 2 G25 10 3 In this moment the speed will remain constant until the present flow is lower than the flow set in G25 10 4 gt Flow percentage to reset algorithm From this moment on the PID regulator will take up the control again and the drive will start to regulate normally Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units 284 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 10 3 OFFSET PERCENTAGE OVER MAXIMUM FLOW Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 3 OFFSET 0 OFFSET MAX FLOW Offset percent
305. ode 2 definition Range RAMP SPIN Default value RAMP Set on run YES Modbus address 40015 Modbus range 0101 Read Write YES 130 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows selecting the alternative start mode of the motor See parameter G7 4 gt Start mode to obtain information about selection options See figures 10 26 and 10 27 Note Start mode 2 alternative start mode is selected through a digital input configured with option 22 START MODE 2 in parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration G7 6 START DELAY TIME Screen 6 START DLY OFF Extended info RETRASO ARRANQUE Description Start delay time Range OFF 0 6500s Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40006 Modbus range 0 to 65000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time from the drive receives the start command to begin the motor starting See figure 10 27 G7 7 STOP DELAY TIME Screen 7 STOP DLY OFF Extended info DELAY TO STOP Description Stop delay time Range OFF 0 6500s Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40007 Modbus range 0 to 65000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time from the drive receives the stop command to begin the motor stopping See figure 10 27 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 131 SDRIVE 700 POWE
306. oduce that value 40 is a commonly used value Where open structures forced cooling or water cool motors are used a higher efficiency at zero speed will be obtained If the equipment is operating at low speeds for a long time and trips are generated by the thermal model and the motor is not too much hot increase the of the cooling Thermal model is deactivated by introducing OFF We advise installing a thermal protection independent to the motor A TORQUE MOTOR RATED FREQUENCY gt 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Torque curve for maximum increase of temperature Torque curve for temperature increase SD70ITCCO0001AI Figure 10 18 Specific thermal reduction of the motor DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 3 Group 3 G3 References G3 1 REFERENCE SOURCE 1 OF SPEED Screen 1 REF1 SPD LOCAL Description Reference source 1 of speed Range NONE Al2 11 Al2 RESER LOCAL MREF PMOT PID See Function for additional information Default value LOCAL Set on run YES Modbus address 40122 Modbus range 0 to 8 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the reference source 1 of speed Possible reference sources are the following ones NONE gt 11 12 Al2 RESER 3 LOCAL 3 MREF 3 PMOT 3 PID gt Reference source 1 has not been selected The reference will be introduced through the Analogue In
307. of a suitable filter value Note Filter use can add a slight delay to the analogue output signal DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 149 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Next we expound some examples about how the analogue outputs must be configured Example 1 We want to configure Analogue Output 1 as 0 to 10V output for a sensor to measure the speed motor of 1440rpm rotating in inverse direction 1440rpm with a range from 3000rpm to 3000rpm Motor rated speed is 1500rpm Set mode of Analogue Output 1 in G8 2 1 to 01 gt SPEED MOTOR motor speed Select format for Analogue Output 1 in G8 2 2 to 0 10 Set minimum and maximum values high range and low range of the Analogue Output 1 scale in parameters G8 2 3 for low range and G8 2 4 for high range G8 2 3 gt 200 since 3000rpm is 200 of the motor rated speed 1500rpm G8 2 4 gt 200 since 3000rpm is 200 of the motor rated speed 1500rpm Vinax Vinin Motor speed Vspa0 Rngmin Where V max Maximum voltage of Analogue Output 1 V min 2 Minimum voltage of Analogue Output 1 Rngma Maximum speed of the motor Rngmin 2 Minimum speed of the motor Output voltage at zero speed of the motor Replacing values 10 0 3000 3000 71440 5 2 2 6V With this setting the value of the Analogue Output 1 will be 2 6V when motor rotates in inverse direction at 1440rpm G8 2
308. of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units G25 8 2 COMPENSATION PRESSURE AT THE STARTING OF 2 FIXED PUMPS Screen 2 COMP 2 0 0Bar Extended info SETPOINT COMPEN2 Description Compensation pressure at the starting of two fixed pumps Range 0 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 42132 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows compensating the pressure loss in the pipe by increasing the setpoint automatically when two fixed pumps are connected Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units G25 8 3 COMPENSATION PRESSURE AT THE STARTING OF 3 FIXED PUMPS Screen 3 COMP 3 0 0Bar Extended info SETPOINT Description Compensation pressure at the starting of three fixed pumps Range 0 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 42133 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES 276 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function Note It allows compensating the pressure loss in the pipe by increasing the setpoint automatically when three fixed pumps are connected Default units of measurement which
309. of the drive pump This functionality is interchangeable between main and alternative speed references this is we can select the main speed reference by analogue input and the alternative by keypad and vice versa G25 1 4 SOURCE SELECTION FOR ALTERNATIVE SPEED REFERENCE IN MANUAL MODE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 4 ALT MAN S R LOCAL Selection of the source for the alternative speed reference in manual mode LOCAL AI2 LOCAL YES 42043 0 to 2 YES It allows selecting the source for the alternative speed source in manual mode See Function in parameter G25 1 2 gt Source selection for speed reference in manual mode to obtain information about the configuration options DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 231 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 1 5 LOCAL SETPOINT 1 FOR PID Screen 5 0 0Bar Extended info LOCAL SETPOINT 1 Description Local setpoint 1 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 42151 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 1 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m min l h m h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used In case of operating with unique local setpoint in PID mode it
310. olated power supply Consult availability with Power Electronics Cable length could be increased depending on cable type Consult with Power Electronics 18 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 ANALOGUE INPUTS ENCODER INPUTS DIGITAL OUTPUTS ANALOGUE OUTPUTS POTENTIOMETER VOLTAGE USER POWER SUPPLY COMMUNICATION VISUALIZATION INFORMATION CONTROL MODES CONTROL PANEL OTHERS CERTIFICATION 2 programmable and differential inputs Operation modes Current signal 0 20mA 4 20mA Voltage signal 0 10Vdc 10Vde differential Additional features Optically insulated Optional encoder boards are available for two differential encoders one available for the user one available for vector control mode Others types of encoders can be used as necessary Additional features Voltages inputs from 5 to 24Vdc 3 programmable changeover relays 250Vac 8A or 30Vdc 8A 2 isolated programmable outputs 0 20mA 4 20mA 0 10Vdc y 10Vde 10Vdc power supply voltage for speed reference by potentiometer 26mA maximum 24Vdc user power supply regulated and short circuit protected From a communication perspective the SD700 will provide Standard Hardware Optional Hardware USB Port Optic Fibre RS232 Port Ethernet RS485 Port Software Protocols Standard Modbus RTU Optional Profibus DeviceNet TCP IP N2 Metasys Average current and 3 phase motor curr
311. onality to suit the application should this occur This guarantees safe installation and operation in order to prevent any external hardware causing damage to the equipment Note Digital outputs will be affected by pump control activation To select an auxiliary pump you must proceed like this o Set any free digital input to the options 52 FIX PUMP1 FLT 53 FIX PUMP2 FLT 54 FIX PUMP3 FLT o Enable the pump control in the corresponding parameter G25 9 1 G25 9 2 and G25 9 3 respectively To remove the configuration of that fixed pump and release the relay for other use you must Disable the pump control in the corresponding parameter G25 9 1 G25 9 2 and G25 9 3 respectively DI6 gt 00 Not used Free programming 28 Pump 3 Control Fu nir X1 CONNECTOR X2 CONNECTOR 24V Usr DI o4vqc gt Terminal 24 w 28 Pump 1 Control DI 50 STARTISTP El Common s i 5 012 gt 52 FIX FLT Fault Auxiliary Pump 1 NC Contact a 5 gt 53 FIX PUMP2 FLT Fault Auxiliary Pump 2 E 28 Pump 2 Control 23 o 2 04 gt 54 FIX PUMP3 FLT Fault Auxiliary Pump 3 Common 2 2 015 gt 00 Not used Free programming NC Contact 5 3 z Common Motor PTC Input NC Contact Feedback signal 4 20mA Programmable as V or mA Analogue Signal Common Common Terminal OVdc Common Terminal 24Vdc SD70DTCOO006CI Figure 13 4 Pressure Group C
312. onnected and 10V indicates that pump is connected DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 145 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G8 2 2 FORMAT SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Screen 2 FORMT 1 4 20mA Description Format selection for the Analogue Output 1 Range 0 10V 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA Default value 4 20mA Set on run NO Modbus address 40343 Modbus range 0103 Read Write YES Function It allows configuring the Analogue Output 1 in one of four possible formats according to the system requirements 68 2 3 8824 G8 2 2 gt Format selection for analogue output 1 G8 2 8 G8 2 9 08 2 3 Low range selection of analogue output 1 G8 24 4 High range selection of analogue output 1 G8 2 7 lt gt Format selection for analogue output 2 08 2 8 Low range selection of analogue output 2 G8 2 9 gt High range selection of analogue output 2 10V ov 10V 0v 5V 10V G8 2 2 4mA 12mA 20mA G8 2 7 10mA 20mA SD70ITCCO00114AI Figure 10 32 Format of analogue outputs G8 2 3 LOW RANGE SELECTION OF ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Screen 3 MIN1 RNG 0 Extended info MIN RANG ANAOUT1 Description Low range selection of Analogue Output 1 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40344 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the minimum level of the Analogue Output 1 Minimum value setting can be higher than the value of maximum level This allows the user to achieve in
313. ontrol mode improves motor noise tone N 3 NO Pewave control deactivated Y gt YES Pewave control activated Commutation frequency G19 1 2 is slightly modified on a random basis to improve the noise tone generated by the motor 210 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 18 2 Subgroup 19 2 19 2 Motor Load G19 2 1 MINIMUM FLUX Screen 1 MIN FLUX 100 Extended info MINIMUM FLUX Description Minimum flux level Range 40 100 Default value 10096 Set on run NO Modbus address 40502 Modbus range 3277 to 8192 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the minimum flux level used by the motor during low load conditions With this dynamic system of flux optimization noise and power losses are reduced thanks to the automatic adaptation of the flux level during low load conditions It is used in applications where load changes slowly pumps fans In these applications the minimum value is introduced The more dynamic is the system behaviour the more you must increase the minimum flux level In applications that require dynamic behaviour for example servos and cranes you must set this parameter to default value 100 Note If too low value is used can produce instability and current peaks To avoid this increase this parameter value The algorithm is disabled when this parameter is set to 10096 G19 2 2 INITIAL VOLTAGE Screen 2 V BOOST 0 0 Extended info BOOST VOLTAG
314. ontrol with 3 Auxiliary Pumps Start and Stop on demand Note Use screened cables for the controls and connect the screen to ground 326 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 13 6 Pressure Group Control with Eight Pressure References 13 6 1 Parameters Configuration Parameter Name Description G1 Options Menu 4 LANG ENGLISH G1 4 Language selection ENGLISH 7 PROG PUMP 91 7 Program Activation Gee i the extended functionality of the pump control in 1 MTR CURR 00 00A 02 1 Motor rated current __A Set according to motor nameplate Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt 20 Self cool motor gt 40 Force cooled motor gt 100 REF1 SPD PID 50 gt STARTISTP Automatic starting of the system configuration G4 1 6 Multi function Digital Input 2 63 5 1 low bit configuration for the selection of configuration multiple setpoints 04 1 7 Multi function Digital Input 3 64 SETPONT PIN2 middle bit configuration for the selection of configuration multiple setpoints G4 1 8 Multi function Digital Input 4 65 SETPONT high bit configuration for the selection of configuration multiple setpoints G4 Inputs 54 3 Analogue Input 2 S G4 3 1 To enable sensor of Analogue Y YES gt li allows enabling the sensor of the Analogue Input 2 x Input 2 that will be used for PID feedback is G4 3 2
315. op the drive or subject it to impact The SDRIVE 700 drives contain static sensitive printed circuits boards Use static safety procedures when handling these boards Avoid installing the drive in conditions that differ from those described in the Technical Characteristics section CONNECTION PRECAUTIONS To ensure correct operation of the drive it is recommended to use a SCREENED CABLE for the control wiring For EMERGENCY STOP make sure supply circuitry is open Do not disconnect motor cables if input power supply remains connected The internal circuits of the SDRIVE 700 series will be damaged if the incoming power is connected and applied to output terminals U V W It is not recommended to use a 3 wire cable for long distances Due to increased leakage capacitance between conductors over current protective feature may not operate correctly Do not use power factor correction capacitors surge suppressors or RFI filters on the output side of the drive Doing so may damage these components Always check whether the DC Link LED is OFF before wiring terminals The capacitors may hold high voltage even after the input power is disconnected Use caution to prevent the possibility of personal injury TRIAL RUN Verify all parameters before operating the drive Alteration of parameters may be required depending on application and load Always apply voltage and current signals to each terminal that are within levels indica
316. or P G25 1 10 42156 54519 Local setpoint 6 for P 4 G25 1 11 42157 84520 Local setpoint 7 for P 4 G25 1 12 42158 SV5 21 Local setpoint 8 for P 0 3276 Eng Units 0 to 32760 0 3276 Eng Units 0 to 32760 0 3276 Eng Units 0 to 32760 0 3276 Eng Units 0 to 32760 0 3276 Eng Units 0 to 32760 0 3276 Eng Units 0 to 32760 Delay time before activating sleep mode Sleep speed for Sleep speed for Sleep speed for Sleep speed for Sleep speed for Sleep speed for Sleep speed for Sleep speed for ocal setpoint 1 ocal setpoint 2 ocal setpoint 3 ocal setpoint 4 ocal setpoint 5 ocal setpoint 6 ocal setpoint 7 ocal setpoint 8 OFF 0 1 9995 0 0 to 250 0 to 9990 42315 G25 4 19 Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump 0 0 to 250 0 to 20480 Stop speed 2 for one fixed pump 0 0 to 250 42317 G25 4 21 Stop speed for one fixed pump 0 0 to 250 42318 G25 4 22 Stop speed 4 for one fixed pump 0 0 to 250 0 to 20480 0 to 20480 0 to 20480 42319 G25 4 23 Stop speed 5 for one fixed pump 0 0 to 250 0 to 20480 42320 G25 4 24 Stop speed 6 for one fixed pump 0 0 to 250 0 to 20480 42321 G25 4 25 Stop speed 7 for one fixed pump 0 0 to 250 42322 G25 4 26 Stop speed 8 for one fixed pump 0 0 to 250 42323 G25 4 10 enable No Flow input to sleep the drive No Y Yes 625 4 11 2 5 5 26
317. or to stop fixed 10s 1 3 o m o oa A z m m m t N m v No z 0 1 lt o enable fixed pump associated lt N N e e to to o enable fixed pump associa D lt lt D gt gt 0 m m 79 79 7 79 N lt 13 5 2 Connections Drawing There are several configuration options available when pump program is activated These options can be configured like in standard program Nevertheless unlike standard program when pump program is activated the drive will only allow setting the options of each digital input from G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 and will not consider the setting realized in parameter G4 1 4 DIGIT MODE where digital inputs are set in groups This means that user will configure the pump program as he wants by selecting the functionality and protections that he needs For a correct configuration of the inputs when pump program is active see chapter G25 Pump Control to get additional information COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 325 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Note If the Pump Control program is selected and then de selected all of the Digital Inputs will be reset to mode 00 i e unused It will be necessary to individually configure Digital Input functi
318. ory 0 0 10 0 40508 G19 2 7 Current limit factor 0 0 20 0 For VIN 400V 500V gt SM 800 to 810 OFF 811V 40509 617 6 Voltage for activating regeneration control For VIN 690V gt 1150 to 1160V OFF 1161V Modbus Range 10 to 65000 10 to 65000 10 to 65000 10 to 65000 0 to 20480 0 to 60000 0 to 250 1 to 255 0 to 1 0 to 600 610 0 to 600 610 0 to 9999 0 to 600 610 0 to 2458 3230 to 4250 5860 to 6210 0 to 600 610 4180 to 5500 7260 to 7590 0 to 600 610 0102 0101 For VIN 400V 500V gt 800 to 810 811 For VIN 690V 3 1150 to 1160 1161 0 to 1 40522 G19 1 1 Selection of control type V Hz PEVE 40523 G19 1 2 Commutation frequency 4000 8000 2 40524 01913 N No Yes 4000 to 8000 0101 40549 61 11 Drive fan control mode FIXE TEMP MODBUS COMMUNICATION 305 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Address Screen Description Range Modbus Range 4054 Sv63 Reset for partial time counter of running RUN No Y Yes HOST t allows giving the start command to the HOST t allows giving the stop command to the CONTROL _ 0 7 CONTROL equipment through communications network HOST t allows the equipment to generate a fault mr CONTROL through communications network 40571 Auto Reset No Y Yes 1 N 40572 612 2 Number of Auto Reset attempts 40573 0123 Delay time before Auto Reset 5 1
319. otor would rotate faster that stator and a sudden braking of the load would be generated due to this a mechanical blow is produced and its consequent regeneration If we select the option SPIN then we can start loads in movement avoiding these problems Note When drive starts by SPIN rotation direction applied to the motor is the same rotation direction of reference speed When speed reference is 0 0 rotation direction applied to the motor is positive The following figure shows the drive behaviour at starting by SPIN In this case the starting is due to an input power loss and reestablishment of it again Drive can also start in this way if Option SPIN is configured motor is stopped by inertia in parameter G7 1 gt Stop mode 1 or G7 2 gt Stop mode 2 depending on the stop mode selection realized before Drive receives the stop command and starts to stop the motor Drive receives the start command again before motor is stopped completely DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 129 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS INPUT 4S POWER MOTOR SPEED OUTPUT SPEED SPEED REFERENCE OUTPUT VOLTAGE INPUT POWER 1055 RESTORED ti t t t t TIME gt ti t t t t TIME gt t 5 5 t 5 gt t t t ts SD70ITCCO0032AI Figure 10 26 Start by SPIN of drive when input power is lost and restored again 07 5 START MODE 2 Screen 5 START 2 RAMP Description Start m
320. ou have to pass the control wiring next to the power wiring it should do perpendicularly The cable should be screened and the shield should be connected to ground Do not use voltages of 24Vdc and 220Vac into the same cable Observations before Trial Run Before applying voltage we recommended to check that the power wiring is connected correctly and to verify that the connections are correctly fastened It is recommended to close the doors of SD700 before applying voltage the first time Before applying voltage to the drive and configuring it make sure the line voltage is compatible with drive power supply On the contrary the drive will be damaged After applying voltage to the drive verify the display is turned on and the status led of the DC bus is also illuminated Check line voltages when the display is lit If the drive does not read one of the 3 phases then check input power wiring Before starting the SD700 the parameters should be programmed correctly for proper operation of the motor Ensure the correct motor parameters are entered before giving the first start command to the drive VA WARNING It is absolutely necessary that the installer guaranties the correct observance of the law and the regulations that are in force in those countries or areas where this device is going to be installed INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 15 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 3 POWER RANGE 3 1 Power Range at 400Vac
321. ows a list of the last five faults in chronological order The most recent fault appears in first place G13 1 Each time that a faults occurs the drive shows the fault in parameter G13 1 After the fault is solved and reset this fault will be shifted to the following position of fault register G13 2 The previous faults will shift down one position The oldest fault message stored G13 6 gt Register 5 of fault history will be lost By pressing key two seconds approximately you can access to the extended information that shows the fault order FIFTH FAULT Fxx upto FIRST FAULT Fxx 192 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G13 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function Next all of the faults are shown 0 FONOFAULT 1 F1ILIMFLT 2 F2VLIMFLT 3 F3PDINT FLT 4 gt F4U DESAT 5 F5U DESAT 6 gt F6V DESAT 7 F7 V DESAT 8 F8W DESAT 9 F9W DESAT 10 F10 NEG DESAT 11 gt F11 VIN LOSS 12 F12IMBVIN 13 14 F14LW V IN 15 gt F15 CURL 16 gt F16HI Vdc 17 gt F17 LW Vdc 18 gt F18 IMB V OUT 19 gt F19 IMB I OUT 20 F20 GROUND FLT 21 F21ILIM T O 22 F22TQLIM T O 25 25 27 gt F27 DL SMTH 28 F28 MICRO FLT 29 F29 DSP FLT 30 gt F30 WATCHDOG 31 gt F31SCRL1 32 F32SCRL2 REGISTER 2 OF FAULT H
322. p from underload status it is necessary to realize the following settings a Setto Y this parameter b Seta value of underload current in parameter G11 15 below which the first detection condition will be fulfilled Seta value of underload speed in parameter G11 16 above which the second detection condition will be fulfilled d Seta delay time for activation of underload protection in parameter G11 17 Once elapsed the last underload condition will be activated If three previous conditions are fulfilled the drive will stop the pump to protect it from underload status G11 15 UNDERLOAD CURRENT Screen 15 ULD CUR A Extended info UNDERLOAD CURREN Description Underload current Range 0 2 to 1 50 In Default value This value depends on the drive capacity Set on run YES Modbus address 42086 Modbus range 010 12288 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a value for underload current below which the first detection condition to activate the protection is fulfilled This parameter operates together with parameters G11 16 gt Underload speed and G11 17 gt Delay time to activate underload protection See Function in parameter G11 14 gt To enable underload protection to obtain information about the setting of underload parameters G11 16 UNDERLOAD SPEED Screen 16 ULD SPD 100 Extended info UNDERLOAD SPEED Description Underload speed Range 0 095 to 250 Default valu
323. pection Be sure to check the following points before handling the drive Installation site conditions Drive cooling system conditions Excessive vibrations Excessive overheating 318 FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 12 3 3 Daily and periodic inspections Period 52 Inspection am Instrument of 9 element Inspection 8 5 Inspection method Criterion Measurement alia Are there dust particles Temperatures Are the ambient Thermometer Ambient P 30 to 50 temperature and the 0 See Warnings MA Hygrometer conditions Humidity below 95 non humidity within 3 Recorder condensing All specification Module Are mae any abnormal 0 Visual and audible There are no anomalies noises or oscillations 16 the input power to the Measure the voltage between Digital Input power se cae 0 multimeter main circuit correct terminals R S T and N Tester 16 the conductor Conductor corroded Visual check No anomal Cable Is the sheathing of the y 0 cable damaged Terminal Is any damage visible 0 Visual check No anomaly Disconnect the cables of the drive and measure the IGBT s module Check the resistance resistance value between Digital Diodes module value between each one o R ST lt VDC VDC multimeter and Rectifier of the terminals and Analog
324. peed reference is not modified when a setpoint value of PID regulator is set here Parameter G3 3 together with this one offer the possibility of having two references or setpoints adjusted from keypad for PID regulator Note This parameter will only be available if G6 1 gt Source selection for introducing reference signal is set to locPID G6 3 SELECTION OF FEEDBACK SIGNAL SOURCE Screen 3 SEL AI2 Description Selection of feedback signal source for PID regulator Range NONE Al2 RESERV See Function for additional information Default value Al2 Set on run YES Modbus address 40143 Modbus range 0 to 3 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the source through which the feedback signal will be introduced to close the control loop Selection options are the following ones NONE PID function is not active Feedback signal introduced through the Analogue Input 1 AI2 Feedback signal introduced through the Analogue Input 2 RESERV Reserve DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 123 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G6 4 PROPORTIONAL GAIN OF PID CONTROL Screen 4 GAIN Kp 8 0 Extended info PID PROPORTIONAL Description Proportional gain of PID control Range 0 1 to 20 Default value 8 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40144 Modbus range 1 to 200 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the proportional gain of PID regulator Note Usually default val
325. peed searching function when the drive starts by SPIN mode Usually the optimum value is between 2 and 5 As the value is lower more accuracy is required G7 12 DELAY TIME FOR START COMMAND AFTER STOP 2 Screen 12 OFFdly2 OFF Extended info DELAY AFTER STP2 Description Delay time for start command after stop delay time between stop and next start 2 Range OFF 0 0 6500 0s Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40031 Modbus range 0 to 65000 Read Write YES Function Delay time for start command after producing a stop If the start command is given after the time set in this parameter has elapsed the drive will start immediately 136 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 8 Group 8 G8 Outputs 10 8 1 Subgroup 8 1 58 1 Output Relays G8 1 1 SELECTION OF RELAY 1 CONTROL SOURCE Screen 1 SEL RELAY 1 02 Description Selection of the control source for the Relay 1 Range 00 32 See Function for additional information Default value 02 Set on run NO Modbus address 40362 Modbus range 0 to 32 Read Write YES Function It allows configuring the operation for Relay 1 according to the following options 00 ALWAYS OFF Output is not active 01 gt ALWAYS When the drive is powered the output relay is activated 02 NO FAULTS There is no fault in the drive When a fault occurs the relay will be activated 03 GENERAL FAULT Drive fault or low
326. pressure protection disabled Y gt YES Low pressure protection enabled G25 6 9 MINIMUM PRESURE LEVEL Screen 9 LO PRE 5 0Bar Extended info LO PRESSURE LEVL Description Minimum pressure level Range OFF 0 to 3276 Engineering units Default value 5 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 42091 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the pressure level below which the drive will trip because of low pressure fault F65 LOW PRESSURE Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units G25 6 10 TRIP DELAY TIME BECAUSE OF MINIMUM PRESSURE FAULT Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write 10 Lop DLY 10 0s LO PRESS FLT DLY Trip delay time because of minimum pressure fault 0 999s 10 0s YES 42092 0 to 9990 YES 268 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function Note It allows setting a delay time because of minimum pressure fault During this time the pressure remains below the minimum pressure level set in parameter G25 6 9 generating a trip in the drive because of low pressure fault F65 LOW PRESSURE The protection from low pressure is deactivated during the pipe filling process If a pipe is broken during the pipe filling proces
327. ption Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 12 HP MODE PAUSE Response of the drive from over pressure situation PAUSE FAULT See Function for additional information PAUSE YES 42337 1102 5 It allows setting the response of the drive from over pressure situation PAUSE 2 It will generate the stopping of the drive and next of fixed pumps PRESSURE PAUS will be displayed Once the high pressure condition disappears if the delay time after pause has elapsed the drive will start FAULT 2 It will generate a fault and next fixed pumps will be stopped In this case the visualization will be F66 HI PRESSURE DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 269 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 6 13 MAXIMUM PRESSURE LEVEL Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 13 HP LEV 100Bar HIGH PRESS LEVEL Maximum pressure level 0 3276 Engineering units 100Bar YES 42101 0 to 32760 YES It allows setting the pressure level above which the drive recognises a high pressure level by comparing with data received through analogue input reading of PID feedback sensor Once exceeded the detection threshold and elapsed the time set in parameter G25 6 14 gt Trip time because of high pressure the drive will stop by PAUSE or will trip by FAULT according t
328. put 1 The reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 2 The reference will be the addition of the signals introduced through the Analogue Inputs 1 and 2 Reserved for future use The reference will be introduced by keypad and will be set in G3 3 2 Local speed reference Multi reference It allows activating different references by digital inputs For this you need to configure the digital inputs See S4 1 2 Digital Inputs Reference taken by motorized potentiometer with or without reference memorizing It will take as reference the value set in the parameters of the PID function DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 89 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G3 2 REFERENCE SOURCE 2 OF SPEED Screen 2 REF2 SPD LOCAL Description Reference source 2 of speed Range NONE AI2 11 AI2 LOCAL MREF PMOT PID Default value LOCAL Set on run YES Modbus address 40123 Modbus range 0 t0 8 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the reference source 2 of speed See Function in parameter G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed for additional information about the configuration options G3 3 LOCAL SPEED REFERENCE Screen 3 LOCAL SPD 100 Extended info LOCAL SPEED Description Local speed reference Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Modbus address 40124 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the value
329. quency 4 to 8kHz PEWave without losses Output dV dt filter 500 to 800V us according to 50700 rating Output cable length Maximum 300 meters Ambient temperature Minimum 30 C Maximum 50 Altitude 1000m ENVIRONMENTAL Altitude de rating gt 1000 1 per 100m 3000m maximum CONDITIONS Degree protection IP00 IP20 and IP54 Ambient humidity lt 95 non condensing Display degree protection IP54 Rotor locked Motor overload thermal model MOTOR Phase current imbalance phase voltage imbalance PROTECTIONS Motor over temperature PTC signal Speed limit Torque limit Output current limit Overload IGBT s overload Input phase loss Low input voltage High input voltage DC Bus voltage limit Low DC Bus voltage DRIVE High input frequency PROTECTIONS Low input frequency IGBT temperature Heat sink over temperature Power supply fault Drive thermal model Ground fault Software and Hardware fault Analogue input signal loss speed reference loss 6 programmable inputs active high 24Vdc 1 PTC input Conditions are correct PTC resistance value is between 900 10 and 1K5 10 DIGITAL INPUTS F Possible short circuit in wiring PTC resistance value is lower than 900 10 or excessive temperature in the motor PTC resistance value is higher than 1K5 10 1 programmable digital input controlled by jumper a fault is generated when it is disconnected to avoid dangerous situations during programming Additional features Is
330. r source of which is set in G6 1 gt Source selection for introducing reference signal and the feedback signal value of the process source of which is set G6 3 gt Selection of feedback signal source This parameter is read only DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 125 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 7 Group 7 G7 Start Stop Mode Configuration G7 1 STOP MODE 1 Screen 1 STOP 1 RAMP Description Stop mode 1 Range RAMP SPIN See Function for additional information Default value RAMP Set on run YES Modbus address 40003 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the main stop mode of drive The selected option must be the appropriate one for each application Selection options RAMP 2 Drive will stop by applying a frequency ramp to stop the motor this is drive applies a zero speed reference and decelerates down to that speed according to the pattern set in G5 2 gt Deceleration ramp 1 SPIN 2 Drive will turn off the output voltage to the motor and this one will stop by inertia Stopping time is determined by system inertia This stop option is recommended for applications with big inertias mills fans crushers etc with the purpose of avoiding possible motor regeneration to the drive Note Stop mode 1 or 2 parameter G7 2 can be selected through a digital input by configuring a digital input with options 02 gt 5 or 04 gt gt STOP1 RESET fo
331. r stop mode 1 or with options 19 gt STOP 2 or 03 gt STOP2 RESET for stop mode 2 in parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 2 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by configuring the output function of one of the comparators options 02 gt STOP 1 and 03 STOP 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 1 69 2 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 2 or G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator or automatically by setting a changing speed G7 3 gt Changing speed for stop mode See figures 10 25 and 10 27 G7 2 STOP MODE 2 Screen 2 STOP 2 SPIN Description Stop mode 2 Range RAMP SPIN Default value SPIN Set on run YES Modbus address 40004 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES 126 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function 67 3 It allows selecting the alternative stop mode of drive The selected option must be the appropriate one for each application See parameter G7 1 gt Stop mode 1 to obtain information about selection options Stop mode 1 or 2 parameter G7 2 can be selected through a digital input by configuring a digital input with options 02 gt 5 or 04 gt STOP1 RESET for stop mode 1 or with options 19 gt STOP 2 or 03 gt STOP2 RESET for stop mode 2 in parameter G4
332. ram Nevertheless when the pump program is active the drive will assume that only the configurable options from 50 to 69 for G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration can be set without taking into consideration the setting on parameter G4 1 4 gt Digital Input configuration selection which means a block setting All that means that the user will configure the pump program freely according to his requirements selecting the correct functionality and protections For a correct programming of the digital inputs when the pump program is active there is additional information in G25 PUMP CONTROL Selection of the pump program will set all the Digital Inputs from G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 to mode 00 NO USE If re programming is needed it will be necessary to configure their functionality in a separate way again So it guarantees a safety installation operation avoiding that hardware external to the equipment can cause any kind of damage The digital outputs will also be affected due to pump control activation To select one auxiliary pump it is necessary to act in the following way Set any free digital input to options 52 gt FIX PUMP1 FLT 53 gt FIX PUMP2 FLT 54 gt FIX FLT 55 gt FIX PUMPA FLT or 56 gt FIX PUMP5 FLT To enable the control of the pump 1 2 3 4 and or 5 set the corresponding parameter G25
333. range of the Analogue Input 1 Range 250 to 250 min G4 2 8 Default value 100 Set on run YES Modbus address 40242 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 min G4 2 8 Read Write YES Function If the Analogue Input 1 is used for introducing the speed reference setting of parameter G4 2 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 1 to N we can set in this parameter the value of this reference corresponding to the maximum voltage or current level set in parameter G4 2 6 gt Maximum range of Analogue Input 1 The value set here is a percentage of the motor rated speed 52 4 Motor rpm See figure 10 20 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 105 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G4 2 14 PROTECTION FOR ANALOGUE INPUT 1 LOSS Screen 14 1 LOSS Description Protection for the Analogue Input 1 loss Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Modbus address 40266 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows user to decide about the behaviour of the equipment when the signal connected to the Analogue Input 1 is lost Options N 3 NO Disabled function Drive does not realize any action in case of the analogue input signal is lost Y gt YES Drive will stop generating the fault F42 AIN1 LOSS since the sensor will be considered damaged when a sharp drop down to zero value in the level of the analogue input signal is detected G4 2 15 ZERO B
334. re 10 43 Selection of multi references through digital inputs DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 197 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G14 1 MULTI REFERENCE 1 Screen 1 MREF 1 10 0 Extended info MULTI REFERENCE1 Description Multi reference 1 Range 250 to 250 Default value 10 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40052 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the value of multi reference 1 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 G14 2 MULTI REFERENCE 2 Screen 2 MREF 2 20 096 Extended info MULTI REFERENCE2 Description Multi reference 2 Range 250 to 250 Default value 20 0 Set run YES Modbus address 40053 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the value of multi reference 2 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 G14 3 MULTI REFERENCE 3 Screen 3 MREF 3 30 0 Extended info MULTI REFERENCE3 Description Multi reference 3 Range 250 to 250 Default value 30 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40054 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the value of multi reference 3 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 1
335. reen 1 AUTO RESET Description To enable or disable auto reset function Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Modbus address 40571 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows enabling or disabling auto reset function When this function is active the drive is reset automatically after occurring a fault it will be reset all of the faults programmed in parameters G12 5 gt Selection of fault 1 to be reset to G12 8 gt Selection of fault 4 to be reset Options N gt NO Auto reset function is disabled Y gt YES Auto reset function is enabled CAUTION Auto reset function can cause unexpected automatic startings Before activating this function ensure the installation fulfils the needed requirements to be configured in this way to prevent property damages or personnel injuries G12 2 NUMBER OF AUTO RESET ATTEMPTS Screen 2 NUMBR 1 Extended info MAX ATTEMPT NUMB Description Number of auto reset attempts Range 1 5 Default value 1 Set on run YES Modbus address 40572 Modbus range 1to5 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the maximum number of auto reset attempts realized by the drive in case of a fault occurs This parameter together with 612 4 gt Reset time for the counter of auto reset attempts control the drive to carry out auto reset function in a controller manner 186 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POW
336. rive will stop automatically Once this time is set this one starts elapsing immediately At the moment of drive is stopped once elapsed the time for automatic stop parameter value become OFF and the status of pump program will change to COMPLETED If you want to the drive to stop automatically again you must adjust the stop time again There are two visualization parameters related to this parameter SV5 22 gt T AutoOFF OFF it is directly parameter G25 1 13 translated to the visualization group SV5 SV5 23 gt TIME OFF OFF that shows the remaining time in minutes for automatic stop of the system DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 235 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 20 8 Subgroup 25 2 25 2 PID Setting G25 2 1 PID SETPOINT SOURCE Screen 1 PID SETP LOCAL Description Selection of the source for PID setpoint Range LOCAL 11 Al2 See Function for additional information Default value LOCAL Set on run YES Modbus address 42045 Modbus range 002 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the source to introduce the PID setpoint Selection options LOCAL setpoint is introduced from keypad setpoint is introduced by means of Analogue Input 1 12 setpoint is introduced by means of Analogue Input 2 G25 2 2 ALTERNATIVE PID SETPOINT SOURCE Screen 2 PID aSTP LOCAL Description Selection of the alternative source for PID setpoint Range LOCAL AI2
337. rrect operation You should set these levels keeping a reasonable margin between them and if it is necessary set a delay time to improve the operation DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 167 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 9 3 Subgroup 9 3 S9 3 Comparator 3 Comparator 3 operates in the same way of Comparator 1 Additionally it includes the same setting parameters with the same configuration options Therefore figures 10 47 10 48 10 49 and 10 50 are also valid for this comparator For this we recommend observe these figures in order to understand better its operation G9 3 1 SOURCE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 3 Screen 1 COMP 3 SEL 00 Description Selection of the source for the Comparator 3 Range 00 22 Default value 00 Set on run YES Modbus address 40320 Modbus range 0 to 22 Read Write YES Function It allows user to select the source for the Comparator 3 Configuration options are the same than the options for Comparator 1 See Function in parameter G9 1 1 Source selection for Comparator 1 to obtain information about configuration options G9 3 2 TYPE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 3 Screen 2 COMP TYPE 0 Description Selection of Comparator 3 type Range 0 1 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40321 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the operation mode of the Comparator 3 Operation modes are 0 gt
338. rs G25 6 4 Cavitation current and G25 6 6 gt Delay time to activate cavitation protection See Function in parameter G25 6 2 To enable cavitation protection to obtain information about the setting of cavitation parameters G25 6 6 DELAY TIME TO ACTIVATE CAVITATION PROTECTION Screen 6 DELAY 10s Extended info CAVIT FLT DELAY Description Delay time to activate cavitation protection Range 0 999s Default value 10s Set on run YES Modbus address 42088 Modbus range 0 to 9990 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the delay time to activate cavitation protection The drive will wait for the time before activating the protection and then will stop This parameter operates together with parameters G25 6 4 gt Cavitation current and G25 6 5 gt Cavitation speed See Function in parameter G25 6 2 To enable cavitation protection to obtain information about the setting of cavitation parameters DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 267 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 6 7 TO ENABLE LOW PRESSURE PROTECTION Screen ENABLE LO PRE N Description To enable low pressure protection Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Modbus address 42090 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows the possibility of tripping because of low pressure fault F65 LOW PRESSURE and stopping the pump N gt NO Low
339. run spin if this time has elapsed and the motor has not stopped completely Controlled stop time is calculated in standard conditions during system operation Stop limit time must be set to a higher value than controlled stop time value Note With a high input voltage the drive has a limited capacity to absorb in DC Bus the power regenerated by high inertial loads This can prevent the equipment from following the speed reference beyond this limit Stop limit time can be used to provide with protection from control losses due to excessive regeneration Stop limit time is also useful to protect from incorrect setting of parameters of the PID regulator in closed loop control 178 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G11 3 GROUND FAULT DETECTION Screen 3 GND I LIMIT 10 Extended info GND CURR MAX LEV Description Ground fault detection Range OFF 0 30 In Default value 1096 Set on run YES Modbus address 40456 Modbus range 0 to 2458 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a value of leakage current to ground It provides with the option of tripping the equipment drive turns off the output to the motor because of fault F20 GROUND FLT automatically if a leakage current higher than the value set in this parameter has been reached G11 4 LOW INPUT VOLTAGE LEVEL Screen 4 LOW VOLT 360V Extended info LO INPUT VOLTAGE Description Minimum level of input voltage Range 323
340. s Engineering units Modbus address 42007 PID reference left hand 42009 gt Feedback signal right hand Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the PID reference value left hand and the sensor value which is sent by the feedback signal right hand SV8 2 DRIVE STATUS DURING PUMP CONTROL Screen REGL 0 0 0 0 Units sensor range Modbus address 42002 Drive status left hand 42006 gt PID reference center 42008 Feedback right hand Modbus range 0 to 22 DRIVE STATUS 0 REGL 6 NFLO 12 gt IRFA 18 FILL 1 gt PMAN 7 CAVS 13 FLOW 19 gt COMP 2 OMAN 8 14 gt OFF 20 gt JOCK 3 HIPP 9 LOPR 15 gt SLEP 21 3 PRIM 4 HIPR 10 gt LOWA 16 gt 22 3 FINP 5 FLOD 11 gt CYCL 17 9 RAMP Note See Description for additional information about drive status while pump control is active Read Write Read Only Description It shows the drive status during the pump control operation according to the following table Status Description REGL Drive is regulating in PID mode PMAN The drive is at protected manual mode OMAN Drive is in manual mode not protective mode HIPP Drive is stopped pause due to high pressure according to the read data in the analogue input HIPR A fault due to high pressure has occurred according to the read data in the analogue input or in
341. s lost the speed reference will not be memorized but the minimum reference value set in G10 1 3 Minimum speed limit 1 or G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 will be taken DI5 Up it increases the speed reference Contact NO DI6 Down it decreases the speed reference Contact NC The reference limits will be the speed limits of the equipment that are set in group G10 LIMITS Like in the previous mode we can set the increase and the decrease of the speed while push buttons Up or Down are pressed according to a double ramp for each case settings in group G5 ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION RAMPS Read option 4 MOTORIZED POT See figure 10 19 Note For using this function it is necessary to set G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed 53 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with option PMOT according to the selected source DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 95 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Note Note Caution Digital input configuration changes automatically the settings of the digital inputs themselves Make sure there is not a hazard of accidental starting to avoid personal injuries or property damages Pumps program activation G1 7 gt Program activation set to PUMP requires the following considerations There are some configuration options available when the pump program is active which can be set in the same way that the options available in the standard prog
342. s memorized 5 gt ERASAB POT As per above mode without memorizing the reference 5 DIGITL IN 1 05 04 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 05 gt Start Stop Allows the start stop command to be given by a configuration switch G5 Inputs Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps 65 7 Ramp 1 of reference increase for 1 0 s Modify these ramps to tune operation If the ramp is 7 PMT ACL 121 09 8 ne and increased the speed reference response will be faster If the ramp motorized potentiometer 4 is decreased the speed reference response will be slower 3 0 s Modify these ramps to tune operation If the ramp is 8 PMT DCL1 3 0 s Ramp 1 oi rorerence decrease Tor increased the speed reference response will be faster If the ramp motorized potentiometer is decreased the speed reference response will be slower 13 3 2 Connections Drawing 7 MTR COOL 40 G2 7 Motor cooling at zero speed G4 1 4 Digital Inputs configuration 4 DIGIT MODE 1 selection Terminals 1 and 2 start stop command NO status Terminals 1 and 6 up speed command NO status Terminals 1 and 7 down speed command NC status X1 CONNECTOR X2 CONNECTOR 24V Usr DI 24 24 NO Contact 05 Start Stop 8 9 2 DI2 3 15 Reference 2 8 NC Contact 284 8 noc E 3 5 ontact Common 3 015 gt Speed Up 5 NC Contact o 016 gt Speed Down 3 02
343. s or when the drive is stopped then the pipe filling process does not finish by reached pressure but by time Once finished the stage of pipe filling the breakage detection will be activated and will trip after elapsing the set time Additionally it is necessary to consider in case of existing enabled fixed pumps these ones must be connected for the minimum pressure conditions are evaluated otherwise the drive executes the normal connection process of pumps before tripping because of minimum pressure G25 6 11 MINIMUM SPEED FOR MINIMUM PRESSURE FAULT Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function Note 11 Lop Msp 0 096 LO PRESS MIN SPED Minimum speed for minimum pressure fault 0 0 to 250 0 0 YES 42104 0 to 20480 YES It allows setting the minimum speed for the trip of minimum pressure fault F65 LOW PRESSURE possible broken pipe Although hardware or software conditions exist favourable comparison to trip because of minimum pressure fault the trip is not produced while the present motor speed is not lower than the speed set in this parameter if any of the enabled fixed pumps is not started either In short it is an additional safety measurement to guarantee the broken pipe detection with a higher reliability This parameter value is set in of motor rated speed G25 6 12 RESPONSE FROM OVER PRESSURE Screen Descri
344. s range Read Write Read Only Function It allows visualizing the information of the fault stored in register 6 of fault history To obtain information about data storage in the different registers and visualize the fault list see section Function in parameter G13 1 gt Register 1 of fault history G13 7 ERASE FAULT HISTORY Screen 7 CLEAR FAULTS Description To erase fault history register Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Modbus address 40438 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows user to erase the faults stored in registers of fault history Options N23 NO Function disabled Y YES It erases fault history last six faults The screen returns to default value after all of the faults have been erased DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 195 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 14 Group 14 G14 Multi references This parameters group allows user to set multiple references for the equipment These references will be activated by using digital inputs configured as multiple speed references or PID setpoints To use them like this you must proceed in the following manner 1 Select option 2 2 WIRES or 3 gt WIRES in parameter G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration 2 Oncerealized the previous setting you must select if multi references are speed references or PID setpoints
345. s range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the sleep speed 4 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 4 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 249 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 6 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 5 Screen 6 SLPsp5 40 0 Extended info DRV SLEEP SPEED5 Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 5 Range 0 096 to 250 Default value 40 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42311 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the sleep speed 5 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 5 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 G25 4 7 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 6 Screen 7 SLPsp2 40 0 Extended info DRV SLEEP SPEED6 Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 6 Range 0 096 to 250 Default value 40 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42312 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the sleep speed 6 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 6 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 G25 4 8 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 7 Screen 8 SLPsp7 40 096 Extended info DRV SLEEP SPEED7 Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 7 Range 0 096 to 250 Default value
346. s value will be set in this parameter In case of operating with multiple PID setpoints the speed applied for each case will depend on the activating status of the digital inputs configured with options 63 gt SETPONT Low Bit 64 SETPONT PIN Medium Bit and 65 gt SETPONT PIN3 High Bit in parameters G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration The assignment of multiple setpoints is realized according to the following table DIGITAL INPUTS Dl z 265 DI y 64 DI x 63 0 0 0 G25 1 5 SETPT1 0 0 X G25 1 6 SETPT2 0 X 0 G25 1 7 SETPT3 0 X X G25 1 8 SETPT4 X 0 0 G25 1 9 5 X 0 X G25 1 10 SETPT6 X X 0 G25 1 11 SETPT7 X X X G25 1 12 SETPT8 G25 1 6 LOCAL SETPOINT 2 FOR PID Screen 6 5 2 0 0Bar Extended info LOCAL SETPOINT 2 Description Local setpoint 2 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42152 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 2 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 l s m s l min m min l h m h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PI
347. sidered During the bypass process connection of fixed pumps these conditions will be not considered either G25 3 1 WAKE UP LEVEL OF THE DRIVE Screen 1 LP Pon 0 0Bar Extended info AWAKENING LEVEL Description Wake up level of the drive Range 0 0 3276Bar Default value 0 Set run YES Modbus address 42064 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the wake up level of the drive The value is set in units For example if the PID setpoint is 5Bar and the value set in this parameter is 2Bar then we are placing the wake up level below 3Bar 5Bar 2Bar 3Bar 240 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 FEEDBACK Engineer Units G253 1 TIME gt ti t t t ts t t MOTOR SPEED STEADY SPEED 625 4 2 gt DRIVE PUMP 5 ON TIME OFF gt ti t t t t t t G25 3 1 gt Wake up level of the drive G25 4 1 gt Delay time before activating sleep mode t t G25 4 2 gt Sleep speed for local setpoint 1 NOTE For this example we have taken as stop condition of the drive pump sleep mode activation a speed value concretely the sleep speed assigned to the local setpoint 1 But the stop condition can be any one of the remain speeds associated to each one of the PID local setpoints in case of the stop condition is the speed signal or can also be the flow detection the flow level or the output current level 5070 0025
348. speed 1 set in parameter G15 1 06 START INCH2 Output of comparator activates the start command and takes inch speed 2 as speed reference When comparator output is activated drive will start and will accelerate until the speed reference is reached in this case the speed reference is inch speed 2 set in parameter G15 2 07 gt START INCH3 Output of comparator activates the start command and takes inch speed 3 as speed reference When comparator output is activated drive will start and will accelerate until the speed reference is reached in this case the speed reference is inch speed 3 set in parameter G15 3 08 gt INV SPEED Activation of the comparator output inverts the speed this is the rotation direction of the motor For that drive applies a deceleration ramp until stopping the motor and next changes the rotation direction of the motor and accelerates until reaching the same speed value Note Rotation inversion function must be enabled in parameter G10 9 gt To enable speed inversion DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 161 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 09 gt ACC DEC 2 When comparator output is activated alternative ramps adjusted in G5 3 gt Acceleration ramp 2 and 55 4 gt Deceleration ramp 2 are activated 10 REFERENCE 2 When comparator output is activated the alternative reference selected in 53 2 Reference source 2 of speed is activated 11 gt SPEED LIMI
349. speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 260 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 4 26 STOP SPEED 8 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen 26 SPD8of 70 0 Extended info FPUMP STP SPEED8 Description Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 8 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 70 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42322 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 8 set in parameter G25 1 12 gt Local setpoint 8 for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 G25 4 27 LEVEL FOR ACTIVATING SLEEP MODE IN PID INVERSE Screen 27 PIDiSL 6 0 0
350. ssure and for example it goes in sleep mode to wake up immediately a faulty check valve incorrect setting of the parameters or problems with measurement sensor This function also will operate together with cavitation protection avoiding that the drive pump is starting and stopping continuously in cavitation pauses If the drive starts a number of times without relaxing for the time set in this parameter then the drive will trip because of fault F71 CYCLING also stopping the fixed pumps G25 6 21 CYCLE COUNTER Screen 21 CYCLE CNT 5 Extended info MAX CYCLES ALLOW Description Cycle counter Range 1 5 Default value 5 Set on run YES Modbus address 42354 Modbus range 105 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the maximum number of allowed cycles without relaxing If this number is exceeded then trip will be generated Note Go to sleep and wake up is also considered a cycle DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 273 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 20 13 Subgroup 25 7 S25 7 Pipe Filling Process Setpoint Ramp G25 7 1 PRESSURE READING SOURCE Screen 1 PRESSU SOU PID Description Pressure reading source Range PID Al2 See Function for additional information Default value PID Set on run YES Modbus address 42357 Modbus range 002 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting the source for the reading of the pressure that determines the end of the pipe filling process parame
351. t MOTORIZED POT or 5 9 ERASAB POT Additionally it is necessary to set G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed or G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with the option depending on the selected source is 1 or 2 With this function user can introduce the speed reference by means of two push buttons connected to the digital inputs DI5 up or increase the speed reference and DI6 down or decrease the speed reference While we press Up push button we can increase the speed by applying up to two different ramps previously set ramps 1 and 2 of reference increase The ramp change is set in parameter G5 11 gt Speed for ramp change with motorized potentiometer If G5 11 is set to OFF any ramp change will not be done In this case the drive will search the reference speed by only applying the ramp 1 for reference increase of motorized potentiometer set in this parameter Setting is realized in acceleration units increase in of speed per second See figure 10 24 G5 8 RAMP 1 OF REFERENCE DECREASE FOR MOTORIZED POTENTIOMETER Screen 8 3 0 s Extended info MOTO POT DEC1 Description Ramp 1 of reference decrease for motorized potentiometer function Range 0 01 650 5 Default value 3 0 6 Set on run YES Modbus address 40399 Modbus range 10 to 65000 Read Write YES 118 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting th
352. t Subnet Mask address for additional information G20 4 8 SUBNET MASK ADDRESS D Screen 8 SUBNET D 0 Description Subnet Mask address D Range 0 255 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40381 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field D of the Subnet Mask address of the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 5 gt Subnet Mask address for additional information G20 4 9 GATEWAY ADDRESS A Screen 9 GATEWAY Az 0 Description Gateway address A Range 0 255 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40382 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field A of the Gateway address of the local network of the user This address is needed to the drive access to an external network This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user The format of the Gateway address is the following one A B C D Therefore the setting of this address is realized by introducing a value in each parameter that configure the complete address this is by assigning a value to each one of the 4 parameters from parameter G20 4 9 Gateway address A to parameter G20 4 12 Gateway address DY DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 221 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G20 4 10 GATEWAY ADDRESS B Screen 10 GATEWAY
353. t allows controlling automatically a process which depends on the physical variable according to the motor speed for example pressure flow height current temperature etc The functions of PID regulator will be set in the parameters of this group after enabling the PID regulator in parameters 53 1 Reference source 1 of speed or G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed option PID The PID regulator operates correctly with factory settings nevertheless if you want to optimize the setting you can follow the next steps Increase the proportional gain parameter G6 3 until the first oscillation is taken place then set it to 40 of the value in which the oscillation occurred Decrease the integration time parameter G6 4 until the first oscillation is taken place then set it to 150 of the value in which the oscillation occurred Increase the derivation time parameter G6 5 until achieving a small impulse without occurring oscillation Usually derivation time does not exceed 25 of integration time G6 1 SOURCE SELECTION FOR INTRODUCING REFERENCE SIGNAL Screen 1 SEL REF MREF Description Selection of introduction source for PID regulator setpoint Range NONE Al2 RESERV MREF LOCAL locPID See Function for additional information Default value MREF Set on run YES Modbus address 40142 Modbus range 0 to 6 Read Write YES Function It allows user to select the source for introducing
354. t relay parameters G8 1 1 gt Selection of Relay 1 control source G8 1 5 gt Selection of Relay 2 control source and G8 1 9 2 Selection of Relay control source configured with the option 29 JOCKEY PUMP DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 281 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 9 8 START DELAY TIME FOR JOCKEY PUMP Screen 8 JPon DLY z 20s Extended info JOCKEY ON DELAY Description Start delay time for Jockey pump Range 0 6005 Default value 20s Set on run YES Modbus address 42372 Modbus range 0 to 6000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time to start the Jockey pump This time will start elapsing after the condition to start this pump is fulfilled this is when the pressure is below the level set in parameter G25 9 7 gt Starting pressure of Jockey pump G25 9 9 STOPPING PRESSURE OF JOCKEY PUMP Screen 9 JPof P 0 0Bar Extended info JOCKEY OFF PRESS Description Stopping pressure of Jockey pump Range 0 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42373 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the pressure level above which the Jockey pump will stop If the drive pump starts then the Jockey pump will stop automatically although the pressure level set in this parameter is not reached G25 9 10 BYPASS TIME FOR PRIMING PUMP Screen 10 PRp BYP z 300s Extended info PRIM PUM BYP DLY Description B
355. te YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 245 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows setting a delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Relay 3 At the moment of starting the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 Start speed for the fixed pumps and the PID error G25 3 3 gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps Note If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figures 10 47 and 10 48 G25 3 7 DELAY TIME TO START FIXED PUMP 4 1 Screen FP T4 ON 10s Extended info FIX PMP4 STR DLY Description Delay time to start the fixed pump 4 Analogue Output 1 Range OFF 0 6000s Default value 10s Set on run YES Modbus address 42067 Modbus range 0 to 60000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 At the moment of starting the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 Start speed for the fixed pumps and the PID error G25 3 3 gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps Note If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figures 10 47 and 10 48 G25 3 8 DELAY TIME TO START FIXED PUMP 5 AO2
356. ted correctly or there is no voltage in it Input phase L3 is not connected correctly or there is no voltage in it External trip device has operated Check the cooling and thermal conditions Request technical assistance Verify the wiring of the input power supply of the drive Check input voltage and input fuses Check the external trip switch if exists Motor is overheated motor load exceeds the cooling capacity at operating speed Check motor temperature To reset the fault the motor must be return to normal temperature Fault in sensor connection Trip generated by a computer through serial communication Analogue input cable has been come loose or disconnected terminals 10 and 11 Analogue input cable has been come loose or disconnected T12 and T13 SD700 fault Deceleration ramps parameters G5 2 DECEL1 and G5 4 DECEL2 are too slow SD700 is voltage limiting voltage due to regeneration from the motor Integrated circuit fault Check sensor wiring Disconnect the SD700 from the communication network and verify if the fault is generated again Verify the wiring and the device which provides the analogue signal Verify the wiring and the device which provides the analogue signal Verify drive select Request technical assistance Verify that the time set in parameter G11 2 STOP TO to stop the system after setting deceleration ramps and checking the system performance
357. ted within this manual Otherwise damage to the drive may result SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 9 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS OPERATION PRECAUTIONS When the Auto Restart function is enabled keep clear of driven equipment as the motor will restart suddenly after a fault is reset The STOP RESET key on the keypad is active only if the appropriate function setting has been made For this reason install a separate EMERGENCY STOP push button that can be operated at the equipment If a fault reset is made with the reference signal still present then a restart will occur Verify that it is permissible for this to happen otherwise an accident may occur Do not modify or alter anything within the drive Before programming or operating the SDRIVE 700 series initialise all parameters back to factory default values EARTH CONNECTION The drive is a high frequency switching device and leakage current may flow Ground the drive to avoid electrical shock Use caution to prevent the possibility of personal injury Connect only to the dedicated ground terminal of the drive Do not use the case or the chassis screw for grounding When installing grounding wire should be connected first and removed last The earth cable must have a minimal cross sectional area that meets local country electrical regulations Motor ground must be connected to the drive ground terminal and not to the installation s ground We recommend that
358. ter G25 7 3 The configurable options are the following ones PID 2 Pressure reading from feedback signal of the PID 2 Pressure reading from Analogue Input 1 AI2 2 Pressure reading from Analogue Input 2 G25 7 2 SPEED FOR PIPE FILLING PROCESS Screen 2 FILL SP 70 0 Extended info PIPE FILLING SPD Description Speed for pipe filling process Range OFF 0 0 0 1 to 250 Default value 70 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 42116 Modbus range 0 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the reference speed during the pipe filling process G25 7 3 PRESSURE FOR THE END OF FILLING PROCESS Screen 3 FILL P 2 0Bar Extended info PFILL END PRESSU Description Pressure level to finish the pipe filling process Range 0 0 3276 Engineering units Default value 2 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 42117 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES 274 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 It allows setting the pressure level that determines the end of the pipe filling process The sleep function of the drive is disabled during pipe filling process Once the filling function is finished the drive will go to the stage of setpoint ramp The pressure level set in this parameter together with the time set in parameter G25 7 4 Safety time for pipe filling process are the conditions to end the pipe filling process The condition that is fulfilled before pressure or time will
359. the motor and this one is stopped by inertia until stopping If this parameter is set to OFF stop mode change will not be realized See figures 10 25 and 10 27 This parameter has only effect when stop mode 1 or 2 depending on the mode selection is set to RAMP DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 127 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS N VOLTAGE VOLTAGE APPLIED AT REF SPEED Voltage applied at speed of G7 3 G7 2 G7 1 gt Stop mode 1 67 2 gt Stop mode 2 67 3 gt Changing speed for stop mode MOTOR SPEED REFERENCE SPEED G7 1 RAMP The grade depends on the load since the motor stops by inertia G73 The grade is more extended when the C load is lower x x 7 2 SPIN The grade is less extended when the load is higher SD70ITCCO0008AI Figure 10 25 Change from stop mode by RAMP to stop mode by SPIN Note Stop mode 1 or 2 parameter G7 2 can be selected through a digital input by configuring a digital input with options 02 gt STOP1 or 04 gt STOP1 RESET for stop mode 1 or with options 19 gt STOP 2 or 03 gt STOP2 RESET for stop mode 2 in parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 2 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by configuring the output function of one of the comparators options 02 gt STOP 1 and 03 gt STOP 2 in paramet
360. the digital input FLOD The drive has stopped Pause status due to No Flow detection NFLO The drive has tripped Fault status due to No Flow detection CAVS The drive has stopped Pause status due to Cavitation CAVI The drive has tripped Fault status due to Cavitation LOPR The drive has tripped due to low pressure fault LOWA The drive has tripped due to a fault detected in one of the digital inputs configured as No Water CYCL The drive has tripped due to excessive starting cycles IRFA The drive has tripped due to a fault in the irrigation equipment which has been detected in the digital input configured in that option FLOW The drive is limiting the speed to limit the flow OFF The drive has received the stop command 60 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Status Description SLEP The drive is in sleep mode because there is no flow demand The drive is forcing the speed after starting or stopping some of the BYPA fixed pumps RAMP Setpoint ramp activated FILL The drive is running at reduced speed because Pipe Fill function is active COMP The time of automatic stop has expired and the drive is stopped JOCK The Jockey pump is running PRIM Priming pump is connected FINP Fault occurred because the pressure switch is open Additionally the reference PID mode as followed by feedback as 96 is shown SV8 3 STATU
361. the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 2 0Bar gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 2 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 3 0Bar gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 3 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 4 0 gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 4 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 5 0Bar gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 5 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 6 0Bar gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 6 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 7 0Bar gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 7 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 8 0Bar gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 8 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 2 z 3 D x IS eo 3 D N D o o UJ D oa e m 79 4 e UD D e m 79 N 2 0Bar G25 1 6 Local setpoint 2 for the P e m 4 79 4 n e o G25 1 7 Local setpoint 3 for the P o m 79 4 gt 4 G25 1 8 Local setpoint 4 for the P 7 m 4 79 4 T a e I 2
362. the option 27 gt MACRO PUMP and free configuration is not allowed for it G25 9 5 TO ENABLE FIXED PUMP ASSOCIATED TO ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 5 ENABLE PUMP5 To enable the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 2 pump 5 N Y See Function for additional information N YES 42149 0 to 1 YES It allows setting enabling or disabling the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 2 If this parameter is set to Y when activating pump control in parameter G1 7 gt Program activation option PUMP and configuring one digital input parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with option 56 gt FIX PUMPS FLT the Analogue Output 2 is configured with option 27 gt MACRO PUMP to control fixed pumps If the pump associated to this analogue output is not required we recommend you disable it from this parameter In this way the analogue output can be configured for other uses N gt NO To disable the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 2 This analogue output is configured with the option 00 gt NONE and free configuration is allowed for it Y gt YES To enable the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 2 This analogue output is configured with the option 27 gt MACRO PUMP
363. the setpoint of PID regulator Selection options NONE Source disabled Alt Setpoint of PID regulator is introduced by Analogue Input 1 Al2 Setpoint of PID regulator is introduced by Analogue Input 2 RESERV Reserved for future use MREF Setpoint of PID regulator is introduced by means of digital inputs configured as multi references see parameter G4 1 4 Selection of digital inputs configuration and G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed or 53 2 Reference source 2 of speed LOCAL Setpoint of PID regulator is introduced by keypad Value adjusted in 53 3 gt Local speed reference locPID Setpoint of PID regulator is introduced by keypad Value adjusted in G6 2 gt local reference It allows having two speed references set from keypad since G3 3 gt Local speed reference is not modified when this parameter is adjusted 122 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G6 2 PID LOCAL REFERENCE Screen 2 PID LOC 0 0 Extended info PID LOCAL SETPOI Description Local reference for PID regulator Range 0 096 to 440096 Default value 0 096 Set on run YES Modbus address 40149 Modbus range 0 to 32760 Read Write YES Function Setpoint value of PID regulator is set in this parameter when option locPID is selected in parameter 56 1 gt Source selection for introducing reference signal The value of parameter G3 3 gt Local s
364. tion Note In case of Cavitation when the equipment goes into the drive is stopped and therefore it is not possible to continue monitoring values Once the cavitation condition disappears the delay time set in this parameter will start elapsing and when this time is elapsed the drive will start again G25 6 2 TO ENABLE CAVITATION PROTECTION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 2 CAVITATION To enable protection of pump from cavitation situation N Y See Function for additional information N YES 42085 0 to 1 YES It allows enabling or disabling the protection of pump from cavitation situation Options N 3 NO Protection from cavitation disabled Y gt YES Protection from cavitation enabled DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 265 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS To protect the pump from cavitation status it is necessary to realize the following settings Setto Y this parameter b Seta value of cavitation current in parameter G25 6 4 below which the first detection condition will be fulfilled Seta value of cavitation speed in parameter G25 6 5 above which the second detection condition will be fulfilled d Seta delay time for activation of cavitation protection in parameter G25 6 6 Once elapsed the last cavitation condition will be activated e Seta pause time for deactivat
365. tion for additional information about the configuration options G4 1 7 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 3 CONFIGURATION Screen 7 DIGITL IN 3 00 Description Multi function Digital Input 3 configuration Range 00 70 Default value 00 Set on run NO Modbus address 40034 Modbus range 0 to 70 Read Write YES Function It allows user to configure the Digital Input 3 for its individual use See Function in parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration for additional information about the configuration options 100 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G4 1 8 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 4 CONFIGURATION Screen 8 DIGITL IN 4 00 Description Multi function Digital Input 4 configuration Range 00 70 Default value 00 Set on run NO Modbus address 40035 Modbus range 0 to 70 Read Write YES Function It allows user to configure the Digital Input 4 for its individual use See Function in parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration for additional information about the configuration options G4 1 9 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 5 CONFIGURATION Screen 9 DIGITL IN 5 00 Description Multi function Digital Input 5 configuration Range 00 70 Default value 00 Set on run NO Modbus address 40036 Modbus range 0 to 70 Read Write YES Function It allows user to configure the Digital Input 5 for its individual use See Function i
366. tion It shows the drive rated voltage SV4 4 SOFTWARE VERSION Screen S W x xx Units Modbus address 40206 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value Read Write Read Only Description It shows the software version installed into the equipment SV4 5 HARDWARE VERSION Screen H W y y Units Modbus address 40207 Modbus range Real Value Modbus Value 100 Read Write Read Only Description It shows the hardware version of the equipment VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 51 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 5 4 6 PID REFERENCE VALUE Screen PID R 0 0926 Units feedback range Modbus address 40204 Modbus range 8192 100 maximum range of the Analogue Input Read Write Read Only Description It shows the reference value in PID mode of the equipment standard program SV4 7 PID FEEDBACK VALUE Screen PID F 0 096 Units Al used as feedback Modbus address 40205 Modbus range 8192 100 maximum range of the Analogue Input Read Write Read Only Description It shows the feedback value in PID mode of the equipment standard program SV4 8 PID ERROR VALUE Screen PID Error 0 0 Units feedback range Modbus address 40203 Modbus range 8192 100 maximum range of the Analogue Input Read Write Read Only Description It shows the error value in PID mode that means the difference between the reference value and the real value of the system feedback signal SV4 9 STATUS OF COMPARATORS
367. tion algorithm 0 0 to 250 s 2 0 6 YES 42146 0 to 20480 YES It allows setting the deceleration ramp that will be applied by the drive to decrease the pump speed until the read flow is lower than the flow set in parameter G25 10 2 gt Maximum allowed flow minus the margin set in G25 10 3 gt Offset percentage over maximum flow as offset or deviation margin DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 285 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 10 6 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT OF INSTANTANEOUS FLOW Screen 6 UNIT FLOW 1 6 Description Units of measurement of instantaneous flow Range Default value 1 5 Set on run Modbus address 42147 Modbus range 0 to 9 Read Write Read Only Function Read only parameter that shows the units of measurement of the instantaneous flow the source of which is set in parameter G25 10 1 gt Flow reading source 286 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 17 Subgroup 25 11 525 11 Registers Read only This subgroup shows the time operated by each auxiliary pump This time is visualized as amount of days and minutes It is especially useful when the alternation mode DUTY SHARE option 2 in parameter G25 9 6 gt Alternation mode of fixed pumps is used to check if the operated times by the auxiliary pumps are equal G25 11 1 OPERATED TIME BY PUMP 1 Screen 1 P1 0d Om Description Operated time by pump 1 Range
368. tion of sensor 1 units G4 2 2 SELECTION OF SENSOR 1 UNITS Screen 2 SENSOR 1 l s Description Selection of units of measurement for the sensor 1 Range 96 1 5 m s I m m3 m I h m3 h m s m m m h Bar kPa Psi C F K Default value 1 5 Set on run NO Modbus address 40272 Modbus range 0 to 16 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting different units of measurement for the Analogue Input 1 according to the sensor that is going to be used If this parameter is modified the minimum and maximum values are affected by the proper conversion For this reason the settings of the parameters G4 2 5 gt Minimum range of sensor 1 and G4 2 7 gt Maximum range of sensor 1 should be checked Note This parameter is only available if G4 2 1 gt To Enable sensor of Analogue Input 1 is set to Y 102 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G4 2 3 ANALOGUE INPUT 1 FORMAT Screen 3 AIN1 FORMAT V Description Analogue Input 1 format Range V mA Default value V Set on run NO Modbus address 40264 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write YES Function It allows user to configure the format of the Analogue Input 1 to connect a voltage or current signal according to the sensor or signal type used to introduce the reference 94 2 4 MINIMUM RANGE ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen 4 INmin1 0V Extended info AIN1 LOW RANGE Description Minimum range of the Analogue Input 1 Range 10 to
369. tive starting mode Ramp Spin adjusted in parameter G7 5 Start mode 2 NO 98 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 23 CURRENT LIMI2 To select the alternative current limit adjusted in G10 7 gt Alternative current limit NO 24 EXTERN EMERGE To generate the fault F56 EMERGEN STOP NC 50 gt PMP START STP Automatic starting of the system NO 51 FLOW PULSE Pulse input for the flowmeter NO 52 FIX PUMP1 FLT Auxiliary pump 1 fault NO 53 gt FIX PUMP2 FLT Auxiliary pump 2 fault NO 54 FIX PUMP3 FLT Auxiliary pump 3 fault NO 55 gt FIX PUMP4 FLT Auxiliary pump 4 fault NO 56 gt FIX PUMP5 FLT Auxiliary pump 5 fault NO 57 MAN PROTstart Manual starting including those protections enabled by the user NO 58 gt HI PRESS FLT High Pressure trip NC 59 LO WATER FLT No Water trip NC 60 LO PRESS FLT To detect a low pressure situation NO 61 FLOW SWITCH To connect an external flow switch open closed NC 62 IRRIGAT TRIP To detect an external fault from the irrigation equipment NO 63 gt SETPONT PIN1 Low bit Configuration of the low medium and high bit respectively for multiple PID setpoints selection according to the following table DIGITAL INPUTS Di z 65 64 63 PID SETPOINT G25 1 5 SETPT1 G25 1 6 SETPT2 G25 1 7
370. to brake the load inertia correctly If this value is too low the load will not be stopped in time On the other hand if the value is too high the power components of the drive will be stressed G17 3 VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE BRAKE Screen 3 DC VOLTS 0 0 Extended info DC BR VOLT LEVEL Description Voltage applied to the brake Range 0 0 2596 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40023 Modbus range 0 to 2048 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the level of DC voltage applied to the brake A proper voltage value must be set to brake the load inertia correctly If this value is too low the load will not be stopped in time On the other hand if the value is too high the power components of the drive will be stressed 206 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G17 4 NON CONDENSING HEATING CURRENT Screen 4 HEATING OFF Extended info Idc HEATING Description Non condensing heating current Range OFF 0 0 30 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40024 Modbus range 0 to 2458 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the DC current value to avoid humidity or condensation forming inside the motor Note You must only modify this parameter if condensation or humidity problems inside the motor are present CAUTION Although the motor is not running there is dangerous voltage RUN led will be lit during this process Be careful to avoid property d
371. to ensure correct cooling To avoid such a situation it is also necessary to leave enough horizontal and vertical space with any adjacent equipment We recommend cooling the cabinet to evacuate dissipated heat 2 4 Power Connection and Control Wiring 2 4 1 Power Wiring Input terminals drive supply and output terminals motor supply are accessible from the bottom SD700 is designed for working with 3 phase supply with the neutral connected to the earth It is not necessary to use power factor correction capacitors at the SD700 input and do not connect them to the output of the drive Line voltage should be connected to L1 L2 and L3 terminals and earth will be connected to the terminals assigned for this function Motor should be connected to the terminals indicated as U V and W SD70ITP0001CE Figure 2 1 Power Connection Detail 14 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 We recommend installing the drive according to the following connection INPUT POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE PE 380 480Vac 50 60Hz SD70DTP0003AI Figure 1 2 Power wiring connection Note It is recommended to use an earth cross section equal or higher than active wires cross section N CAUTION Line voltage must never be connected to U V and W terminals Otherwise the drive will be damaged 2 4 2 2 4 3 Control Wiring Control wiring should be installed as far as possible from the power wiring If y
372. top speed 6 for one fixed pump G25 4 25 gt Stop speed 7 for one fixed pump G25 4 26 gt Stop speed 8 for one fixed pump TIME TIME TIME G25 5 3 gt Speed bypass at the stopping of fixed pumps G25 5 4 gt Time of speed bypass after stoppi ing fixed pumps 5070 0029 Figure 10 50 Stopping of the fixed pumps according to the stop speed associated to each local setpoint for PID the PID error and the delay time for each pump 254 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 4 14 Screen DELAY TIME TO STOP FIXED PUMP 1 RELAY 1 Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function G25 4 15 Screen Note 14 FP T1 OF 10s FPUMP1 STP DELAY Delay time to stop the fixed pump 1 Relay 1 0 6000s 10s YES 42073 0 to 60000 YES It allows setting the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to the Relay 1 At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local setpoint depending on the selected local setpoint and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated DELAY TIME TO STOP FIXED
373. topping the drive Installation and wiring To reliably operate the drive install the drive in the proper orientation and with proper clearances Incorrect terminal wiring could result in the equipment damage Do not connect power factor capacitors surge arrestors or radio noise filters to the output side of the drive INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 13 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 2 2 Environmental Conditions Verify ambient conditions of mounting location Ambient temperature should not be below 309 or exceed 50 It is necessary to consider the use of the equipment according to normal duty or heavy duty It is recommended to consult the tables of standard types included in this manual to guarantee correct use of the equipment Relativity humidity should be less than 9596 non condensing Altitude should be below 1 000m 3 300ft SD700 is offered with IPOO IP20 and IP54 protection degree Nevertheless we recommend protecting it from conductive dust dry or wet and water drops As an electronic device the SD700 will have a longer life if the installation is done properly in a clean place with a correct ventilation System and protected from mechanical vibrations 2 3 Drive Mounting SD700 should be mounted vertically It should be well fastened through the anchorages designed for this to avoid any movement If the drive is installed inside a cabinet the heated air must be vented out of the cabinet
374. tronics Verify the wiring of digital input Check the installation Check the motor load Check if the motor cooling is appropriate Check the setting of the parameters related to pump overload in group G11 Verify the setting of minimum pressure level Check the operation of the low pressure switch detector Check the status of the analogue inputs 1 and 2 in parameters SV3 1 and SV3 4 in displaying group G0 Check if the pressure of the installation exceeds the set limits Verify the wiring of digital input A contact has activated to indicate that there is a fault by lack of water Verify the conditions of the installation Verify the wiring of digital input FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 317 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS DISPLAY F68 CAVIT UNDERL F69 FLOW SWITCH F70 IRRIGATOR F F71 CYCLING F72 INPRES SW POSSIBLE CAUSE The pump is operating with no load ACTIONS Check if the pump of the installation is not operating with no water Settings of the drive in protections group G25 6 are incorrect The digital input configured as flow detection indicates absence of the same one An external trip to the drive has been produced by closing a contact on the digital input configured as IRRIGAT TRIP The drive shows several start stop cycles wake up sleep in a short time Breakage or low water in aspiration circuit 12 3 Maintenance
375. ue 10 8192 100 Maximum range of the Analogue Input Real Value Modbus Value 10 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Readony MANUAL PUMP 0 0 0 to 1 See 42003 See 42003 3 3 0102 250 to 250 20480 to 20480 LOCAL AM Al2 OFF 0 1 99 9h LOCAL AI 2 0102 010999 MEN MODBUS COMMUNICATION 307 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Address Screen Description Range ModbusRange 42046 G25 2 3 PID feedback source AI Al2 PULSE 42052 02527 EmorofPIDreguatr Readony b 42061 62528 Error of PID regulator in engineering units Readony 42078 G25 4 16 Delay time to stop fixed pump 3 Relay 3 0 6000s 0 to 60000 42079 G25 4 17 Delay time to stop fixed pump 4 1 0 6000s 0 to 60000 42080 G25 4 18 Delay time to stop fixed pump 5 2 0 6000s 0 to 60000 42092 C25 6 10 time because of minimum pressure 0 9995 0 to 9990 42101 G25 6 13 Maximum pressure level 0 3276 Eng Units 0 to 32760 42102 G25 9 10 Bypass time for Priming pump 0 1 6000s 0 to 60000 42103 G25 9 11 Trip time of F72 while Priming pump is connected OFF 0 0 1 6000m 0 to 60000 42104 G25 6 11 Minimum speed for minimum pressure fault 0 096 to 250 0 to 20480 308 MODBUS COMMUNICATION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Address Screen Description
376. ue 15min Set on run YES Modbus address 40574 Modbus range 1 to 60 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the time once elapsed it the counter of auto reset attempts will be reset to zero Two situations are possible 1 Reset time of the counter elapses before the drive realizes the attempts number of auto reset adjusted in parameter G12 2 In this case the counter will be reset to zero 2 Drive realizes the attempts number of auto reset without achieving to start before the reset time of the attempts counter elapses In this case the fault is remained and the time value at which the last faulty attempt of auto reset occurred is remained by the reset timer of the attempts counter See figure 10 42 G12 5 SELECTION OF FAULT 1 TO BE RESET Screen 5 F1 AUTO RST 0 Description Selection of fault 1 to be reset Range 0 25 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40575 Modbus range 0 to 25 Read Write YES Function If auto reset function is enabled in G12 1 gt AUTO RESET option Y the drive will consider the fault programmed here as resettable automatically Fault 1 to be reset is selected according to the following options 0 gt 0 NO AUTO RESET There is no fault programmed If parameters G12 5 gt Selection of fault 1 to be reset to 612 8 3 Selection of fault 4 to be reset are set like this auto reset function is not executed 1 gt ALL TH
377. ue is enough for a good control If a higher control response is required increase this value An increase of this value can introduce a higher instability to the system G6 5 INTEGRATION TIME OF PID CONTROL Screen 5 INTEGRAL 0 05 Extended info PID INTEGRAL Description Integral time of PID control Range 0 0 1000s Max Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40145 Modbus range 0 to 10000 10001 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the integration time of PID control Note Usually default value is enough for a good control If this value is increased system accuracy is improved but its response can become slower G6 6 DERIVATION TIME OF PID CONTROL Screen 6 DIFFEREN 0 0s Extended info PID DIFFERENTIAL Description Derivation time of PID control Range 0 0 250s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Modbus address 40146 Modbus range 0 to 2500 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the derivation time of PID control Note Usually default value is enough for a good control If this value is increased then the system response is increased but accuracy can decrease 124 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G6 7 PID OUTPUT INVERSION Screen 7 INVERT PID N Description Inversion of PID regulator output Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run NO Modbus address 40147 Modbus range 0 to 1 Read Write
378. ue tester 3 U V W VDC VDC 5 with a tester gt 10kO 5 Have fluid leakages been observed 0 16 the capacitor well 0 Visual check No anomaly Instrument for Correct capacitor fastened Measure the capacitance with Capacitance higher than measuring 15 any dilation or a proper instrument 85 of rated capacitance capacity retraction sign observed 0 Measure the capacitance Is there any contactor 0 Audible check Contactor chatter No anomaly 16 the contact damaged 0 Visual check 288 5 Balanced voltage between Digital B Operatina check between AN ut voltade Measure voltage between phases i e lower than 8V multimeter 588 8 9 output terminals V and W difference for 400V RMS voltage ore phases oc models meter Are there any abnormal Disconnect the power supply 5 noises or oscillations 9 OFF and rotate the fan Fan should rotate 2 Cooling fan effortlessly 38 Is the cooling fan manually No anomaly disconnected 0 Check the connections gt Is the displayed value Check the reading instrument Check the specified Voltage meter 2 Measurement 0 0 with an external values and the control Current meter 2 correct a measurement values etc Is there any noise or Audible sensory visual AI abnormal vibrations check No anomal Has any unusual smell o Check if damages have been y 5 been perceived produced by overheating Disconnect the
379. ult value XXXA Set on run YES Modbus address 42325 Modbus range 0 to 12290 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the output current level to activate the sleep mode Output current will be monitored and when it is below the level set in this parameter delay time to activate sleep mode will start elapsing Once elapsed this delay time the drive will go in sleep mode So it allows setting the output current level below which a situation of demand will be detected This situation will send the drive to sleep When this parameter is set to OFF it will be disabled See figure 10 49 Note The drive can go to sleep in all of the conditions simultaneously Any fulfilled condition will begin the delay time to activate sleep mode or will keep it active in case of the condition that began it disappears 252 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 4 13 MAXIMUM PID ERROR TO STOP THE FIXED PUMPS Screen 13 FP erOFF 0 0 Extended info FPUMP STOP ERROR Description Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps Range 250 to 0 0 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 42072 Modbus range 20480 to 0 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the PID error below which the fixed pumps will be stopped Any error value more negative than the value set in this parameter will stop a fixed pump This one is an optional condition that can be considered or not accordi
380. um range of the Analogue Input 1 Range 250 to 250 max G4 2 9 Default value 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40246 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 max G4 2 9 Read Write YES 104 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function 94 2 9 or 64 3 9 SPEED If the Analogue Input 1 is used for introducing the speed reference setting of parameter G4 2 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 1 to N we can set in this parameter the value of this reference corresponding to the minimum voltage or current level set in parameter G4 2 4 gt Minimum range of Analogue Input 1 The value set here is a percentage of the motor rated speed 52 4 Motor rpm G10 2 or G10 4 G4 2 9 gt Speed for the maximum range of analogue input 1 G4 3 9 gt Speed for the maximum range of analogue input 2 G4 2 8 gt Speed for the minimum range of analogue input 1 TE G4 3 8 gt Speed for the minimum range of analogue input 2 0 INPUTS G10 2 Maximum speed limit 1 G10 1 or G10 3 G4 2 8 or 4 3 8 20mA 610 4 gt Maximum speed limit 2 G10 1 gt Minimum speed limit 1 G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 SD70ITCCO0002AI Figure 10 20 Scaling of the speed limits for the analogue inputs 94 2 9 SPEED FOR THE MAXIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen 9 SPD 100 Extended info SPD HIG RNG AIN1 Description Speed corresponding to the maximum
381. upply F12 IMB V IN ERES Input wiring is incorrect Check wiring F13 HI V IN Input power is incorrect Check input power conditions Incorrect setting of parameter G11 6 HIGH VOLT Check parameters settings F14 LWVIN Input power is incorrect damaged fuses Check input power conditions Incorrect setting of parameter G11 4 LOW VOLT Check parameters settings Input power is incorrect Check input power conditions load type of the F15 CURL Vdc Motor is driving an unstable load application and all of the motor mechanical parts If the fault persists after disconnecting output wires One of the input fuses is damaged request technical assistance High voltage peak on the input Check conditions of input power supply F16 HI Vdc High load regeneration Check stop conditions of the drive Deceleration ramp too high parameters G5 2 DECEL1 and 65 4 2 F17 LW Vdc Input power is wrong damaged fuses Check conditions of input power supply Motor is driving an unstable load Check motor circuit completely in case of possible F18 IMB V OUT Motor wiring fault wiring faults or motor fault If the fault persists after disconnecting output wires request technical Motor is wrong assistance F19 IMB OUT ee 8 supporting unstable loads Check motor circuit completely in case of possible O O WEINI TALE wiring faults or motor fault Motor is wrong Motor or wiring has shoit ir uited te around Disconnect
382. us range 0 to 20mA max G4 3 6 4 5 40249 10000 to 10000 max G4 3 6 010 20000 max G4 3 6 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the minimum voltage or current value for the Analogue Input 2 according to the characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected G4 3 5 MINIMUM RANGE OF SENSOR 2 Screen 5 Smi2 0 0Bar Extended info SENS2 LOW RANGE Description Minimum range of sensor 2 Range 3200 to 3200 Engineering units max G4 3 7 Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Modbus address 40255 Modbus range 3200 to 3200 max G4 3 7 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the minimum units value of the sensor connected to the Analogue Input 2 This value should also correspond to the minimum voltage or current level of the sensor set G4 3 4 gt Minimum range of Analogue Input 2 Note The setting of this parameter should be checked if the sensor units are changed in parameter G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units It is necessary to set this value to operate in open loop and closed loop Note This parameter will be only available if G4 3 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 2 is set to Y DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 109 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G4 3 6 MAXIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen 6 INmax2 20 Extended info AIN2 HIGH RANGE Description Maximum range of the Analogue Input 1 Range 10 to 10V min G4 3
383. use data bus transfer is wrong F49 SPD LIMIT Motor speed has exceeded the speed limit parameters G10 1 to G10 4 for the time set in G11 1 SP LIM TO F50 PSU FAULT Internal power supply is not supplying the correct voltage One voltage level has decreased to zero value for 100ms approx F52 SUPPLY FAN A fault in the power supply to the cooling fans has occurred F51 SCR TEMP Rectifier heat sink temperature has reached a dangerous level F52 SOFT C TEMP Overheating of the DC Bus soft charge resistors has occurred F53 INTRNAL TEMP Internal temperature of the SD700 control electronics chamber has reached a dangerous level F54 WATCHDOG TMR Internal fault of the microcontroller F56 EMERGEN STOP Digital input configured as EXTERN has been activated NC contact This fault is generated when the output current of the drive is higher than the current set in 611 11 PUMP OV POT ROMPONERER during the time adjusted in G11 13 DLY F65 LOW PRESSURE Active only when operating in Pump Control mode Trip generated when the pressure level is lower than the minimum pressure level set in G25 6 7 LoPre F66 HI PRESSURE Active only when operating in Pump Control mode External trip produced when digital input configured in this option Hi Pressure Switch is closed External trip produced when Pump Program 625 is activated and one of the digital inputs has been set as 59 F67 LOW WATER LO WATER FLT
384. value Set on run Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Function 15 MAC C 56 MAC address C 0 255 56 YES 40388 0 to 255 YES It allows setting the field C of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics See Function in parameter G20 4 13 gt MAC address for additional information DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 223 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G20 4 16 MAC ADDRESS D Screen 16 MAC D 78 Description MAC address D Range 0 255 Default value 78 Set on run YES Modbus address 40389 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field D of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics See Function in parameter G20 4 13 gt MAC address for additional information G20 4 17 MAC ADDRESS E Screen 17 MAC E 90 Description MAC address E Range 0 255 Default value 90 Set on run YES Modbus address 40390 Modbus range 0 to 255 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the field E of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics See Function in parameter G20 4 13 gt MAC address for additional information G20 4 18 MAC ADDRESS F
385. verse scaling In this way as the magnitude taken as reference in G8 2 1 Mode selection for Analogue Output 1 increases the output will decrease and vice versa See figure 10 32 146 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G8 2 4 HIGH RANGE SELECTION OF ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Screen 4 MAX1 RNG 100 Extended info MAX RANG ANAOUT1 Description High range selection of Analogue Output 1 Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Modbus address 40345 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the maximum level of the Analogue Output 1 Maximum value setting can be lower than the value of minimum level This allows the user to achieve inverse scaling In this way as the magnitude taken as reference in G8 2 1 gt Mode selection for Analogue Output 1 increases the output will decrease and vice versa See figure 10 32 G8 2 5 FILTER SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Screen 5 FILTER 1 OFF Extended info FILTER ANAOUTPU1 Description Filter selection for the Analogue Output 1 Range OFF 0 0 20 05 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40346 Modbus range 0 to 200 Read Write YES Function It allows selecting a filter for the Analogue Output 1 value and in the same time setting a value Sometimes if the analogue signal appears slightly unstable improved stability and response can be achieved with the addition of a suitable f
386. w bit The combination of these inputs offers the possibility of selecting up to seven different speed references or PID setpoints depending on the selected option explained above The following table relates the inputs DI4 DI5 and DI6 to the selected multi reference PARAMETER REFERENCE 014 015 016 614 1 1 0 0 1 G14 2 MREF 2 0 1 0 G14 3 MREF 3 0 1 1 G14 4 MREF 4 1 0 0 G14 5 MREF 5 1 0 1 G14 6 MREF 6 1 1 0 G14 7 MREF 7 1 1 1 In the following figure you can observe the selection of multi references according to the activation and or deactivation of the digital inputs 196 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SPEED 10096 G144 MREF 4 90 80 MREF 5 70 3 60 6 50 40 2 30 MREF 7 20 MREF 1 10 gt 0 t t t t 5 5 5 ts tio tu te ts DI6 3 ES Beer IET me OFF T T T T T f T T ti t t t 5 6 t t tis tiz ti DI5 ON 8 t 8 ti ti t ti te tis tu DI4 ON 5 t t t t t ts t ts tio tn te ts tu G14 1 gt Multi reference 1 614 5 gt Multi reference 5 G14 2 gt Multi reference 2 G14 6 gt Multi reference 6 G14 3 gt gt Multi reference 3 G14 7 gt Multi reference 7 G14 4 gt Multi reference 4 SD70ITCC0021BI Figu
387. w level to sleep the drive sleep mode as in parameter G25 4 11 Flow level to sleep the drive 58 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 9 6 Parameters SV 6 Registers This group includes several registers of general information about the drive use Therefore we can visualize a total and partial counter for running time RUN SV6 1 TOTAL TIME OF RUNNING RUN Screen Units Days and Hours Modbus address Modbus range 40550 gt Days 40551 3 Hours Days Real Value Modbus Value Hours gt 1 0 1hours Read Write Read Only Description It shows the total time during which the drive is running RUN SV6 2 PARTIAL TIME OF RUNNING RUN Screen PAR Units Days and Hours Modbus address Modbus range 40552 gt Days 40553 3 Hours Days Real Value Modbus Value Hours gt 1 0 1hours Read Write Read Only Description It shows the partial time during which the drive is running RUN SV6 3 RESET FOR PARTIAL TIME COUNTER OF RUNNING RUN Screen CLEAR PARTIAL Units Modbus address Modbus range Read Write Description 40554 0t01 N20 Ys 1 YES It allows resetting the counter of partial time for running status RUN VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 59 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 9 7 Parameters SV 8 Pump Control SV8 1 VALUES OF PID REFERENCE AND FEEDBACK Screen 0 0Bar 0 0Bar Unit
388. x 1440 800 2160 1800 1000 2160 10 SD71580 5x x xx 1580 900 2370 1975 1100 2370 SD71800 5x x xx 1800 1000 2700 2250 1200 2700 11 SD72200 5x x xx 2200 1200 3300 2750 1500 3300 Table 3 1 Table of power and current data at 400V NOTES Rated power for standard A C motors of 4 pole 1500rpm For higher power units contact Power Electronics The motor nameplate must be checked to ensure that the selected variable speed drive is correct for each specific motor 16 POWER RANGE POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 3 2 Power Range at 690Vac Operation Temperature 50 Operation Temperature 40 FRAME CODE HEAVY DUTY HEAVY DUTY Rated Power kW 150 Rated Power kW 120 690 Overload at 690Vac Overload SD70052 6x x xx 52 45 78 65 55 78 3 5070062 6x x xx 62 55 93 T8 75 93 SD70080 6x x xx 80 75 120 100 90 120 4 SD70105 6x x xx 105 90 157 131 110 157 SD70130 6x x xx 130 110 195 163 132 195 5 SD70150 6x x xx 150 132 225 188 160 225 SD70170 6x x xx 170 160 255 213 200 255 SD70210 6x x xx 210 200 315 263 250 315 6 SD70260 6x x xx 260 250 390 325 315 390 SD70320 6x x xx 320 315 480 400 355 480 7 SD70385 6x x xx 385 355 578 481 450 578 SD70460 6x x xx 460 450 690 575 500 690 8 5070550 6x x xx 550 500 825 688 630 825 SD70660 6x x xx 660 630 990 825 800 990 SD70750 6x x xx 750 710 1125 938 900 1125 9 5070840 6
389. x x xx 840 800 1260 1050 1000 1260 SD70950 6x x xx 950 900 1425 1188 1100 1425 SD71140 6x x xx 1140 1000 1710 1425 1300 1710 10 SD71270 6x x xx 1270 1200 1905 1588 1600 1905 SD71420 6x x xx 1420 1400 2130 1775 1700 2130 11 5071500 6 1500 1500 2250 1875 1800 2250 5071800 6 1800 1800 2700 2250 2000 2700 Table 3 2 Table of power and current data at 690V NOTES Rated power for standard A C motors of 4 pole 1500rpm For higher power units contact Power Electronics The motor nameplate must be checked to ensure that the selected variable speed drive is correct for each specific motor POWER RANGE 17 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS Power supply 380 500Vac 550 690Vac 20 to 51095 3 Phase 230Vac optional Input frequency 48 to 62 Hz Input current lt Output current Input power factor gt 0 98 of fundamental INEHT Power factor lt 0 88 Momentary power loss gt 2sec depending on the load ENC input filter Second environment limits 3 and 4 First environment limit 1 and 2 optional built in Harmonics filter Choke coils 396 impedance Motor output voltage 0Vac to 100 Input voltage Output frequency 0 to 250 Overload capacity 150 during 60sec at 50 C Efficiency at full load gt 97 Motor power kW 50 to 150 of SD700 rating OUTPUT Motor voltage 5 to 500Vac Control method Vector control without encoder Sensorless open loop Vector Control and V Hz Carrier fre
390. xtended info V Hz CHANGE Description Frequency V Hz change Range 0 0 0 1 100 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40018 Modbus range 0 to 8192 Read Write YES Function It allows a frequency value below which a special algorithm will be implemented This algorithm will improve the instability of the drive In some applications during a certain frequency range excessive current oscillation may be generated and this may cause the drive trip in overcurrent or over voltage protections In order to avoid these oscillations the value of this parameter must be decreased down to a certain frequency value below which a special algorithm to improve the instability of the drive will be implemented as mentioned before This parameter operates together with parameters G19 2 11 gt Stabilize factor in acceleration and G19 2 12 Stabilize factor in deceleration Note Whenever there is no instability in the system installation do not modify the default value of this parameter G19 2 11 STABILIZE FACTOR IN ACCELERATION Screen 11 STA F AC OFF Extended info STABILIZE F ACC Description Stabilize factor in acceleration Range 80 0 99 9 100 Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 40019 Modbus range 6554 to 8192 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a value as stabilize factor during acceleration Usually the instability of the system is reduced during the accel
391. xtended info INCH SPEED 2 Description Inch speed 2 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 00 Set on run YES Modbus address 40093 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set a value as inch speed 2 For more information see chapter 10 15 G15 INCH SPEEDS and figure 10 44 G15 3 INCH SPEED 3 Screen 3 INCH3 0 00 Extended info INCH SPEED 3 Description Inch speed 3 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 00 Set on run YES Modbus address 40094 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set a value as inch speed 3 For more information see chapter 10 15 G15 INCH SPEEDS and figure 10 44 202 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 16 Group 16 G16 Skip Frequencies G16 1 SKIP FREQUENCY 1 Screen 1 SKIP 1 0 096 Extended info SKIP FREQUENCY 1 Description Skip frequency 1 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Modbus address 40132 Modbus range 20480 to 20480 Read Write YES Function It allows user to set the first skip frequency With this user achieves an operation area not selectable this is where reference speeds cannot be adjusted to avoid resonance frequencies The drive will only take these reference values when is changing speed during acceleration and deceleration but it will not operation at these speed values One this value is set the bandwidth adjusted
392. ypass time for the Priming pump Range 0 1 6000s Default value 300s Set on run YES Modbus address 42102 Modbus range 0 to 60000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting the bypass time for the Priming pump Once stopped the Priming pump and started the drive if the digital input configured as pressure switch parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration option 69 PRESSUR SWITC is opened during the time set in this parameter the fault F72 IN PRESS SW will be produced Note The fault F72 is only produced if there is some output relay configured with the option 80 PRIMING PUMP parameters G8 1 1 68 1 5 and G8 1 9 and some digital input configured with the option 69 PRESSUR SWITC parameter G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 282 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 9 11 TRIP TIME OF F72 WHILE PRIMING PUMP IS CONNECTED Screen 11 PRp DLY OFF Extended info PRIM PUM FLTdly Description Trip time of F72 while the Priming pump is connected Range OFF 0 0 1 6000m Default value OFF Set on run YES Modbus address 42103 Modbus range 0 to 60000 Read Write YES Function It allows setting a time to produce the fault F72 when the Priming pump is connected If the Priming pump is connected and the time set in this parameter has elapsed from the starting of this pump without detecting pressur
393. ystem This means that the drive do not start the communication task master will be the one that starts this task Practically all of the operating modes parameters and drive characteristics are accessible through serial communications For example master can give start and stop order to the drive control SD700 status read the current used by the motor in short master can access to the all of the possibilities of the drive 11 1 2 Hardware Physical level 3 cables optically insulated half duplex RS232 single ending Terminals 23 RS Common 0Vdc Output signal level Input signal level 24 RS232 Rx receiving line 25 5232 Tx transmitting line logical lt 6 5V regarding to OV 0 logical gt 6 5V regarding to OV 1 logical lt 0 8V 0 logical gt 2 4V RS232 Maximum line impedance 2500pF 3kQ Insulation 50Vdc regarding to the earth Programmable inputs via Modbus 7 digital inputs 2 programmable analogue inputs 0 10V 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA Programmable outputs via Modbus 3 relay outputs 2 programmable analogue outputs 0 10V 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA Maximum number of SD700 1 connected into a network Maximum cable length 15m Physical level 2 cables optically insulated half duplex RS485 differential mode Terminals 21 gt RS485 A negative 22 5485 B positive 23 gt RS Common 0 40 Output signal level 1 logical 5V differential 0 logical 5V differential Input signa
394. zation Line 2 It is the third line of the screen It is always present and allows the selection of variables from the visualization menu It is configurable by the user Staius Line Visualization Line Visualization Line Programming Line Programming Line It is the fourth line SD70ITCOO08AI It is used to display and or set different parameters within the SD700 Figure 7 3 Detail of Display Lines 7 1 3 Control Keys Function keys have multiple uses and can be operated individually or in combination with other keys Q e It allows access to different parameters groups and sub groups it displays code explanations and allows adjustment of parameter values in combination with other keys If a group has no sub groups it allows direct access to the parameters of the group To modify numeric parameters amp pn Simultaneously pushed the value will increase I imult hed th ill amp Simultaneously pushed the value will decrease Simultaneously pushed will ascend the user through the varying options Simultaneously pushed will descend the user through the varying options It allows upward movement through the parameters groups and allows navigation for different parameters within a parameter group It also allows the increase of parameters value It allows downward movement through the parameters groups and allows navigation for different parameters within a parameter group It also

User Manual - Ana

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents